CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR JVWTP LABORATORY HVAC

Transcription

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR
JVWTP LABORATORY HVAC RETROFIT PROJECT
3975
MARCH 28, 2016
OWNER
Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District
8215 South 1300 West
West Jordan, Utah
801.565.4300
ENGINEER
David L. Jensen & Associates, Inc.
547 West 500 South, Suite #140
Bountiful, Utah 84010
801.294.9299
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Bidding Documents
Page
Notice Inviting Bids.......................................................................................................A-1
Instructions to Bidders.................................................................................................. B-1
Bid……......................................................................................................................... C-1
Bid Bond....................................................................................................................... D-1
Information Required of Bidder .................................................................................... E-1
Contract Documents
Agreement.................................................................................................................... F-1
Performance Bond ....................................................................................................... G-1
Payment Bond.............................................................................................................. H-1
Notice of Award............................................................................................................ I-1
Notice to Proceed......................................................................................................... J-1
Payment Application and Certificate ............................................................................ K-1
Change Order .............................................................................................................. L-1
Contractor's Certificate of Substantial Completion....................................................... M-1
Contractor's Certificate of Final Completion................................................................. N-1
Consent of Surety for Final Payment ........................................................................... O-1
Affidavit of Payment ..................................................................................................... P-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
Article
1 - Definitions ............................................................................................................ 1-1
2 - Preliminary Matters .............................................................................................. 2-1
3 - Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse .................................................. 3-1
4 - Availability of Land; Physical Conditions: Reference Points .................................. 4-1
5 - Bonds and Insurance ........................................................................................... 5-1
6 - Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................ 6-1
7 - Other Work ....................................................................................................... 7-1
8 - Owner's Responsibilities ...................................................................................... 8-1
9 - Engineer's Status during Construction.................................................................. 9-1
10 - Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 10-1
11 - Change of Contract Price ................................................................................. 11-1
12 - Change of Contract Time ................................................................................. 12-1
13 - Warranty and Guarantee; Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal,
Or Acceptance of Defective Work .................................................................. 13-1
14 - Payments to Contractor, Liquidated Damages and Completion ....................... 14-1
i
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
15 - Suspension of Work and Termination ......................................................... 15-1
16 - Miscellaneous .............................................................................................. 16-1
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
Article
Page
17 - General ............................................................................................................ 17-1
18 - Amounts of Liquidated Damages, Bonds, and Insurance ................................. 18-1
19 - Physical Conditions and Weather Delays ......................................................... 19-1
20 - Subcontract Limitations .................................................................................... 20-1
21 - Miscellaneous .................................................................................................. 21-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
Page
Summary ............................................................................................................... 011000-1
Substitution Procedures ........................................................................................ 012500-1
Contract Modification Procedures .......................................................................... 012600-1
Payment Procedures ............................................................................................. 012900-1
Project Management and Coordination ................................................................. 013100-1
Construction Progress Documentation .................................................................. 013200-1
Submittal Procedures ............................................................................................ 013300-1
Alteration Project Procedures ................................................................................ 013516-1
Quality Requirements ............................................................................................ 014000-1
References ...................................................................................................................... 014200-1
Product Requirements ........................................................................................... 016000-1
Closeout Procedures ............................................................................................. 017700-1
Operation and Maintenance Data .......................................................................... 017823-1
Project Record Documents.................................................................................... 017839-1
Demonstration and Training .................................................................................. 017900-1
Reinforcing Steel ................................................................................................... 032100-1
Normal Weight Structural Concrete ....................................................................... 033111-1
Water Concrete Curing.......................................................................................... 033913-1
Structural Steel Framing ........................................................................................ 051200-1
Common Work Results for Plumbing .................................................................... 220500-1
Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping ................................................................. 220519-1
Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping ............................................................................. 220523.12-1
ii
Check Valves for Plumbing Piping ......................................................................... 220523.14-1
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment .................................. 220529-1
Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ..................... 220548-1
Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.................................................. 220553-1
Plumbing Piping Insulation .................................................................................... 220719-1
Domestic Water Piping .......................................................................................... 221116-1
Domestic Water Piping Specialties ........................................................................ 221119-1
Common Work Results for HVAC ......................................................................... 230500-1
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment............................................. 230513-1
Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping .......................................................... 230517-1
Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping ...................................................................... 230519-1
Ball Valves for HVAC Piping .................................................................................. 230523.12-1
Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping........................................................................... 230523.13-1
Check Valves for HVAC Piping.............................................................................. 230523.14-1
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment ....................................... 230529-1
Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC.............................................................. 230548-1
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment....................................................... 230553-1
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC – Air/Hydronic ................................... 230594-1
Duct Insulation ....................................................................................................... 230713-1
HVAC Equipment Insulation .................................................................................. 230716-1
HVAC Piping Insulation ......................................................................................... 230719-1
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC-BACnet ..................................................... 230900-1
Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls.......................................................... 230993-1
Facility Natural Gas Piping .................................................................................... 231123-1
Hydronic Piping ..................................................................................................... 232113-1
Hydronic Piping Specialties ................................................................................... 232116-1
Hydronic Pumps .................................................................................................... 232123-1
HVAC Water Treatment ........................................................................................ 232500-1
Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems ........................................... 232513-1
Metal Ducts ........................................................................................................... 233113-1
Air Duct Accessories ............................................................................................. 233300-1
Air Terminal Units .................................................................................................. 233600-1
Particulate Air Filtration.......................................................................................... 234100-1
Condensing Boilers ............................................................................................... 235216-1
Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioners ....................................................................... 237412-1
Electrical General Provisions ................................................................................. 260001-1
Electrical Connections for Equipment .................................................................... 260070-1
Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints ........................................................... 260072-1
Electrical Demolition .............................................................................................. 260080-1
Conduit Raceways................................................................................................. 260110-1
Conductors and Cables ......................................................................................... 260120-1
Electrical Boxes and Fittings.................................................................................. 260135-1
Motor Starters........................................................................................................ 260155-1
ii
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
Page
Variable Frequency Drives .................................................................................... 260156-1
Disconnect Switches ............................................................................................. 260170-1
Overcurrent Protective Devices ............................................................................. 260180-1
Grounding ............................................................................................................. 260452-1
DRAWINGS
Section
Page
Cover Sheet .......................................................................................................... G1.1
General Structural Notes....................................................................................... S0.1
Floor Framing Plan................................................................................................ S2.1
Plumbing Legend and General Notes ................................................................... P0.1
First Floor Plumbing Plan ...................................................................................... P1.1
Second Floor Plumbing Plan................................................................................. P1.2
Third Floor Plumbing Plan..................................................................................... P1.3
Plumbing Details ................................................................................................... P5.1
Plumbing Schedules ............................................................................................. P6.1
Mechanical Legend and General Notes ................................................................ M0.1
First Floor Mechanical Plan................................................................................... MH1.1
Second Floor Mechanical Plan ............................................................................. MH1.2
Third Floor Mechanical Plan ................................................................................. MH1.3
Lab Mechanical Plan............................................................................................. M4.1
Boiler Room Mechanical Plan ............................................................................... M4.2
Mechanical Details ................................................................................................ M5.1
Mechanical Schedule ............................................................................................ M6.1
Mechanical Piping Diagram................................................................................... M6.2
Mechanical Control Diagrams ............................................................................... ME5.1
Schedules and One Line Diagram ........................................................................ E0.1
First Floor Electrical Plan ...................................................................................... E1.1
Second Floor Electrical Plan ................................................................................. E1.2
Third Floor Electrical Plan ..................................................................................... E1.3
Enlarged Electrical Plan ........................................................................................ E4.1
4
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
PROJECT NAME: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Work under this contract consists of upgrading the existing
laboratory HVAC system by installing a boiler, an A/C unit and appurtenances.
DISTRICT WEB SITE AND PLAN HOLDERS LIST
Prospective bidders must register at the District’s web site (www.jvwcd.org) under
“Engineering Projects”. Prospective bidders are required to check the District’s web site for
any addenda prior to submitting a responsive bid. The District’s web site will be used to
publish updated information relative to the project, including a plan holders list.
RECEIPT OF BIDS: Sealed bids will be received at the office of the Jordan Valley Water
Conservancy District, Owner of the Work, located at 8215 South 1300 West, West Jordan,
Utah 84088, until 4:00 pm, on April 15 2016.
OBTAINING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The Contract Documents are entitled, “Jordan
Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit”. All Contract Documents may
be downloaded from the Owner website at no charge, or obtained at the office of the
Owner beginning Tuesday, March 29, 2016, upon payment of $150.00 (nonrefundable) for each set of Contract Documents (including specification and accompanying
drawings) or $15.00 for a compact disk with the same information.
OPENING OF BIDS: The bids will be publicly opened and read at the time and location
identified above.
SITE OF WORK: The Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant (JVWTP) is located 15305
South 3200 West, Herriman, UT84065.
PRE-BID SITE VISIT: A mandatory pre-bid site visit will be held at 3:00 pm on
April 5, 2016 at the site of the work for interested bidders.
COMPLETION OF WORK: All work shall be completed 140 (One hundred forty)
calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed.
AWARD OF CONTRACT: An Award of Contract, if it were awarded, will be made within 60
calendar days of the opening of bids.
NOTICE TO PROCEED: A Notice to Proceed, if it were issued, will be made within 60
calendar days of the Notice of Award.
BID SECURITY: Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier’s check, money
order or bid bond in the amount of five percent of the total bid price payable to the Jordan
Valley Water Conservancy District as a guarantee that the bidder, if its bid is accepted, will
A-1
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
promptly execute the contract, provide evidence of worker's compensation insurance, and
furnish a satisfactory faithful performance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the total
bid price and a payment bond in the amount of 100 percent of the total bid price.
ADDRESS AND MARKING OF BID: The envelope enclosing the bid shall be sealed and
addressed to the Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District and delivered or mailed to
8215 South 1300 West, West Jordan, Utah 84088. The envelope shall be plainly marked
in the upper left-hand corner with the name and address of the bidder and shall bear the
words "Bid for," followed by the title of the Contract Documents for the work and the date
and hour of opening of bids. The certified or cashier’s check, money order, or bidder's
bond shall be enclosed in the same envelope with the bid.
PROJECT ADMINISTRATION: All questions relative to this project prior to the opening of
bids shall be directed to the Engineer for the project. It shall be understood, however, that
no interpretations of the specifications will be made by telephone, nor will any "or equal"
products be considered for approval prior to award of contract.
Engineer
Project Manager: Richard Jensen, P.E.
547 West 500 South, Suite 140
Bountiful, Utah 84010
Telephone: 801-294-9299
Email: [email protected]
OWNER'S RIGHTS RESERVED: The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to
waive any informality in a bid, and to make awards in the interest of the Owner.
Owner
Project Manager: Marcelo Anglade, P.E.
West Jordan, Utah 84088
Telephone: (801) 565-4300
Email: [email protected]
JORDAN VALLEY WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT
A-2
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
FORM OF BID: The bid shall be made on the bidding schedule(s) bound herein. The bid
shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope bearing the name of the bidder and name of the
project. In the event there is more than one bidding schedule, the bidder may bid on any
individual schedule or on any combination of schedules.
DELIVERY OF BID: The bid shall be delivered by the time and to the place stipulated in
the Notice Inviting Bids. It is the bidder's sole responsibility to see that his bid is received in
proper time.
WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS: Bids shall be unconditionally accepted without alteration or
correction, excepting that bidder may by means of written request, signed by the bidder or
his properly authorized representative withdraw his bid. Such written request must be
delivered to the place stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids for receipt of bids prior to the
scheduled closing time for receipt of bids.
OPENING OF BIDS: The bids will be publicly opened and read at the time and place
stipulated in the Notice Inviting Bids.
MODIFICATIONS AND ALTERNATIVE BIDS: Unauthorized conditions, limitations, or
provisions attached to a bid may render it non-responsive and may cause its rejection. The
completed bid forms shall be without interlineations, alterations, or erasures. Alternative
bids will not be considered unless called for. Oral, telegraphic, or telephonic bids or
modifications will not be considered.
DISCREPANCIES IN BIDS: In the event there is more than one bid item in a bidding
schedule, the bidder shall furnish a price for all bid items in the schedule; failure to do so
may render the bid non-responsive and subject to rejection. In the event there are unit
price bid items in a bidding schedule and the "amount" indicated for a unit price bid item
does not equal the product of the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall govern and the
"amount" will be corrected accordingly, and the Contractor shall be bound by said
Correction. In the event there is more than one bid item in a bidding schedule and the total
indicated for the schedule does not agree with the sum of the prices bid on the individual
items, the prices bid on the individual items shall govern and the total for the schedule will
be corrected accordingly, and the Contractor shall be bound by said correction.
BID SECURITY: Each bid shall be accompanied by a certified or cashier’s check or
approved bid bond in the amount stated in the Notice Inviting Bids. Said check or bond
shall be made payable to the Owner and shall be given as a guarantee that the bidder, if
awarded the work, will enter into a contract within 10 calendar days after receipt of the
contract from the Owner, and will furnish the necessary insurance certificates, Payment
Bond, and Performance Bond; each of said bonds to be in the amount stated in the Notice
Inviting Bids. In case the apparent low bidder refuses or fails to enter into such contract or
fails to provide the required insurance and insurance certificates, the check or bid bond, as
B-1
the case may be, shall be forfeited to the Owner. If the bidder elects to furnish a bid bond
as his bid guarantee, he shall use the bid bond bound herein, or one conforming
substantially to it in form. For bids less than $50,000 bonds are not required. (i.e. Bid
Bond, Payment Bond, Performance Bond).
BIDDER'S EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE
It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:
1.
Examine Contract Documents thoroughly.
2.
Visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost,
progress, performance, or furnishing of the work.
3.
Consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost,
progress, and performance of furnishing of the work.
4.
Study and carefully correlate the Bidder's observations with the Contract
Documents.
5.
Notify the Engineer of all conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in the Contract
Documents.
Reference is made to the Supplemental General Conditions for identification of:
1.
Those reports of exploration and tests of subsurface conditions at the site,
which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract
Documents.
2.
Those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and
subsurface conditions (except underground utilities as defined in Article 1 of
the General Conditions) which are at or contiguous to the site and which
were utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents.
Copies of such reports and drawings are available for inspection at the office
of the Owner.
Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground
facilities at/or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the
Owner and the Engineer by the owners of such underground facilities or others, and the
Owner does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof
B-2
including any damages whatsoever that may be incurred by the Bidder or the Contractor
through his reliance thereon unless it is expressly provided otherwise in the Supplemental
General Conditions and/or the Technical Specifications.
Before submitting a bid, the bidder shall conduct such examination, investigations, studies
and tests as are necessary to satisfy himself as to: the nature and location of the physical
conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities), the general and local
conditions particularly those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of
materials, availability of labor, availability of utilities, local weather conditions, the character
of equipment and facilities required preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work;
any and all other conditions that may in any way affect the cost, progress, performance or
furnishing of materials in accordance with the Contract Documents. All such examination,
investigation, studies, tests and the like shall be at the Bidder's expense.
Upon reasonable request in advance, the Owner shall provide each Bidder access to the
site to conduct such explorations, examination, investigation and tests as each Bidder may
determine necessary for the submission of a Bid. The Bidder shall fill all holes, clean and
restore the site to its former condition upon the completion of such activities.
The submission of a bid hereunder shall be considered prima facie evidence that the
Bidder has made such examination as is set forth in the above paragraph and is
knowledgeable as to the location and site conditions surrounding the work and the
conditions to be encountered in performing the work and as to the requirements, conditions
and terms of the Contract and Contract Documents.
The Owner assumes no responsibility for any understanding or representations made by
any of its officers or agents during or prior to the execution of this Contract, for information
contained in any reports, subsurface studies, or other information which may be made
available for the Contractor's information and which are not included as Contract
Documents, for any understanding or representations by the Owner or by others which are
not expressly stated in the Contract Documents which liability is not expressly assumed by
the Owner or its representatives or Engineer in the Contract Documents. Such information
shall be deemed to be for the information of the Contractor and the Contractor shall have
the obligation of evaluating any such information as to its accuracy and effect the Owner
will not be liable or responsible for any such information or any conclusions that may be
drawn there from by the Contractor.
B-3
The lands upon which the work is to be performed, right-of-ways and easements for access
thereto together with other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the
work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto that
are required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are
to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent
changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the Owner unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.
The submission of a Bid shall constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder
that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without
exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the work required by the
Contract Documents in compliance with such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or
procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents;
and that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures described in the
Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing the work.
QUANTITIES OF WORK
The quantities of work or material stated in the Bid Schedule are supplied only to give an
indication of the general scope of the work; the Owner does not expressly or by implication
agree that the actual amount of work or material will correspond therewith. The Owner
reserves the right after award of the Contract to increase or decrease the quantities of any
unit price item of the work by an amount up to and including 25 percent of the quantity of
any bid item, or to omit portions of such work as may be deemed necessary or expedient
by the Engineer or Owner, without a change in the unit price. Such right to revise and omit
shall include the right to delete any bid item in its entirety, or to add additional bid items in
quantities up to and including an aggregate total amount not to exceed 25 percent of the
total amount of the Contract.
The Bidders nor the ultimate Contractor on the Project shall at any time after the submittal
of a bid make or have any claim for damages or anticipated profits or loss of profit or
otherwise because of any difference between the quantities of work actually done and
material furnished and those stated in said unit price items of the Bid.
COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS: In selecting the lowest responsible Bidder, consideration
will be given to the general competency of the Bidder for the performance of the work
covered by the Bid. To this end, each bid shall be supported by a statement of the bidder's
experience as of recent date on the form entitled "Information Required of Bidder," bound
herein. No bid for the work will be accepted from a contractor who does not hold an active
Contractor's license in good standing applicable to the type of work bid upon at the time of
opening bids.
After an award of the contract no substitution of the Project Manager or Project
Superintendent will be allowed without the written approval by the Owner.
B-4
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS: More than one bid from an individual, firm
partnership, corporation, or association under the same or different names will not be
considered. Reasonable grounds for believing that any bidder is interested in more than
one bid for the work contemplated will cause the rejection of all bids in which such bidder is
interested. If there is reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, all bids
will be rejected.
RETURN OF BID GUARANTEE: Within 10 calendar days after award of the contract, the
Owner will return the bid guarantees accompanying such of the bids as are not considered
in making the award. All other bid guarantees will be held until a Notice to Proceed has
been issued and accepted. They will then be returned to the respective bidders whose
bids they accompany.
AWARD OF CONTRACT: Award of the Contract, if it be awarded, will be based primarily
on the lowest overall cost to the Owner, and will be made to a responsive and responsible
bidder whose bid complies with all the requirements prescribed. Any such award will be
made by written notice and within 60 calendar days after opening of the bids, unless a
different waiting period is expressly allowed in the Notice Inviting Bids. Unless otherwise
indicated, an award will not be made for less than all the bid items in an individual bidding
schedule. In the event the entire work is contained in more than one bidding schedule, the
Owner may award schedules individually or in combination. In the case of two bidding
schedules which are alternate to each other, only one of such alternate schedules will be
awarded.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The Bidder to whom the award is made shall secure all
insurance and shall furnish all certificates and bonds required by the specifications within
ten calendar days after receipt of the Notice of Award from the Owner. The Bidder to
whom the award is made shall execute a written contract with the Owner on the form of
agreement provided within ten calendar days after receipt of the Agreement from the
Owner. Failure or refusal to enter into a contract as herein provided or to conform to any of
the stipulated requirements in connection therewith shall be just cause for annulment of the
award and forfeiture of the bid guarantee. If the successful bidder refuses or fails to
execute the contract, the Owner may award the contract to the second lowest responsible
bidder, or reject all bids and re-advertise the project for rebidding. If the second lowest
responsible bidder refuses or fails to execute the contract, the Owner may award the
contract to the third lowest responsible bidder. On the failure or refusal of such second or
third lowest bidder to execute the contract, each such bidder's guarantees shall be likewise
forfeited to the Owner.
ISSUANCE OF NOTICE TO PROCEED: The Owner intends to execute the Agreement
and issue the Notice to Proceed specifying the Project start date within ten calendar days
after its receipt of the executed Agreement, Purchase Order Assignment(s), (if applicable),
bonds and insurance certificates from the successful bidder. If the Contract Time is
B-5
expressed as a specific completion date in the Notice Inviting Bids and paragraph 3.1 of
the Agreement rather than a specific number of successive days following the start date
identified in the Notice to Proceed, then any delay by the Owner beyond the ten days in
issuing the Notice to Proceed shall extend the completion date by the number of days of
the delay.
LICENSES: Contractor must be licensed as a business qualified to do business within the
state of Utah prior to issuance of a Notice of Award. Contractor must hold a current
contractor’s license with classifications appropriate to the work being contracted.
UTAH CONSTRUCTION REGISTRY: Following issuance of the Notice to Proceed the
Contractor shall register the project with the Utah Construction Registry. For purposes of
this registry the contract number shall be the project number identified on the front page of
these documents.
B-6
BID
BID TO:
The undersigned Bidder hereby proposes to furnish all plant machinery, labor, services,
materials, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, and all other items and
facilities necessary to perform all work required under the Bidding Schedule of the Owner's
Contract Documents entitled “Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC
Retrofit” drawings and all addenda issued by said Owner prior to opening of the bids.
Addenda are only delivered by e-mail and through the internet.
The undersigned bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
No.
Date Received
No.
Date Received
Bidder agrees that, within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award from Owner, he
will execute the Agreement in the required form, of which the Notice Inviting Bids,
Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Information Required of Bidder, Technical Specifications,
Drawings, and all addenda issued by Owner prior to the opening of bids, are a part, and
will secure the required insurance and bonds and furnish the required insurance
certificates; and that upon failure to do so within said time, then the bid guarantee
furnished by Bidder shall be forfeited to Owner as liquidated damages for such failure;
provided, that if Bidder shall execute the Agreement, secure the required insurance and
bonds, and furnish the required insurance certificates within said time, his check, if
furnished, shall be returned to him within five days thereafter, and the bid bond, if
furnished, shall become void. It is further understood that this bid may not be withdrawn
for a period of 45 days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise required
by law.
Bidder hereby certifies he has registered and participates in the Status Verification System
(E-Verify).
Dated:
Bidder:
By:
(Signature)
Title:
Bidder further agrees to complete all work required within the time stipulated in the
Contract Documents, and to accept in full payment therefore the price(s) named in the
above-mentioned Bidding Schedule(s).
C-1
BID
BID SCHEDULE
JORDAN VALLEY WETER TREATMENT PLANT HVAC RETROFIT
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITY
UNIT COST
EXTENDED COST
1. GENERAL ADMINISTRATIVE
A.
Mobilization
Lump
$
$
B.
Demobilization
Lump
$
$
2. ARCHITECTURAL
A.
Structural and Misc. Steel
Lump
$
$
B.
Roofing
Lump
$
$
C.
Flashing and Sheet Metal
Lump
$
$
3. PLUMBING / HVAC
A.
Test, Adjust and Balance Mechanical
Lump
$
$
B.
Plumbing
Lump
$
$
C.
HVAC
Lump
$
$
D.
Temperature Control
Lump
$
$
Lump
$
$
4. ELECTRICAL
A.
Electrical
Bid in words:
Dollars and
C-2
cents.
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That
as Principal,
and
as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District
(hereinafter
called
"Owner")
in
the
sum
of
dollars, (not less than five percent of the total amount of the bid) for the payment of which
sum, will and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Principal has submitted a bid to Owner to perform all work required under the
bidding Schedule of the Owner's Contract Documents entitled “Jordan Valley Water
Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit”, (hereafter called the “Project”).
NOW THEREFORE, if Principal is awarded Contract by Owner for the Construction of the
Project and, within the time and in the manner required under the heading "Instructions to
Bidders" enters into the written contract entitled "Agreement" bound with said Contract
Documents, furnishes the required certificates of insurance, and furnishes the required
Performance Bond and Payment Bond within 10 calendar days after receipt of such
contract from Owner, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in
full force and effect. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by Owner and judgment is
recovered, Surety shall pay all costs incurred by Owner in such suit, including a reasonable
attorney's fee to be fixed by the court.
SIGNED AND SEALED, this
day of
By:
By:
Its:
Its:
(SEAL)
, 20
(SEAL)
D-1
.
INFORMATION REQUIRED OF BIDDER
The Bidder shall furnish the following information. Failure to comply with this requirement
may render the Bid non-responsive and subject to rejection. Additional sheets shall be
attached as required.
1.
2.
Contractor's name:
Contractor’s address:
Contractor’s
Primary
Email address
of
Contractor’s
Contractor's telephone number:
primary
Contact:
contact:
3.
Contractor must be qualified and licensed to do business in Utah.
Utah Department of Commerce Information
Business Entity Number:
Delinquent Date:
4.
Contractor must hold a current contractor’s license, classification E100.
Contractor's Utah License Number:
Expiration Date:
Primary
Classification:
Supplemental Classification
held, if any:
E-1
5.
Key Personnel Qualifications and Experience
List key personnel here and provide detailed information in Attachments A and
B. More than one Project Manager and/or Project Superintendent may be
proposed. Only personnel approved by the Owner will be allowed in the key
positions.
Project Manager A:
Project Manager (Alternate 1):
Project Manager (Alternate 2):
Project Manager shall have:
 At least five (5) years of experience
 Have successfully performed as Project Manager on the
construction of at least three (3) laboratory HVAC retrofit
projects.
Project Superintendent A:
Project Superintendent (Alternate 1):
Project Superintendent (Alternate 2):
Project Superintendent shall have:
 At least five (5) years of experience as a Superintendent.
 Have successfully performed as Superintendent on the
Construction of at least five (5) laboratory HVAC retrofit
projects.
6.
Previous Contractor Project Experience
Past project experience shall be provided for each requirement. The
Owner shall be entitled to contact each and every reference listed by the
contractor. The Contractor, by submitting a prequalification proposal,
expressly agrees that any information concerning the CONTRACTORS in
possession of said entities and references may be made available to the
owner.
Provide the information identified in Attachment C for each project listed
below
Requirements:
E-2
Contractor shall have successfully completed at least three (3) laboratory
HVAC retrofit projects of similar type and size as the retrofit described in
this bid within the last five (5) years:
1.
2.
3.
4.
7.
Number of years as a contractor in construction work of this type:
8.
Name and title of officers of Contractor's firm:
9.
Number of persons employed full-time by the firm:
10.
Name of person who inspected site of proposed work for your firm:
Name:
Date of Inspection:
11.
Surety company who will provide the required bonds on this contract:
Agent’s Name:
Telephone:
12.
Workers Compensation Insurance Policy #:
E-3
ATTACHMENT A
(Copy as necessary – recommended to provide more projects than required)
Project Manager Data Sheet
Name:
Years experienced as Project Manager:
Years of prior experience:
Positions:
Qualifying Project #1:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Owner Contact Person:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
E-4
ATTACHMENT B
Superintendent Data Sheet
Name:
Years experienced as Superintendent:
Years of prior experience:
Positions:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
Project Summary:
Year Completed:
Total Cost:
Owner:
Telephone:
E-5
ATTACHMENT C
Contractor Project Experience Summary
Project
Name:
Project Location:
Project Manager:
Project Superintendent:
Project Description:
Date Bid:
Date Completed:
Contract bid price:
Contract final price:
Contract duration at bid:
Final contract duration:
Owner’s contact information:
E-6
AGREEMENT
An Agreement made as of the
day of
, by and between the
Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District, a water conservancy district organized under
the laws of the State of Utah (“OWNER”), and
, a
corporation qualified to do business and doing business in the State of
Utah (“CONTRACTOR”).
TERMS:
OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter
set forth, agree as follows:
ARTICLE I
WORK
CONTRACTOR shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract
Documents for the
. The Work is generally described as
follows:
Furnishing all labor, services, materials, equipment, and supplies except for such
materials, equipment, and services as may be stipulated in the Contract Documents
to be furnished by the OWNER; furnishing and removing all plant machinery,
temporary structures, tools, supplies, transportation, utilities, and all other items,
facilities and equipment, and to do everything required by this Agreement and the
Contract Documents; accepting all responsibility for and paying for all loss and
damage arising out of the nature of the Work aforesaid, or from the action of the
elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties which may arise during the prosecution
of the Work until its acceptance by OWNER, and for all risks of every description
connected with the Work; also for all expenses resulting from the suspension or
discontinuance of work, except as in the Contract Documents are expressly
stipulated to be borne by OWNER.
ARTICLE II
ENGINEER
The Project has been designed by the OWNER. The OWNER will assume all duties
and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the
Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
[ALTERNATE
PARAGRAPH]
The Project has been designed by
, a
corporation qualified to do business and doing
business in the State of Utah, who is hereinafter called “ENGINEER” and who is to act as
OWNER’s representative, assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and
CONSTRUCTION BID DOCS.DOC - Rev. 09/26/07
F-1
authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion
of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE III
CONTRACT TIME
3.1
The Work shall be complete, in accordance with paragraphs 14.08 and 14.09
of the General Conditions, on or before
.
3.2
Liquidated Damages: OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of
the essence of this Agreement and that the OWNER will suffer financial loss
if the Work is not completed within the time specified in paragraph 3.1 above,
plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the
General Conditions. They also recognize the delays, expense and difficulties
involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss
suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly,
instead of requiring any proof of loss, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree
that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR
shall pay OWNER the amount specified in Article 14.07 of the General
Conditions and in Article 18.01 of the Supplementary General Conditions for
each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for final
completion until the Work is substantially complete. And, after Substantial
Completion if CONTRACTOR neglects, refuses or fails to complete the
remaining Work within forty-five (45) days or any proper extension thereof
granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amount
specified in Article 14.07 of the General Conditions and in Article 18.01 of the
Supplemental General Conditions for each day that expires after the fortyfive (45) days until readiness for final payment.
ARTICLE IV
CONTRACT PRICE
All payments to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the Contract
Documents. OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents in current funds those prices stated in the approved Bid
Schedule as named in the Notice of Award.
ARTICLE V
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 14
of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as
provided in the General Conditions.
5.1
Progress Payments: OWNER shall make progress payments on account of
the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Applications for Payment
F-2
as recommended by ENGINEER, on a monthly basis. All progress payments
will be on the basis of the progress of the Work measured by the schedule of
values established in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price
Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no
schedule of values, as provided in the General Conditions.
5.2
Final Payment: Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in
accordance with Article 14 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the
remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as
provided in Article 14.
ARTICLE VI
INTEREST
All moneys not paid when due as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions
shall bear interest at the rate of twelve percent (12%) per annum.
ARTICLE VII
CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
In order to induce OWNER to enter into the Agreement, CONTRACTOR makes the
following representations:
7.1
CONTRACTOR has familiarized itself with the nature and extent of the
Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws
and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance
or furnishing of the Work.
7.2
CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all exploration reports and test of
subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions which are
identified in the Supplementary General Conditions, as provided in
paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions, and accepts the Technical Data
contained in such reports and drawings upon which CONTRACTOR is
entitled to rely.
7.3
CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes
responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies (in addition to or to
supplement those referred to in paragraph 7.2 above) which pertain to the
subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise
may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work as
CONTRACTOR considers necessary for the performance or furnishing of the
Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with
the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including
specifically the provisions of paragraph 4.02 of the General Conditions; and
no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports,
F-3
studies or similar information or data are or will be required by
CONTRACTOR for such purposes.
7.4
CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown
or indicated on the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground
Facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the
accurate location of said Underground Facilities.
7.5
CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all observations, examinations,
investigations, explorations, tests, reports and studies with the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
7.6
CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or
discrepancies that he had discovered in the Contract Documents and the
written resolution thereof by ENGINEER is acceptable to CONTRACTOR.
ARTICLE VIII
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents for the
, which comprise the
entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of
the following:
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
This Agreement;
Performance and Payment Bonds;
Notice of Award;
Notice to Proceed;
General Conditions;
Supplemental General Conditions;
Notice Inviting Bids;
Instructions to Bidders;
Information Required of Bidder;
Technical Specifications;
Drawings - Sheet Number One;
Addendum Number One; and,
CONTRACTOR's Bid, including all schedules and explanatory attachments;
attached as Exhibit A.
The CONTRACTOR (1) acknowledges that he has received a copy of each
document, specified above, (2) acknowledges that he has read and understands each
document specified above and (3) agrees to every term, condition and contract obligation
set forth in each document specified above.
There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The
Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in
paragraphs 3.03 of the General Conditions.
F-4
ARTICLE IX
FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS
The CONTRACTOR shall comply with federal regulations as stated in the
Supplemental General Conditions, Article 21.
ARTICLE X
MISCELLANEOUS
10.1
Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General
Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions.
10.2
No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the
Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the
written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without
limitation, moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not
be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this
restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the
contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release
or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the
Contract Documents.
10.3
In the event any legal action or other proceeding is brought for the
enforcement of this Agreement and/or the Contract Documents, or for
damages, because of an alleged dispute, breach, default or
misrepresentation in connection with any of the provisions thereof, the
successful or prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable
attorneys= fees and other costs incurred in the action or proceeding, in
addition to any other relief to which it may be entitled.
10.4
Any notice to be given hereunder shall be deemed given when sent by
registered or certified mail, postage prepaid to the parties at their respective
addresses stated below or at any other address when notice of such change
of address has been given as provided in this Article 10.4.
F-5
“OWNER”:
“CONTRACTOR”:
JORDAN VALLEY WATER
CONSERVANCY DISTRICT
8215 SOUTH 1300 WEST
WEST JORDAN, UT 84088
Utah License No.
By:
By:
Richard P. Bay
Its Chief Executive Officer
and General Manager
Its:
F-6
EXHIBIT A
CONTRACTOR’S BID
F-7
PERFORMANCE BOND
That
, as Contractor, and
as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the Jordan Valley Water
Conservancy District hereinafter called "Owner," in the sum of $
for
the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed
Agreement with Owner to perform all work required under the Bidding Schedule(s) of the
Owner's Contract Documents entitled “Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory
HVAC retrofit.”
NOW THEREFORE, if Contractor shall perform all the requirements of the Agreement
required to be performed on his part, at the times and in the manner specified therein, then
this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, or
changes in the time of completion, which may be made pursuant to the terms of the
Agreement, shall not in any way release Contractor or Surety thereunder, nor shall any
extensions of the time granted under the provisions of the Agreement release either the
Contractor or Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the work, materials or
time to complete made under the Agreement is hereby waived by Surety. This Bond is
furnished in compliance and in accordance with 14-1-18, Utah Code Ann., as amended,
and 63-56-38 Utah Code Ann., as amended.
day of
By:
By:
Its:
Its:
(SEAL)
, 20
.
(SEAL)
(SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY)
G-1
PAYMENT BOND
That
as Contractor, and
as Surety, are held firmly bound unto the Jordan Valley Water
Conservancy District hereinafter called "Owner," in the sum of $
for the
payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,
administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, Contractor has been awarded and is about to enter into the annexed
Agreement with Owner to perform all work required under the Bidding Schedule(s) of the
Owner's Contract Documents entitled “Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory
HVAC retrofit” NOW THEREFORE, if said Contractor, or subcontractor, fails to pay for any
materials, equipment, or other supplies, or for rental of same, used in connection with the
performance of work contracted to be done, or for amounts due under applicable State law
for any work or labor thereon, said Surety will pay for the same in an amount not exceeding
the sum specified above, and, in the event suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable
attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. This bond shall inure to the benefit of any persons,
companies, or corporations entitled to file claims under applicable State law.
PROVIDED, that any alterations in the work to be done or the materials to be furnished, or
changes in the time of completion, which may be made pursuant to the terms of the
Agreement, shall not in any way release Contractor or Surety thereunder, nor shall any
extensions of time granted under the provisions of said contract release either Contractor
or the Surety, and notice of such alterations or extensions of the work, materials or time to
complete made under the Agreement is hereby waived by Surety. This bond is furnished
in compliance and in accordance with 14-1-18 and 19 Utah Code Ann., as amended, and
63-56-38 Utah Code Ann., as amended.
day of
By:
By:
Its:
Its:
(SEAL)
, 20
(SEAL)
H-1
.
(SEAL AND NOTARIAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY)
H-2
NOTICE OF AWARD
To:
Re:
Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit Project
You are hereby notified that the OWNER has accepted your bid for the above referenced
project in the amount of $
.
Furnish the required Contractor's Performance Bond, Payment Bond and Certificates of
Insurance within ten calendar days from the date of this notice to you. An acknowledged
copy of this Notice of Award, together with all future correspondence regarding this project,
shall be sent to the District’s Project Manager: Marcelo Anglade, P.E.
When the Agreement is provided, sign and return it within ten calendar days from
receipt of the agreement.
Dated this
day of
, 20
.
Alan E. Packard, PE
Assistant General Manager & Chief Engineer
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by:
This
day of
, 20
Signature:
Printed Name:
Title:
I-1
.
NOTICE TO PROCEED
To:
Re:
Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit Project
You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement dated
, and you are to complete the work within
calendar
days of the date of your signature below.
An acknowledged copy of this Notice to Proceed should be returned to the Owner,
attention:
.
Dated this
day of
.
Shane Swensen, P.E.
Engineering Department Manager
ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE
Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged by:
This
day of
, 20
Signature:
Printed Name:
Title:
J-1
.
PAYMENT APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE No.
DATE:
SHEET
PERIOD FROM
TO
OF
, 20
PROJECT: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit
JVWCD PROJECT NO.: 3975
CONTRACTOR:
ADDRESS:
ENGINEER:
1.
ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE: ............................................ $
2.
NET CHANGE ORDERS APPROVED TO DATE: ................. $
(Attach Summary Sheet)
3.
REVISED CONTRACT AMOUNT: ......................................... $
(Sum of Lines 1 & 2)
4.
TOTAL VALUE OF WORK COMPLETED TO DATE ... ......... $
(Attached Payment Breakdown)
5.
PERCENT PROJECT COMPLETE:..........................................................
(Divide Line 4 by 3 and multiply by 100)
6.
LESS AMOUNT RETAINED (5%) .......................................... $
7.
MATERIALS ON HAND.......................................................... $
(95% of Value, Listing Attached)
8.
SUBTOTAL (Sum of Lines 4, Line 6 and Line 7) ................... $
9.
LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS .............................................. $
10.
CURRENT PAYMENT DUE: .................................................. $
(Line 8 & 9)
K-1
%
Payment Application and Certificate No
SHEET
OF
CONTRACTOR'S Certification:
The undersigned CONTRACTOR certifies that: (1) all previous progress payments
received from OWNER on account of work done under the Contract referred to
herein have been applied to discharge in full all obligations of CONTRACTOR
incurred in connection with work covered by prior Applications for Payment
numbered 1 through
inclusive; and, (2) title to all materials and
equipment incorporated in said Work or otherwise listed in or covered by this
Application for Payment will pass to OWNER at time of payment free and clear of all
liens, claims, security interests and encumbrances (except such as covered by bond
acceptable to OWNER).
Dated:
CONTRACTOR:
By:
Engineer's Recommendation:
This Application (with accompanying documentation) meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents and payment of the amount due this application is
recommended.
ENGINEER
Dated
Project Representative
Dated
Project Manager
K-2
CHANGE ORDER
Order No.
Date:
Page
of
NAME OF PROJECT: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit
PROJECT NUMBER: 3975
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT DATE:
The following changes are hereby made to the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
1)
2)
3)
Total Change to CONTRACT PRICE:............................................................................. $
Original CONTRACT PRICE: .......................................................................................... $
Current CONTRACT PRICE adjusted by previous CHANGE ORDER(S)....................... $
The new CONTRACT PRICE including this CHANGE ORDER will be........................... $
The CONTRACT TIME will be increased by
calendar days.
The date for Substantial Completion will be
, 20
.
The Contractor agrees to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work as necessary
to complete the change order items for the price named herein, which includes all
supervision and miscellaneous costs. This change order constitutes full and mutual accord
and satisfaction for all time and all costs related to this change. By acceptance of this
change order the Contractor agrees that the change order represents an equitable
adjustment to the Contract, and further agrees to waive all right to file a claim arising out of
or as a result of this change. This document will become a supplement to the Contract,
and all provisions will apply hereto, upon approval by the Owner.
L-1
CHANGE ORDER
(CONTINUED)
Order No.
Date:
Page
of
Recommended:
Engineer -
Date
Contractor -
Date
Owner - Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District
Date
Accepted:
Approved:
L-2
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE
OF
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
OWNER
ENGINEER
TO:
547 West 500 South, Suite#140
Bountiful, UTAH 84010
P. O. Box 70
West Jordan, Utah 84088-0070
PROJECT: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit
ATTENTION:
FROM:
Firm or Corporation
This is to certify that I,
am an authorized official of
working in the capacity of
and have been properly authorized by said
firm or corporation to sign the following statements pertaining to the subject contract:
I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the
contract described above has been substantially performed and all materials used
and installed to date are in accordance with, and in conformity to, the contract
drawings and specifications. A list of all incomplete work is attached.
The Contractor hereby releases the Owner and its agents from all claims of and
liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for or relating to the work, as
further provided in Article 14.08B of the General Conditions, except demands
against the Owner for the remainder of progress payments retained to date, and
unresolved written claims prior to this date.
The contract work is now substantially complete, ready for its intended use, and
ready for your inspection. You are requested to issue a Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
M-1
CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE
OF
FINAL COMPLETION
OWNER
ENGINEER
TO:
547 West 500 South, Suite #140
Bountiful, UTAH 84010
P. O. Box 70
West Jordan, Utah 84088-0070
PROJECT:
Jordan
Valley Water
Treatment
Plant
Laboratory HVAC
Retrofit
ATTENTION: Project Representative:
FROM:
Firm or Corporation
This is to certify that I,
am an authorized official of
working in the capacity of
and have been properly authorized
by said firm or corporation to sign the following statements pertaining to the subject
contract:
I know of my own personal knowledge, and do hereby certify, that the work of the
contract described above has been performed and all materials used and installed
to date are in accordance with, and in conformity to, the contract drawings and
specifications.
The Contract work is now complete in all parts and requirements, excepting the
attached list of minor deficiencies and the reasons for each being incomplete to
date, for which exemption from final payment requirements is requested in
conformance to Article 14.09A of the General Conditions of our Contract (if no
exemptions requested, write "none")
. The work is now ready for your final
inspection. The following items required from the Contractor prior to application for
final payment (such as O & M Manuals, guarantees, record drawings, etc.) are
submitted herewith, if any:
N-1
I understand that neither the issuance by the Engineer of a Notice of Completion,
nor the acceptance thereof by the Owner, shall operate as a bar or claim against the
Contractor under the terms of the guarantee provisions of the Contract Documents.
SIGNATURE:
DATE:
N-2
CONSENT OF SURETY FOR FINAL PAYMENT
PROJECT NAME: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit
LOCATION: 15305 South 32000 West, Herriman, Utah 84065.
TYPE OF CONTRACT:
AMOUNT OF CONTRACT:
In accordance with the provisions of the above-named contract between the Owner and the
Contractor, the following named surety:
On the Payment Bond of the following named Contractor:
Hereby approves of final payment to the Contractor, and further agrees that said final
payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company named herein of any of its
obligations to the following named Owner (as set forth in said Surety Company’s bond):
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand and seal this
day of
, 20
.
(Name of Surety Company)
(Signature of Authorized Representative)
(Name of Authorized Representatives)
(Title)
O-1
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT
To All Whom It May Concern:
WHEREAS, the undersigned has been employed by the Jordan Valley Water
Conservancy District to furnish labor and materials under a contract dated
for the project entitled Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant Laboratory HVAC Retrofit, in
the County of Salt Lake, State of Utah, of which Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District
is the Owner.
NOW, THEREFORE, this
day of
, 20 , the undersigned,
as the Contractor for the above-named Contract pursuant to the Conditions of the Contract
hereby certifies that, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all
obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services
performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages
arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above
for which the Owner or his property might in any way be held responsible.
EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write "None". If required by the Owner, the Contractor
shall furnish bond satisfactory to the Owner for each Exception.)
Contractor (Name of sole
corporation or partnership)
ownership,
(Affix corporate seal here)
(Signature of Authorized Representative)
Title:
P-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS
Wherever used in these General Conditions or in the other Contract Documents the
following terms have the meanings indicated:
Addenda - Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which make
additions, deletions, or revisions to the Contract Documents.
Agreement - The written contract between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the
performance of the WORK pursuant to the Contract Documents. Documents incorporated
into the contract by reference become part of the contract and of the Agreement.
Application for Payment - The form furnished by the ENGINEER and completed by the
CONTRACTOR to request progress or final payment including supporting documentation
to substantiate the amounts for which payment is requested.
Bonds - Performance, and Payment Bonds and other instruments which protect against
loss due to inability or refusal of the CONTRACTOR to perform pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
Change Order - A document recommended by the ENGINEER, which is signed by the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the
WORK, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the
Effective Date of the Agreement.
Contract Documents - Information and Instructions, forms (including the Schedule of Prices
and all required certificates and affidavits), Agreement, Performance Bond, Payment Bond,
General Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Technical Specifications, Drawings
and all Addenda and Change Orders executed pursuant to the provisions of the Contract
Documents.
Contract Price - The total monies payable by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the
terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.
Contract Time - The number of successive Days stated in the Contract Documents for the
completion of the WORK. The Contract Time begins to run on the date specified in the
Notice to Proceed.
1-1
CONTRACTOR - The person, firm, or corporation with whom the OWNER has executed
the Agreement.
Cost Proposal - The offer or proposal of the pipeline installation subcontractor to the
CONTRACTOR to provide the work required under these Contract Documents.
Day - A calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight.
Defective Work - Work that: is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient; does not conform to the
Contract Documents; does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference
standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; has been damaged prior
to the ENGINEERS's recommendation of final payment.
Drawings - The drawings, plans, maps, profiles, diagrams, and other graphic
representations which show the character, location, nature, extent, and scope of the
WORK.
Effective date of the Agreement - The date indicated in the Agreement on which it was
executed, but if no such date is indicated it means the date on which the Agreement is
signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver.
ENGINEER - The person, firm, or corporation named as such in the Contract Documents.
Field Order - A written order issued by the ENGINEER which may or may not involve a
change in the WORK.
Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations - Laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes,
and/or orders promulgated by a lawfully constituted body authorized to issue such Laws
and Regulations.
Notice of Award - The OWNER's written notice to the apparent successful Bidder stating
that upon compliance with the conditions precedent enumerated therein by the apparent
successful Bidder within the time specified, the OWNER will enter into the Agreement.
Notice to Proceed - The OWNER's written notice to the CONTRACTOR authorizing the
CONTRACTOR to proceed with the work and establishing the date of commencement of
the Contract Time.
OWNER - The Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District.
Partial Utilization - Placing a portion of the WORK in service for the purpose for which it is
intended (or a related purpose) before reaching Substantial Completion of the WORK.
1-2
Project - A unit of total construction of which the WORK to be provided under the Contract
Documents, may be the whole, or a part thereof.
Project Representative - The authorized representative of the ENGINEER who is assigned
to the site or any part thereof.
Proposer - Any person, firm or corporation submitting a proposal for the work.
Schedule of Prices - The offer or proposal of the CONTRACTOR setting forth the price or
prices for the work to be performed.
Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are
specifically prepared by or for the CONTRACTOR to illustrate some portion of WORK and
all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction, and
diagrams to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the WORK.
Specifications - (Same definition as for Technical Specifications hereinafter).
Subcontractor - An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the
CONTRACTOR or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the
WORK at the site.
Substantial Completion - That state of construction when the WORK has progressed to the
point where, in the opinion of the ENGINEER as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that
the WORK can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms
"substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to any work refer to
substantial completion thereof.
Supplementary General Conditions - The part of the Contract Documents which make
additions, deletions, or revisions to these General Conditions.
Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor.
Technical Data - The factual information contained in reports describing physical
conditions, including exploration method, plans, logs, laboratory test methods and factual
data. Technical Data does not include conclusions, interpretations, interpolations,
extrapolations or opinions contained in reports or reached by the CONTRACTOR.
Technical Specifications - Those portions of the Contact Documents consisting of the
written technical descriptions of products and execution of the WORK.
Underground Utilities - All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks,
tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments and any encasements containing such
facilities which have been installed under ground to furnish any of the following services or
1-3
materials: water, sewage and drainage removal, electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum
products, telephone or other communications, cable television, traffic, or other control
systems.
WORK - The entire construction required to be furnished under the Contract Documents.
WORK is the result of performing services, furnishing labor and furnishing and
incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, all as required by the Contract
Documents.
1-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.1
DELIVERY OF BONDS/INSURANCE CERTIFICATES
A.
2.2
COPIES OF DOCUMENTS
A.
2.3
2.5
The OWNER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR 5 copies of the Contract
Documents, together with 5 sets of full-scale Drawings. Additional quantities
of the Contract Documents will be furnished at reproduction cost.
STARTING THE PROJECT
A.
2.4
The CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the OWNER the Agreement, Bonds,
Insurance Policies and Certificates required by the Contract Documents
within ten (10) days after receiving the Notice of Award from the OWNER.
The CONTRACTOR shall begin construction of the WORK within 10 days
after the commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed, but shall not
commence construction prior to the commencement date.
BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Before undertaking each part of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall
carefully study and compare the Contract Documents to check and verify
pertinent figures and dimensions shown thereon with all applicable field
measurements. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly report in writing to the
ENGINEER any conflict, error, or discrepancy which the CONTRACTOR
may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from the
ENGINEER before proceeding with any work affected thereby.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review those
documents called for in each section of the Technical Specifications.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall attend a preconstruction conference with the
OWNER, the ENGINEER and others as appropriate to discuss the
construction of the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
2.6
FINALIZING SCHEDULES
A.
At least 7 days before the CONTRACTOR's submittal of its first Application
for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER, and others as appropriate
will meet to finalize the schedules submitted in accordance with the
Technical Specifications.
2-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE
3.1
INTENT
A.
The Contract Documents comprise the entire agreement between OWNER
and CONTRACTOR concerning the WORK. The Contract Documents are
complementary, what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all.
The Contract Documents will be construed in accordance with the law of the
place of the Project.
B.
It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe the WORK, functionally
complete, to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. All
work, materials, or equipment that may be reasonably inferred from the
Contract Documents as being required to produce the completed work shall
be supplied whether or not specifically called for. When words which have a
well-known technical or trade meaning are used to describe work, materials,
or equipment such words shall be interpreted in accordance with that
meaning. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes or any
technical society, organization, or association, or to the Laws or Regulations
of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by
implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code, or
Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids, except as may
be otherwise specifically stated. However, no provision of any referenced
standard specification, manual, or code (whether or not specifically
incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to
change the duties and responsibilities of the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR,
or the ENGINEER or any of their consultants, agents, or employees from
those set forth in the Contract Documents.
C.
If, during the performance of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR finds a conflict,
error or discrepancy in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall
immediately report it to the ENGINEER in writing and before proceeding with
the work affected thereby. The ENGINEER shall then make a written
interpretation, clarification, or correction from the ENGINEER.
3-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.2
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
3.3
1.
Change Orders
2.
Agreement
3.
Addenda
4.
Contractor's Bid (Bid Form)
5.
Supplemental General Conditions
6.
Notice Inviting Bids
7.
Instructions to Bidders
8.
General Conditions
9.
Technical Specifications
10.
Referenced Standard Specifications
11.
Drawings
With reference to the Drawings the order of precedence is as follows:
1.
Figures govern over scaled dimensions
2.
Detail drawings govern over general drawings
3.
Addenda/change order drawings govern over general drawings
4.
Contract Drawings govern over standard drawings
AMENDING AND SUPPLEMENTING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
3.4
In resolving conflicts resulting from conflicts, errors, or discrepancies in any
of the Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
The Contract Documents may be amended by a Change Order (pursuant to
Article 10) to provide for additions, deletions or revisions in the WORK or to
modify terms and conditions.
REUSE OF DOCUMENTS
3-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
Neither the CONTRACTOR, Subcontractor, Supplier, nor any other person
or organization performing any of the WORK under a contract with the
OWNER shall have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the
Drawings, Technical Specifications, or other documents used on the WORK,
and they shall not reuse any of them on the extensions of the Project or any
other project without written consent.
3-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; PHYSICAL CONDITIONS: REFERENCE
POINTS
4.1
AVAILABILITY OF LANDS
A.
4.2
The OWNER shall furnish the lands, rights-of-way and easements upon
which the WORK is to be performed and for access thereto, together with
other lands designated for the use of the CONTRACTOR in the Contract
Documents. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in
existing major facilities will be obtained and paid for by the OWNER, unless
otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. Nothing contained in the
Contract Documents shall be interpreted as giving the CONTRACTOR
exclusive occupancy of the lands or rights-of-way provided. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that
may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials
and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall not enter upon nor use any
property not under the control of the OWNER until a written temporary
construction easement agreement has been executed by the
CONTRACTOR and the property owner, and a copy of the easement
furnished to the ENGINEER prior to its use. Neither the OWNER nor the
ENGINEER shall be liable for any claims or damages resulting from the
CONTRACTOR's unauthorized trespass or use of any properties.
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS - SUBSURFACE AND EXISTING STRUCTURES
A.
Explorations and Reports: The paragraph entitled "Physical Conditions" of
the Supplementary General Conditions identifies exploration reports and
subsurface conditions tests at the site that have been utilized by the
ENGINEER in the preparation of the Contract Documents. The
CONTRACTOR may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained
in these reports. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the interpretation,
extrapolation or interpolation of all technical as well as nontechnical data and
its reliance on the completeness, opinions and interpretation of the reports.
B.
Existing Structures: The paragraph entitled "Physical Conditions" of the
Supplementary General Conditions identifies the drawings of physical
conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface structures (except
Underground Utilities referred to in Paragraph 4.04 herein) which are at or
contiguous to the site that have been utilized by the ENGINEER in the
preparation of the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR is responsible
for the interpretation, extrapolation or interpolation of all technical as well as
nontechnical data and its reliance on the completeness, opinions and
interpretation of the reports.
4-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.3
DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER upon encountering any of
the following unforeseen conditions, hereinafter called "differing site
conditions," during the prosecution of the WORK. The CONTRACTOR's
notice to the ENGINEER shall be in writing and delivered before the differing
site conditions are disturbed, but in no event later than 14 days after their
discovery.
1.
Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site of the WORK
differing materially from those indicated, described, or delineated in
the Contract Documents including those reports and documents
discussed in Paragraph 4.02; and
2.
Physical conditions at the site of the WORK of an unusual nature
differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally
recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents including those reports and documents
discussed in Paragraph 4.02.
B.
The ENGINEER will review the alleged differing site conditions, determine
the necessity of obtaining additional explorations or tests with respect to
verifying their existence and extent and advise the OWNER in writing of the
ENGINEER's findings and conclusions.
C.
If the OWNER concludes that because of newly discovered conditions a
change in the Contract Documents is required, a Change Order will be
issued as provided in Article 10 to reflect and document the consequences of
the differing site conditions.
D.
In each such case, an increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an
extension or shortening of the Contract Time, or any combination thereof, will
be allowable to the extent that they are attributable to the differing site
conditions. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are unable to agree as to
the amount or length of the Change Order, a claim may be made as provided
in Articles 11 and 12.
E.
The CONTRACTOR's failure to give written notice of differing site conditions
within 14 days of their discovery and before they are disturbed shall
constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith, whether direct or
consequential in nature.
4-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.4
4.5
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS - UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
A.
Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the
Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Utilities at or
contiguous to the site are based on information and data furnished to the
OWNER or the ENGINEER by the owners of Underground Utilities or by
others. Unless it is expressly provided in the Supplementary General
Conditions and/or the Section entitled "Protection and Restoration of Existing
Facilities" of the Technical Specifications, the OWNER and the ENGINEER
shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any
Underground Utilities information or data. The CONTRACTOR's
responsibility relating to underground utilities are: review and check all
information and data, locate all Underground Utilities shown or indicated in
the Contract Documents, coordinate the WORK with the owners of
Underground Utilities during construction, the safeguard and protect the of
Underground Utilities, and repair any damage to Underground Utilities
resulting from the WORK. The cost of all these activities will be considered
as having been included in the Contact Price.
B.
Not Shown or Indicated: If an Underground Utility not shown or indicated in
the Contract Documents is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the site
and which the CONTRACTOR could not reasonably have been expected to
be aware of, the CONTRACTOR shall give written notice to the OWNER of
that utility and the ENGINEER, specifying the location of the utility in
question.
REFERENCE POINTS
A.
The ENGINEER will provide one bench mark, near or on the site of the
WORK, and will provide two points near or on the site to establish a base line
for use by the ENGINEER for alignment control. Unless otherwise specified
in the Technical Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all other
lines, grades, and bench marks required for proper execution of the WORK.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall preserve all bench marks, stakes, and other
survey marks. In case of their removal or destruction by its own employees
or by its subcontractor's employees, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible
for the accurate replacement of reference points by professionally qualified
personnel at no additional cost to the OWNER.
4-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE
5.1
5.2
PERFORMANCE AND OTHER BONDS
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in
the amount set forth in the Supplementary General Conditions as security for
the faithful performance and payment of all the CONTRACTOR's obligations
under the Contract Documents. The Performance Bond shall remain in
effect at least until one year after the date of Notice of Completion, except as
otherwise provided by Law or Regulation or by the Contract Documents.
After the ENGINEER issues the Notice of Completion, the amount of the
Performance Bond may be reduced to 10 percent of the Contract Price, or
$1,000, whichever is greater. The CONTRACTOR shall also furnish such
other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary General Conditions.
B.
If the surety on any Bond furnished by the CONTRACTOR is declared a
bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any
state where any part of the WORK is located, the CONTRACTOR shall
within 7 days after written approval by the OWNER of a substitute Bond and
Surety substitute the approved Bond and Surety.
INSURANCE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall purchase and maintain the insurance required
under this paragraph. This insurance shall include the specific coverages set
out herein and be written for not less than the limits of liability and coverages
provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, or required by law,
whichever is greater. The CONTRACTOR's liabilities under the Agreement
shall not be deemed limited in any way to the insurance coverage required.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the OWNER and ENGINEER with
certificates indicating the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective
dates and expiration dates of all policies. All insurance policies purchased
and maintained (or the certificates or other evidence thereof) shall contain a
provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled,
materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written
notice has been given to the OWNER by certified mail. All insurance shall
remain in effect until the ENGINEER issues the Notice of Completion and at
all times thereafter when the CONTRACTOR may be correcting, removing,
or replacing defective work in accordance with Paragraph 13.06 or
completing punch list items required by the Notice of Completion. In
addition, the insurance required herein (except for Worker's Compensation
and Employer's Liability) shall name the OWNER, the ENGINEER, and their
officers, agents, and employees as "additional insured" under the policies.
5-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.
Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability: This insurance
shall protect the CONTRACTOR against all claims under applicable
state workers' compensation laws. The CONTRACTOR shall also
be protected against claims for injury, disease, or death of
employees which, for any reason, may not fall within the provisions
of a workers' compensation law. This policy shall include an "all
states" endorsement. The CONTRACTOR shall require each
subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation
Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in the
WORK unless its employees are covered by the protection
afforded by the CONTRACTOR's Workers' Compensation
Insurance. In the event a class of employees is not protected
under the Workers' Compensation Statute, the CONTRACTOR or
Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide adequate
employer's liability insurance for the protection of its employees not
protected under the statute.
2.
Comprehensive General Liability: This insurance shall be written in
comprehensive form and shall protect the CONTRACTOR against all
claims arising from injuries to persons other than its employees and
damage to property of the OWNER or others arising out of any act or
omission of the CONTRACTOR or its agents, employees or
subcontractors. The policy shall include the following endorsements:
(1) Protective Liability endorsement to insure the contractual liability
assumed by the CONTRACTOR under the indemnification provisions
in these General Conditions; (2) Broad Form Property Damage
endorsement; (3) Personal Injury endorsement to cover personal
injury liability for intangible harm. The Comprehensive General
Liability coverage shall contain no exclusion relative to blasting,
explosion, collapse of building, or damage to underground structures.
3.
Comprehensive Automobile Liability: This insurance shall be written
in comprehensive form. The policy shall protect the CONTRACTOR
against all claims for injuries to employees, members of the public
and damage to property of others arising from the use of
CONTRACTOR's motor vehicles, whether they are owned, nonowned, or hired, and whether used or operated on or off the site. The
motor vehicle insurance required under this paragraph shall include:
(a) motor vehicle liability coverage; (b) personal injury protection
coverage and benefits; and (c) uninsured motor vehicle coverage.
5-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
4.
Subcontractor's Insurance: The CONTRACTOR shall require each of
its subcontractors to procure and to maintain Comprehensive General
Liability Insurance and Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
of the type and in the amounts specified in the Supplementary
General Conditions or insure the activities of its subcontractors in the
CONTRACTOR's own policy, in like amount.
5.
Builder's Risk: This insurance shall be of the "all risk" type, shall be
written in completed value form, and shall protect the CONTRACTOR,
the OWNER, and the ENGINEER against damage to buildings,
structures, materials and equipment. The amount of this insurance
shall not be less than the insurable value of the WORK at completion.
Builder's risk insurance shall provide for losses to be payable to the
CONTRACTOR, the OWNER, and the ENGINEER as their interests
may appear. The policy shall contain a provision that in the event of
payment for any loss under the coverage provided, the insurance
company shall have no rights of recovery against the CONTRACTOR,
the OWNER, and the ENGINEER. The Builder's Risk policy shall
insure against all risks of direct physical loss or damage to property
from any external cause including flood and earthquake. Allowable
exclusions, if any, shall be as specified in the Supplementary General
Conditions.
5-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
6.1
6.2
SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and direct the WORK competently and
efficiently, devoting the attention and applying the skills and expertise
necessary to perform the WORK in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction and safety
precautions and programs incidental thereto. The CONTRACTOR shall be
responsible to see that the finished WORK complies accurately with the
Contract Documents.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall employ the Superintendent named in "Information
Required of Bidder" on the work site at all times during the progress of the
WORK. The superintendent shall not be replaced without the OWNER's
written consent. The superintendent will be the CONTRACTOR's
representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of the
CONTRACTOR. All communications given to the superintendent shall be as
binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall issue
all its communications to the OWNER through the ENGINEER.
C.
The CONTRACTOR's superintendent shall be present at the site of the
WORK at all times while work is in progress. Failure to observe this
requirement shall be considered suspension of the WORK by the
CONTRACTOR until the superintendent is again present at the site.
LABOR, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide skilled, competent and suitably qualified
personnel to survey and lay out the WORK and perform construction as
required by the Contract Documents. When required in writing by the
OWNER or ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or any subcontractor shall
discharge any person who is, in the opinion of the OWNER or ENGINEER,
incompetent, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory and shall not again
employ the discharged person on the WORK without the consent of the
OWNER or ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain
good discipline and order at the site.
B.
Except in connection with the safety or protection of persons the WORK, or
property at the site or adjacent thereto, all work at the site shall be performed
during regular working hours, and the CONTRACTOR will not permit
overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday or any legal
holiday without the OWNER's written consent given after prior written notice
6-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
to the ENGINEER. Except as otherwise provided in this Paragraph, the
CONTRACTOR shall receive no additional compensation for overtime work,
i.e., work in excess of 8 hours in any one calendar day or 40 hours in any
one calendar week, even though such overtime work may be required under
emergency conditions and may be ordered by the ENGINEER in writing.
Additional compensation will be paid the CONTRACTOR for overtime work in
the event extra work is ordered by the ENGINEER and the Change Order
specifically authorizes the use of overtime work, but only to the extent that
the CONTRACTOR pays overtime wages on a regular basis being paid by
for overtime work of a similar nature in the same locality.
6.3
C.
All costs of inspection and testing performed during overtime work approved
solely for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall have the authority to deduct the costs of
all inspection and testing from any partial payments otherwise due to the
CONTRACTOR.
D.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR
shall furnish, erect, maintain and remove the construction plant, and
temporary works and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment,
labor, transportation, construction equipment, machinery, tools, appliances,
fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities and all other
facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance testing,
start-up and completion of the WORK.
E.
All materials and equipment incorporated into the WORK shall be of new and
good quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If
required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory
evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the kind and quality of
materials and equipment. The CONTRACTOR shall apply, install, connect,
erect, use, clean, and condition all material and equipment in accordance
with the instructions of the manufacturer and Supplier except as otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents.
ADJUSTING PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit any adjustments in the progress schedule
to the ENGINEER for acceptance in accordance with the provisions for
"Contractor Submittals" in the Technical Specifications.
6-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.4
SUBSTITUTES OR "OR-EQUAL" ITEMS
A.
Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the
Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of
a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish
the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification
or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like,
equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of
material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be
submitted to ENGINEER for review under the circumstances described
below:
1.
2.
“Or-Equal” Items: If in ENGINEER’s sole discretion an item of
material or equipment proposed by CONTRACTOR is functionally
equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related
Work will be required, it may be considered by ENGINEER as an “orequal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item
may, in ENGINEER’s sole discretion, be accomplished without
compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of
proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this paragraph
6.04.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered
functionally equal to an item so named if:
a.
in the exercise of reasonable judgment ENGINEER determines
that: (i) it is a least equal in quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics; (ii) it will reliably perform at
least equally well the function imposed by the design concept of
the completed Project as a functioning whole, and;
b.
CONTRACTOR certifies that: (i) there is no increase in cost to the
OWNER; and (ii) it will conform substantially, even with deviations,
to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract
Document.
Substitute Items
a.
If in ENGINEER’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment
proposed by CONTRACTOR does not qualify as an “or-equal”
item under paragraph 6.04.A.1, it will be considered a proposed
substitute item.
b.
CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information as provided
below to allow ENGINEER to determine that the item of material
6-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and
an acceptable substitute therefore. Requests for review of
proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be
accepted by ENGINEER from anyone other than CONTRACTOR.
B.
c.
The procedure for review by ENGINEER will be as set forth in
paragraph 6.04.A.2.d, as supplemented in the Technical
Specifications and as ENGINEER may decide is appropriate
under the circumstances.
d.
CONTRACTOR shall first make written application to ENGINEER
for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment
that CONTRACTOR seeks to furnish or use. The application shall
certify that the proposed substitute item will perform adequately
the functions and achieve the results called for by the general
design, be similar in substance to that specified, and be suited to
the same use as that specified. The application will state the
extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
prejudice CONTRACTOR’s achievement of Substantial
Completion on time, whether or not use of the proposed substitute
item will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in
the provisions of any other direct contract with OWNER for work
on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute
item, and whether or not incorporation or use of the substitute item
is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty. All variations of
the proposed substitute item from that specified will be identified in
the application, and available engineering, sales, maintenance,
repair, and replacement services will be indicated. The application
will also contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will
result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item,
including costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from
use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims
of other contractors affected by any resulting change, all of which
will be considered by ENGINEER in evaluating the proposed
substitute item. ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to
furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item.
Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means,
method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is shown or
indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents,
CONTRACTOR may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method,
technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by ENGINEER.
CONTRACTOR shall submit sufficient information to allow ENGINEER, in
6-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ENGINEER’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is
equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The
procedure for review by ENGINEER will be similar to that provided in
subparagraph 6.04.A.2.
6.5
C.
Engineer’s Evaluation: ENGINEER will be allowed a reasonable time within
which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to paragraphs
6.04.A and 6.04.B. ENGINEER will be the sole judge of acceptability. No
“or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until ENGINEER’s
review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a
substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” ENGINEER will
advise CONTRACTOR in writing of any negative determination.
D.
Special Guarantee: OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to furnish at
CONTRACTOR’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety
with respect to any substitute.
E.
ENGINEER’s Cost Reimbursement: ENGINEER will record time required by
ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s Consultants in evaluating substitute proposed
or submitted by CONTRACTOR pursuant to paragraphs 6.04.A.2 and 6.04.B
and in making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of
any other direct contract with OWNER for work on the Project) occasioned
thereby. Whether or not ENGINEER approves a substitute item so proposed
or submitted by CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall reimburse OWNER
for the charges of ENGINEER and ENGINEER’s Consultants for evaluation
each such proposed substitute.
F.
CONTRACTOR’s EXPENSE: CONTRACTOR shall provide all data in
support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at CONTRACTOR’s
expense.
CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
A.
6.6
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER and the
ENGINEER for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors and their
employees to the same extent as the CONTRACTOR is responsible for the
acts and omissions of its own employees. Nothing contained in this
paragraph shall create any contractual relationship between any
subcontractor and the OWNER or the ENGINEER nor relieve the
CONTRACTOR of any liability or obligation under the Agreement.
PERMITS
6-5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.7
A.
Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, the
CONTRACTOR shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses
from the agencies having jurisdiction, including furnishing the insurance and
bonds required by such agencies. The costs incurred by the CONTRACTOR
in compliance with this paragraph shall not be made the basis for claims for
additional compensation. The OWNER shall assist the CONTRACTOR,
when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. The
CONTRACTOR shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees
necessary for the prosecution of the WORK, which are applicable at the time
of opening of Bids, including all utility connection charges for utilities required
by the WORK.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all
costs when any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the
subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others when issued in the
construction of the WORK or incorporated into the WORK. If a particular
invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract
Documents for incorporation into or use in the construction of the WORK and
if to the actual knowledge of the OWNER or the ENGINEER its use is
subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license
fee or royalty to others, the existence of these rights shall be disclosed by the
OWNER in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify,
defend and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER and anyone
directly or indirectly employed by either of them from and against all claims,
damages, losses, and expenses (including attorneys' fees and court costs)
arising out of any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the
use in the performance of the WORK or resulting from the incorporation in
the WORK of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified
in the Contract Documents.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall observe and comply with all federal, state, and
local laws, ordinances, codes, orders, and regulations which in any manner
affect those engaged or employed on the WORK, the materials used in the
WORK, or the conduct of the WORK. If any discrepancy or inconsistency
should be discovered in the Contract Documents in relation to any law,
ordinance, code, order, or regulations, the CONTRACTOR shall report the
same in writing to the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify,
defend and hold harmless the OWNER, the ENGINEER and their officers,
agents, and employees against all claims and from violation of any law,
ordinance, code, order, or regulation, whether by CONTRACTOR or by its
employees or subcontractors. Any particular law or regulation specified or
6-6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
referred to elsewhere in the Contract Documents shall not in any way limit
the obligation of the CONTRACTOR to comply with all other provisions of
federal, state, and local laws and regulations. Where an individual State act
on occupational safety and health standards has been approved by Federal
authority, then the provision of said State act shall control.
6.8
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
A.
The Contractor agrees to abide by: the provisions of Title VII of the Civil
Rights Act of 1964 (42USC § § 2000e et seq.), which prohibits discrimination
against any employee or applicant for employment on the basis of race,
religion, color, or national origin; Executive Order No. 11246, as amended,
which prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex; 45 CFR 90, which prohibits
discrimination on the basis of age; Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of
1973, (42 USC § 794), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of
handicap; Utah Executive Order dated June 30, 1989, which prohibits sexual
harassment in the workplace; and the Americans with Disabilities Act (42
USC § § 12111 et seq.), which prohibits discrimination against qualified
employees and applicants with a disability.
6-7
GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.9
TAXES
A.
6.10
USE OF PREMISES
A.
6.11
The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar
taxes required to be paid by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Laws
and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the
performance of the WORK.
The CONTRACTOR shall confine construction equipment, stored materials
and equipment, and other operations of workers to (1) the Project site, (2)
the land and areas identified for the CONTRACTOR's use in the Contract
Documents, and (3) other lands whose use is acquired by Laws and
Regulations, rights-of-way, permits, and easements. The CONTRACTOR
shall be fully responsible to the owner and occupant of such lands for any
damage to the lands or areas contiguous thereto, resulting from the
performance of the WORK or otherwise. Should any claim be made against
the OWNER or the ENGINEER by owner or occupant of lands because of
the performance of the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly settle the
claim by agreement, or resolve the claim through litigation. The
CONTRACTOR shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and
Regulations, indemnify, defend, and hold the OWNER and the ENGINEER
harmless from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses
(including, but not limited to, fees of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals and court costs) arising directly, indirectly, or
consequentially out of any action, legal or equitable, brought by any owner or
occupant of land against the OWNER or the ENGINEER to the extent the
claim is based or arises out of the CONTRACTOR's performance of the
WORK.
SAFETY AND PROTECTION
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and
supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the
WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions for the
safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage,
injury or loss to:
1.
All employees on the WORK and other persons and organizations
who may be affected thereby.
2.
All the WORK and materials and equipment to be incorporated
therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and
6-8
GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.
6.12
Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs,
lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not
designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of
construction.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations
(whether referred to herein or not) of any public body having jurisdiction for
the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or
loss and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety
and protection. The CONTRACTOR shall notify owners of adjacent property
and utilities when prosecution of the WORK may affect them, and shall
cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement
of their property.
C.
Unless the CONTRACTOR otherwise designates in writing a different
individual as the responsible individual, the CONTRACTOR's superintendent
shall be CONTRACTOR's representative at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents.
SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES
A.
After checking and verifying all field measurements and after complying with
the applicable procedures specified in the Technical Specifications, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit all shop drawings to the ENGINEER for review
and approval in accordance with the approved schedule for shop drawings
submittals specified in the Technical Specifications.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall also submit to the ENGINEER for review and
approval all samples in accordance with the approved schedule of sample
submittals specified in the Technical Specifications.
C.
Before submitting shop drawings or samples, the CONTRACTOR shall
determine and verify all quantities, dimensions, specified performance
criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar
data with respect thereto and review or coordinate each shop drawing or
sample with other shop drawings and samples and with the requirements of
the WORK and the Contract Documents.
6-9
GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.13
CONTINUING THE WORK
A.
6.14
The CONTRACTOR shall carry on the WORK and adhere to the progress
schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the OWNER. No work
shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any dispute or
disagreement, except as the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER may
otherwise mutually agree in writing.
INDEMNIFICATION
A.
To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, the CONTRACTOR
shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the OWNER, the ENGINEER,
and their officers, agents, and employees, against and from all claims and
liability arising under or by reason of the Agreement or any performance of
the WORK, but not from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the
OWNER and/or the ENGINEER. Such indemnification by the
CONTRACTOR shall include but not be limited to the following:
1.
Liability or claims resulting directly or indirectly from the negligence
or carelessness of the CONTRACTOR or its agents in the
performance of the WORK, or in guarding or maintaining the same,
or from any improper materials, implements, or appliances used in
its construction, or by or on account of any act or omission of the
CONTRACTOR or its agents;
2.
Liability or claims arising directly or indirectly from or based on the
violation of any law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether
by the CONTRACTOR or its agents;
3.
Liability or claims arising directly or indirectly from the use or
manufacture by the CONTRACTOR, its agents, or the OWNER in the
performance of this Agreement of any copyrighted or uncopyrighted
composition, secret process, patented or unpatented invention,
article, or appliance, unless otherwise specifically stipulated in this
Agreement.
4.
Liability or claims arising directly or indirectly from the breach of any
warranties, whether express or implied, made to the OWNER or any
other parties by the CONTRACTOR or its agents;
5.
Liabilities or claims arising directly or indirectly from the willful
misconduct of the CONTRACTOR or its agents; and,
6-10
GENERAL CONDITIONS
6.
6.15
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER, and the ENGINEER for all
costs and expense, (including but not limited to fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professional and court costs)
incurred by the OWNER, and the ENGINEER in enforcing the provisions of
this Paragraph.
C.
The indemnification obligation under this Paragraph shall not be limited in
any way by any limitation of the amount or type of damages, compensation,
or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or any such subcontractor
or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability
benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.
CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS
A.
6.16
Liabilities or claims arising directly or indirectly from any breach of the
obligations assumed herein by the CONTRACTOR.
The CONTRACTOR shall complete a daily report indicating manpower,
major equipment, subcontractors, weather conditions, etc., involved in the
performance of the WORK. The daily report shall be completed on forms
prepared by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to the ENGINEER, and
shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the conclusion of each work day.
ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall not assign, sublet, sell, transfer, or otherwise
dispose of the Agreement or any portion thereof, or its right, title, or
interested therein, or obligations thereunder, without the written consent of
the OWNER except as imposed by law. If the CONTRACTOR violates this
provision, the Agreement may be terminated at the option of the OWNER. In
such event, the OWNER shall be relieved of all liability and obligations to the
CONTRACTOR and to its assignee or transferee, growing out of such
termination.
6-11
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK
7.1
RELATED WORK
A.
The OWNER may perform other work related to the Project at the site by the
OWNER's own forces, have other work performed by utility owners, or let
other direct contracts for the performance of the other work which may
contain General Conditions similar to these. If the fact that such other work
is to be performed was not noted in the Contact Documents, written notice
thereof will be given to the CONTRACTOR prior to commencing any other
work.
B.
The CONTRACTOR shall afford each utility owner and other contractor who
is a party to a direct contract (or the OWNER, if the OWNER is performing
the additional work with the OWNER's employees) proper and safe access to
the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of
materials and equipment and the execution of the other work. The
CONTRACTOR shall properly connect and coordinate the WORK with the
other work. The CONTRACTOR shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of
the WORK that may be required to make its several parts come together
properly and integrate with the other work. The CONTRACTOR shall not
endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering
their work and shall only cut or alter their work with the written consent of the
ENGINEER and the others whose work will be affected.
C.
If the proper execution or results of any part of the CONTRACTOR's work
depends upon the integration of work with the completion of other work by
any other contractor or utility owner (or the OWNER), the CONTRACTOR
shall inspect and report to the ENGINEER in writing all delays, defects, or
deficiencies in the other work that renders it unavailable or unsuitable for
proper integration with the CONTRACTOR's work. Except for the results or
effects of latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in the other work,
the CONTRACTOR's failure to report will constitute an acceptance of the
other work as fit and proper for integration with the CONTRACTOR's work
and as a waiver of any claim for additional time or compensation associated
with the integration of the CONTRACTOR's work with the other work.
7-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
7.2
COORDINATION
A.
If the OWNER contracts with others for the performance of other work on the
Project at the site, a coordinator will be identified to the extent that the
coordinator can be identified at this time, in the Supplementary General
Conditions and delegated the authority and responsibility for coordination of
the activities among the various contractors. The specific matters over which
the coordinator has authority and the extent of the coordinator's authority and
responsibility will be itemized in the Supplementary General Conditions or in
a notice to the CONTRACTOR at such time as the identity of the coordinator
is determined.
7-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 8 - OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
8.1
COMMUNICATIONS
A.
8.2
PAYMENTS
A.
8.3
The OWNER shall execute approved Change Orders for the conditions
described in Paragraph 10.01D.
INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A.
8.6
The OWNER's duties with respect to providing lands and easements and
providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in
Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. The OWNER shall identify and make available to
the CONTRACTOR copies of exploration reports and subsurface conditions
tests at the site and in existing structures which have been utilized by the
ENGINEER in preparing the Drawings and Technical Specifications as set
forth in Paragraph 4.02
CHANGE ORDERS
A.
8.5
The OWNER shall make payments to the CONTRACTOR as provided in
Paragraphs 14.05 and 14.09.
LANDS, EASEMENTS, AND SURVEYS
A.
8.4
The OWNER shall issue all its communications to the CONTRACTOR
through the ENGINEER.
The OWNER's responsibility with respect to inspection, tests, and approvals
is set forth in Paragraph 13.03B.
SUSPENSION OF WORK
A.
In connection with the OWNER's right to stop work or suspend work, see
Paragraphs 13.04 and 15.01. Paragraphs 15.02 and 15.03 deal with the
OWNER's right to terminate services of the CONTRACTOR under certain
circumstances.
8-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
9.1
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A.
9.2
VISITS TO SITE
A.
9.3
The ENGINEER will furnish a Project Representative to observe and inspect
the performance of the WORK. The Project Representative and/or other
authorized agents of the Engineer shall serve as the chief Owner/Engineer
contact(s) with the Contractor during the construction phase. All submittals
shall be delivered to and communications between the Engineer and the
Contractor shall be handled by the Project Representative and/or other
authorized agents. The Project Representative shall be the chief authorized
representative of the Owner and the Engineer at the site of the work in all onsite relations with the Contractor.
CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS
A.
9.5
The ENGINEER will make visits to the site during construction to observe
and inspect the progress and quality of the WORK and to determine, in
general if the WORK is proceeding in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
PROJECT REPRESENTATION
A.
9.4
The ENGINEER will be the OWNER's representative during the construction
period. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of the
ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth
in a separate agreement with the OWNER and are summarized hereafter.
The ENGINEER will issue with reasonable promptness written clarifications
or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form
of Drawings or otherwise) as the ENGINEER may determine necessary,
which shall be consistent with or reasonably inferable from the overall intent
of the Contract Documents.
AUTHORIZED VARIATIONS IN WORK
A.
The ENGINEER may authorize minor variation in the WORK as described in
the Contact Documents when such variations do not involve an adjustment in
the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are consistent with the overall
intent of the Contract Documents. These variations shall be accomplished
by issuing a Field Order. The issuance of a Field Order requires the
CONTRACTOR to perform the work described in the order promptly. If the
9-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
CONTRACTOR believes that a Field Order justifies an increase in the
Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time and parties are unable to
agree as the amount or extent thereof, the CONTRACTOR may make a
claim therefor as provided in Article 11 or 12.
9.6
REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
9.7
9.8
The ENGINEER is authorized to reject work which the ENGINEER believes
to be defective and require special inspection or testing of the WORK as
provided in Paragraph 13.03G, whether or not the WORK is fabricated,
installed, or completed.
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS
A.
The ENGINEER will review for approval all Contractor submittals, including
shop drawings, samples, substitutes, and "or equal" items, etc., in
accordance with the procedures set forth in the Technical Specifications.
B.
In connection with the ENGINEER's responsibilities as to Change Orders,
see Articles 10, 11, and 12.
C.
In connection with the ENGINEER's responsibilities with respect to
Applications for Payment, see Article 14.
DECISIONS ON DISPUTES
A.
All claims, disputes, and other matters concerning the acceptability of the
WORK, the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
pertaining to the performance of the WORK, and claims for changes in the
Contract Price or Contract Time under Articles 11 and 12 will be referred to
the ENGINEER in writing with a request for formal decision in accordance
with this paragraph. The ENGINEER will render a decision in writing within
30 days of receipt of the request. Written notice of each claim, dispute, or
other matter will be delivered by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER
promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the occurrence of the
event. Written supporting data will be submitted to the ENGINEER with the
written claim unless the ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to
ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim.
B.
When reviewing the claim or dispute, the ENGINEER will not show partiality
to the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR and will incur no liability in connection
with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith. The ENGINEER's
rendering of a decision with respect to any claim, dispute, or other matter
(except any which have been waived by the making or acceptance of final
9-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
payment as provided in Paragraph 14.12) shall be a condition precedent to
the OWNER's or the CONTRACTOR's exercise of their rights or remedies
under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations with respect to the
claim, dispute, or other matter.
9.9
LIMITATION ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Neither the ENGINEER's authority to act pursuant to its agreement with the
OWNER, nor the description of that authority under this Article 9, nor any
other description of the ENGINEER's responsibility in the Contract
Documents, nor any decision made by the ENGINEER in good faith either to
exercise or not exercise its authority, shall give rise to any duty or
responsibility on the part of the ENGINEER to the CONTRACTOR, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any surety or any other person or organization
performing any part of the WORK.
B.
Whenever in the Contract Documents the terms "as ordered," "as directed,"
"as required," as allowed," "as reviewed," "as approved," or terms of like
effect or import are used, or the adjectives "reasonable," "suitable,"
"acceptable," "proper," or "satisfactory" or adjectives of like effect or import
are used to describe a requirement, direction, review, or judgement of the
ENGINEER as to the WORK, it is intended that such requirement, direction,
review, or judgment will be solely to evaluate the WORK for compliance with
the Contract Documents, unless there is a specific statement indicating
otherwise. The use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to
assign to the ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
performance of the WORK or any duty or authority to undertake
responsibility contrary to the provisions of its agreement with the OWNER.
C.
The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the CONTRACTOR's means,
methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction not specified
in the Contact Documents or the safety precautions and programs incident
thereto.
D.
The ENGINEER will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the
CONTRACTOR nor of any subcontractor, supplier, or any other person or
organization performing any of the WORK to the extent that such acts or
omissions are not reasonably discoverable considering the level of
observation and inspection required by the ENGINEER's agreement with the
OWNER.
9-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
10.1
GENERAL
A.
Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the
OWNER may at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or
revisions in the WORK; these will be authorized by a written Field Order
and/or a Change Order issued by the ENGINEER. Upon receipt of any of
these documents, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly proceed with the work
involved pursuant to the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.
B.
If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are unable to agree upon the
increase or decrease in the Contract Price or an extension or shortening of
the Contract Time, if any, that should be allowed as a result of a Field Order,
a claim may be made therefor as provided in Articles 11 or 12.
C.
The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price
nor an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any work performed
that is not required by the Contact Documents as amended, modified, or
supplemented by Change Order, except in the case of an emergency and
except in the case of uncovering work provided in the Paragraph 13.03G.
D.
The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall execute appropriate Change
Orders covering:
E.
1.
Changes in the WORK which are ordered by the OWNER pursuant
to Paragraph 10.01A;
2.
Changes required because of acceptance of defective work under
Paragraph 13.06;
3.
Changes in the Contract Price or Contact Time which are agreed to
by the parties; or
4.
Any other changes agreed to by the parties.
If the provisions of any Bond require notice of any change to be given to a
surety, the giving of these notices will be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
The CONTRACTOR shall provide for the amount of each applicable Bond to
be adjusted accordingly.
10-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
10.2
ALLOWABLE QUANTITY VARIATIONS
A.
Whenever a unit price and quantity have been established for a bid item in
the Contract Documents, the quantity stated may be increased or decreased
to a maximum of 25 percent with no change in the unit price. An adjustment
in the quantity in excess of 25 percent will be sufficient to justify a change in
the unit price. Changes in the quantity of all bid items established in the
Contract Documents, regardless of whether the changes are more or less
than 25 percent and at the unit price established in the Contract Documents
or adjusted otherwise, shall be documented by Change Orders.
B.
In the event a part of the WORK is to be entirely eliminated and no lump sum
or unit price is named in the Contract Documents to cover the eliminated
work, the price of the eliminated work shall be agreed upon in writing by the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
fail to agree upon the price of the eliminated work, the price shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of Article 11.
10-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 11 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE
11.1
GENERAL
A.
The Contact Price constitutes the total compensation payable to the
CONTRACTOR for performing the WORK. Except as directed by Change
Orders, all duties, responsibilities, and obligations assigned to or undertaken
by the CONTRACTOR shall be at its expense without change in the Contract
Price.
B.
The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for
an increase in the Contact Price shall be based on written notice delivered by
the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than 30
days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the
general nature of the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered with the claim, unless the ENGINEER
allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support
of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the CONTRACTOR's written
statement that the amount claimed covers all known amounts (direct,
indirect, and consequential) to which the CONTRACTOR is entitled as a
result of the occurrence of the event. If the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR
cannot otherwise agree on the amount involved, all claims for adjustment in
the Contract Price shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with
Paragraph 9.08A. No claim for an adjustment in the Contact Price will be
valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 11.01B.
C.
The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an
increase or decrease in the Contact Price shall be determined in one of the
following ways:
1.
Where the work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the
Contract Documents, by application of unit prices to the quantities
of the items involved.
2.
By mutual acceptance of a lump sum, which may include an
allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with
Paragraph 11.04.
3.
On the basis of the cost of work (determined as provided in
Paragraphs 11.02 and 11.03) plus a CONTRACTOR's fee for
overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.04).
11-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
11.2
COST OF WORK (BASED ON TIME AND MATERIALS)
A.
General: The term "cost of work" means the sum of all costs necessarily
incurred and paid by the CONTRACTOR for labor, materials, and equipment
in the proper performance of work. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in
writing by the OWNER, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those
prevailing in the locality of the Project.
B.
Labor: The cost of labor used in performing work by the CONTRACTOR, a
subcontractor, or other forces will be the sum of the following:
1.
The actual wages paid plus any employer payments to, or on
behalf of workers for fringe benefits including health and welfare,
pension, vacation, and similar purposes. The cost of labor may
include the rates paid to foremen when determined by the
ENGINEER that the services of foremen do not constitute a part of
the overhead allowance.
2.
All payments imposed by state and federal laws including, but not
limited to, compensation insurance, and social security payments.
3.
The amount paid for subsistence and travel required by collective
bargaining agreements, or in accordance with the regular practice of
the employer.
At the beginning of the extra work and as later requested by the ENGINEER,
the CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER proof of labor
compensation rates being paid.
C.
Materials: The cost of materials used in performing work will be the cost to
the purchaser, whether CONTRACTOR or subcontractor, from the supplier
thereof, except as the following are applicable:
1.
Trade discounts available to the purchase shall be credited to the
OWNER notwithstanding the fact that such discounts may not have
been taken by the CONTRACTOR.
2.
For materials secured by other than a direct purchase and direct
billing to the purchaser, the cost shall be deemed to be the price paid
to the actual supplier as determined by the ENGINEER. Markup
except for actual costs incurred in the handling of such materials will
not be allowed.
11-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
D.
3.
Payment for materials from sources owned wholly or in part by the
purchaser shall not exceed the price paid by the purchaser for similar
materials from these sources on extra work items or current wholesale
price for the materials delivered to the work site, whichever is lower.
4.
If in the opinion of the ENGINEER the cost of material is excessive, or
the CONTRACTOR does not furnish satisfactory evidence of the cost
of the material, then the cost shall be deemed to be the lowest current
wholesale price for the quantity concerned, delivered to the work site
less trade discount. The OWNER reserves the right to furnish
materials for the extra work and no claim shall be made by the
CONTRACTOR for costs and profit on such materials.
Equipment: The CONTRACTOR will be paid for the use of equipment at the
rental rate listed for the equipment specified in the Supplementary General
Conditions. The rental rate will be used to compute payments for equipment
whether the equipment is under the CONTRACTOR's control through direct
ownership, leasing, renting, or another method of acquisition. The rental rate
to be applied for use of each item of equipment shall be the rate resulting in
the least total cost to the Owner for the total period of use. If it is deemed
necessary by the CONTRACTOR to use equipment not listed in the
Supplementary General Conditions an equitable rental rate for the equipment
will be established by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR may furnish cost
data which might assist the ENGINEER in the establishing the rental rate.
1.
All equipment shall, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, be in good
working condition and suitable for the purpose for which the
equipment is to be used.
2.
Before construction equipment is used on the extra work, the
CONTRACTOR shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number
thereon at a conspicuous location, and shall furnish to the
ENGINEER, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its
identifying number.
3.
Unless otherwise specified, manufacturers' ratings and manufacturer
approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment for the
determination of applicable rental rates. Equipment which has no
direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum
rating recommended by the manufacturer.
4.
Individual pieces of equipment or tools having a replacement value of
$100 or less, whether or not consumed by use, shall be considered to
be small tools and no payment will be made therefore.
11-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
5.
E.
Rental time will not be allowed while equipment is inoperative due to
breakdowns.
Equipment on the Work: The rental time to be paid for equipment used on
the WORK shall be the time the equipment is in productive operation on the
extra work being performed and, in addition, shall include the time required
to move the equipment to the location of the extra work and return it to the
original location or to another location that requires no more moving time
than that required to return it to its original location. Moving time will not be
paid if the equipment is used on other than the extra work, even though
located at the site of the extra work. Loading and transporting costs will be
allowed, in lieu of moving time, when the equipment is moved by means
other than its own power. However, no payment will be made for loading and
transporting costs when the equipment is used on other than the extra work
even though located at the site of the extra work. The following shall be
used in computing the rental time of equipment on the WORK.
1.
When hourly rates are listed, any part of an hour less than 30
minutes of operation shall be considered to be 1/2-hour of
operation, and any part of an hour in excess of 30 minutes will be
considered one hour of operation.
2.
When daily rates are listed, any part of a day less than 4 hours
operation shall be considered to be 1/2-day of operation. When
owner-operated equipment is used to perform extra work to be paid
for on a time and materials basis, the CONTRACTOR will be paid for
the equipment and operator, as set forth in Paragraph (3), (4), and
(5), following.
3.
Payment for the equipment will be made in accordance with the
provisions in Paragraph 11.02D, herein.
4.
Payment for the cost of labor and subsistence or travel allowance will
be made at the rates paid by the CONTRACTOR to other workers
operating similar equipment already on the WORK, or in the absence
of such labor, established by collective bargaining agreements for the
type of workmen and location of the extra work, whether or not the
operator is actually covered by such an agreement. A labor
surcharge will be added to the cost of labor described herein in
accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.02B, herein, which
surcharge shall constitute full compensation for payments imposed by
state and federal laws and all payments made to on behalf of workers
other than actual wages.
11-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
5.
11.3
To the direct cost of equipment rental and labor, computed as
provided herein, will be added the allowances for equipment rental
and labor as provided in Paragraph 11.04, herein.
SPECIAL SERVICES
A.
B.
Special work or services are defined as that work characterized by
extraordinary complexity, sophistication, or innovation or a combination of the
foregoing attributes which are unique to the construction industry. The
following may be considered by the ENGINEER in making estimates for
payment for special services:
1.
When the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR, by agreement,
determine that a special service or work is required which cannot
be performed by the forces of the CONTRACTOR or those of any
of its subcontractors, the special service or work may be performed
by an entity especially skilled in the work to be performed. After
validation of invoices and termination of market values by the
ENGINEER, invoices for special services or work based upon the
current fair market value thereof may be accepted without complete
itemization of labor, material, and equipment rental cost.
2.
When the CONTRACTOR is required to perform work necessitating
special fabrication or machining process in a fabrication or a machine
shop facility away from the job site, the charges for that portion of the
work performed at the off-site facility may by agreement, be accepted
as a special service and accordingly, the invoices from the work may
be accepted without detailed itemization.
3.
All invoices for special services will be adjusted by deducting all trade
discounts offered or available, whether the discounts were taken or
not. In lieu of the allowances for overhead and profit specified in
Paragraph 11.04, herein, an allowance of 5 percent will be added to
invoices for special services.
All work performed hereunder shall be subject to all of the provisions of the
Contract Documents and the CONTRACTOR's sureties shall be bound with
reference hereto as under the original Agreement. Copies of all
amendments to surety bonds or supplemental surety bonds shall be
submitted to the OWNER for review prior to the performance of any work
hereunder.
11-5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
11.4
CONTRACTOR'S FEE
A.
WORK ordered on the basis of time and materials will be paid for at the
actual necessary cost as determined by the ENGINEER, plus allowances for
overhead and profit. For extra work involving a combination of increases and
decreases in the WORK the actual necessary cost will be the arithmetic sum
of the additive and deductive costs. The allowance for overhead and profit
shall include full compensation for superintendence, bond and insurance
premiums, taxes, office expenses, and all other items of expense or cost not
included in the cost of labor, materials, or equipment provided for under
Paragraphs 11.02B, C, and D, herein including extended overhead and
home office overhead. The allowance for overhead and profit will be made
in accordance with the following schedule:
ACTUAL NECESSARY COST OVERHEAD AND PROFIT ALLOWANCE
Labor ..................................................................................................... 10 percent
Materials ................................................................................................ 10 percent
Equipment ............................................................................................. 10 percent
B.
It is understood that labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished by the
CONTRACTOR or by the subcontractor, the allowance specified herein shall
be applied to the labor, materials, and equipment costs of the subcontractor,
to which the CONTRACTOR may add 5 percent of the subcontractor's total
cost for the extra work. Regardless of the number of hierarchical tiers of
subcontractors, the 5 percent increase above the subcontractor's total cost
which includes the allowances for overhead and profit specified herein may
be applied one time only for each separate work transaction.
11-6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME
12.1
GENERAL
A.
The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for
an extension of the Contract time shall be based on written notice delivered
by the CONTRACTOR to the ENGINEER promptly (but in no event later than
30 days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating
the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with
supporting data shall be delivered within 30 days after such occurrence
(unless the ENGINEER allows an additional period of time to ascertain more
accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the
CONTRACTOR's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire
adjustment to which the CONTRACTOR has reason to believe it is entitled
as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the
Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with
Paragraph 9.08 if the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR cannot otherwise
agree. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time will be valid if not
submitted in accordance with the requirements of this Paragraph 12.01A.
B.
The Contract Time will be extended in an amount equal to time lost if the
CONTRACTOR makes a claim as provided in Paragraph 12.01A and the
ENGINEER determines that the delay was caused by events beyond the
control of the CONTRACTOR. Examples of events beyond the control of the
CONTRACTOR include acts or neglect by the OWNER or others performing
additional work as contemplated by Article 7, or by acts of God or of the
public enemy, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, labor
disputes, sabotage, or freight embargoes.
C.
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence.
D.
None of the aforesaid time extensions shall entitle the CONTRACTOR to any
adjustment in the Contract Price or any damages for delay. Furthermore, the
CONTRACTOR hereby indemnifies and holds harmless the OWNER and
ENGINEER, their officers, agents and employees from and against all
claims, damages, losses and expenses (including lost property and
attorney's fees) arising out of or resulting from the temporary suspension of
work whether for the OWNER's convenience as defined in Article 15.01 (a)
or for whatever other reasons including the stoppage of work by the
ENGINEER for the CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any order issued
by the ENGINEER.
12-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
12.2
12.3
EXTENSIONS OF THE TIME FOR DELAY DUE TO INCLEMENT WEATHER
A.
"Inclement weather" is any weather condition or conditions resulting
immediately therefrom, causing the CONTRACTOR to suspend construction
operations or preventing the CONTRACTOR from proceeding with at least
75 percent of the normal labor and equipment force engaged on the WORK.
B.
Should the CONTRACTOR prepare to begin work at the regular starting time
at the beginning of any regular work shift on any day on which inclement
weather, or its effects on the condition of the WORK prevents work from
beginning at the usual starting time and the crew is dismissed as a result
thereof, the CONTRACTOR will not be charged for a working day whether or
not conditions change thereafter during the day and the major portion of the
day could be considered to be suitable for construction operations.
C.
The CONTRACTOR shall base its construction schedule upon the inclusion
of the number of days of inclement weather specified in the paragraph
entitled "Inclement weather delays" of the Supplementary General
Conditions. No extension of the Contract Time due to inclement weather will
be considered until after the stated number of days of inclement weather has
been reached. However, no reduction in Contract Time will be made if the
number of inclement weather days is not reached.
EXTENSIONS OF TIME FOR OTHER DELAYS
A.
If the CONTRACTOR is delayed in completion of the WORK beyond the time
named in the Contract Documents for the completion of the WORK, by acts
of God or of the public enemy, fire, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions,
strikes, labor disputes, industry-wide shortage of raw materials, sabotage or
freight embargoes, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an adjustment in
the Contract Time. No such adjustment will be made unless the
CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the causes of delay
within 15 calendar days from the beginning of any such delay. The
ENGINEER shall ascertain the facts and the extent of the delay. No
adjustment in time shall be made for delays resulting from noncompliance
with the Contract, accidents, failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to
carry out the provisions of the Contract including failure to provide materials,
equipment or workmanship meeting the requirements of the Contract
Documents; the occurrence of such events shall not relieve the
CONTRACTOR from the necessity of maintaining the required progress.
B.
In the event that Contract completion is delayed beyond the Contract Time
named in the Specifications by reason of shortages of raw materials required
for CONTRACTOR-furnished items, the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to
12-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
an adjustment in the Contract Time in like manner as if the WORK had been
suspended for the convenience and benefit of the OWNER; provided,
however, that the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation acceptable to
the OWNER and ENGINEER that he placed or attempted to place firm
orders with suppliers at a reasonable time in advance of the required date of
delivery of the items in question, that such shortages shall have developed
following the date such orders were placed or attempts made to place same,
that said shortages are general throughout the affected industry, that said
shortages are shortages of raw materials required to manufacture
CONTRACTOR-furnished items and not simply failure of CONTRACTOR's
suppliers to manufacture, assemble or ship items on time, and that the
CONTRACTOR shall, to the degree possible, have made revisions in the
sequence of his operations, within the terms of the Contract, to offset the
expected delay. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER, in writing,
concerning the cause of delay, within 15 calendar days of the beginning of
such delay. The validity of any claim by the CONTRACTOR to an adjustment
in the Contract Time shall be determined by the OWNER acting through the
ENGINEER, and his findings thereon shall be based on the ENGINEER's
knowledge and observations of the events involved and documentation
submitted by the CONTRACTOR, showing all applicable facts relative to the
foregoing provisions. Only the physical shortage of raw materials will be
considered under these provisions as a cause for adjustment of time and no
consideration will be given to any claim that items could not be obtained at a
reasonable, practical, or economical cost or price, unless it is shown to the
satisfaction of the OWNER that such items could have been obtained only at
exorbitant prices entirely out of line with current rates taking into account the
quantities involved and the usual practices in obtaining such quantities.
C.
If the CONTRACTOR is delayed in completion of the WORK by reason of
changes made under the provisions of Article 10 or changed conditions as
provided under Article 4.03, or by failure of the OWNER to acquire or clear
right-of-way as provided under Article 15.01, or by any act of the ENGINEER
or of the OWNER, not contemplated by the Contract, an adjustment in the
Contract time will be made by the OWNER in like manner as if the WORK
had been suspended for the convenience and benefit of the OWNER,
except, that if the WORK is increased as a result of changes, the OWNER,
at his sole discretion, may grant an adjustment in the number of calendar
days for completion of the Contract. In the event of such delay, the
CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the causes of delay
within 15 calendar days from the beginning of any such delay.
12-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 13 - WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE; TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;
CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE
WORK
13.1
13.2
WARRANTY, GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A.
The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees to the OWNER and the
ENGINEER that all work, equipment, materials and workmanship are in
accordance with the Contract Documents and are not defective. Prompt
notice of defects discovered by the OWNER or ENGINEER shall be given to
the CONTRACTOR. All defective work, whether or not in place, may be
rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13.
B.
If within one (1) year after the date of Final Completion, as set by the
Engineer's Notice of Completion, or a longer period of time prescribed by
Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee or
specific provisions of the Contract Documents, any work is found to be
defective, the OWNER shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing and the
CONTRACTOR shall promptly, without cost to the OWNER and in
accordance with the OWNER's written notification, either correct the
defective work, or, if it has been rejected by the OWNER, remove it from the
site and replace it with non-defective work. In the event the CONTRACTOR
does not promptly comply with the notification, or in an emergency where
delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the OWNER may have the
defective work corrected or rejected work removed and replaced. All direct,
indirect, and consequential costs of the removal and replacement including
but not limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and
other professionals will be paid by the CONTRACTOR. This paragraph shall
not be construed to limit nor diminish the CONTRACTOR's absolute
guarantee to complete the WORK in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
ACCESS TO WORK
A.
The ENGINEER, other representatives of the OWNER, testing agencies, and
governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests shall have access to the
work at reasonable times for their observation, inspections, and testing. The
CONTRACTOR shall provide proper and safe conditions for their access.
13-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
13.3
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER timely notice of readiness of
the WORK for all required inspections, tests, or approvals.
B.
If Laws or Regulations of any public body other than the OWNER, with
jurisdiction over the WORK require any work to be specifically inspected,
tested, or approved, the CONTRACTOR shall pay all costs in connection
therewith. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for and shall pay all
costs in connection with any inspection or testing required in connection with
the OWNER's or the ENGINEER's acceptance of a Supplier of materials or
equipment proposed as a substitution or-equal to be incorporated in the
WORK and of materials or equipment submitted for review prior to the
CONTRACTOR's purchase for incorporation in the WORK. The cost of all
inspections, tests, and approvals with the exception of the above which are
required by the Contract Documents shall be paid by the OWNER (unless
otherwise specified).
C.
The ENGINEER will make, or have made, such inspections and test as the
ENGINEER deems necessary to see that the WORK is being accomplished
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The
Contractor without additional cost to the OWNER, shall provide the labor and
equipment necessary to make the WORK available for inspections. Unless
otherwise specified in the Supplementary General Conditions or the
OWNER-ENGINEER Agreement, all other costs of inspection and testing will
be borne by the OWNER. In the event the inspections or tests reveal noncompliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
CONTRACTOR shall bear the cost of corrective measures deemed
necessary by the ENGINEER, as well as the cost of subsequent reinspection and retesting. Neither observations by the ENGINEER nor
inspections, tests, or approvals by others shall relieve the CONTRACTOR
from the CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform the WORK in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
D.
All inspections, tests, or approvals other than those required by Laws or
Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction shall be performed by
properly licensed organizations selected by the OWNER.
13-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
13.4
E.
If any work (including the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or
approved is covered without the ENGINEER's written authorization, it must, if
requested by the ENGINEER, be uncovered for testing, inspection, and
observation. The uncovering shall be at the CONTRACTOR's expense
unless the CONTRACTOR timely notified the ENGINEER of the
CONTRACTOR's intention to cover the same and the ENGINEER failed to
act with reasonable promptness in response to the notice.
F.
In any work is covered contrary to the written request of the ENGINEER, it
must, if requested by the ENGINEER, be uncovered for the ENGINEER's
observation and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.
G.
If the ENGINEER considers it necessary or advisable that covered work be
observed, inspected or tested by the ENGINEER or others, the ENGINEER
shall direct the CONTRACTOR to uncover, expose, or otherwise make
available for observation, inspection, or testing that portion of the work in
question. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the ENGINEER's direction
and furnish all necessary labor, material, and equipment. If found the work is
defective, the CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect and consequential
costs of uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing and of
satisfactory reconstruction of the work, including but not limited to fees and
charges for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals.
However, if the work is not defective, the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both.
The increase in Contract Time and Contract Price shall be the
CONTRACTOR's actual time and costs directly attributable to uncovering
and exposing the work. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
or extent of the changes, the CONTRACTOR may make a claim therefor as
provided in Articles 11 and 12.
OWNER MAY STOP THE WORK
A.
13.5
If the WORK is defective, or the CONTRACTOR fails to perform work in such
a way that the completed WORK will conform to the Contract Documents,
the OWNER may order the CONTRACTOR to stop the WORK, or any
portion thereof, until the cause for the order has been eliminated. This right
of the OWNER to stop the WORK shall not give rise to any duty on the part
of the OWNER to exercise this right for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR or
any other party.
CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
When directed by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly correct
all defective work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the
13-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
work has been rejected by the ENGINEER, remove it from the site and
replace it with non-defective work. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct,
indirect and consequential costs of correction or removal, including but not
limited to fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals made necessary thereby.
13.6
ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective
work, the OWNER prefers to accept the work, the OWNER may do so. The
CONTRACTOR shall bear all direct, indirect, and consequential costs
attributable to the OWNER's evaluation of and determination to accept the
defective work. If any acceptance of defective work occurs prior to final
payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary
revisions in the Contact Documents with respect to the WORK, and the
OWNER shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price.
13-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND
COMPLETION
14.1
SCHEDULE OF VALUES (LUMP SUM PRICE BREAKDOWN)
A.
14.2
UNIT PRICE BID SCHEDULE
A.
14.3
The schedule of values or lump sum price breakdown established as
provided in the Technical Specifications shall serve as the basis for progress
payments and will be incorporated into the form of Application for Payment
included in the Contract Documents.
Progress payments for unit price work will be based on the number of units
completed.
APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
A.
Unless otherwise prescribed by the Owner, on the 25th of each month, the
CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER for review and approval, an
Application for Payment completed and signed by the CONTRACTOR
covering the WORK completed as of the date of the Application and
accompanied by such supporting documentation as required by the Contract
Documents.
B.
The Application for Payment shall identify, as a sub-total, the amount of the
CONTRACTOR's Total Earnings to Date, plus the Value of Materials at the
Site which have not yet been incorporated in the WORK, and less a
deductive adjustment for materials installed which were not previously
incorporated in the WORK, but for which payment was allowed under the
provisions of payment for Materials Stored at the Site but not yet
incorporated in the WORK.
C.
The Net Payment Due to the CONTRACTOR shall be the above-mentioned
sub-total, from which shall be deducted the retainage amount and the total
amount of all previous payments made to the CONTRACTOR.
D.
The OWNER may withhold and retain 5% of each approved progress
payment to the CONTRACTOR. The total retention proceeds withheld shall
not exceed 5% of the total construction price. All retention proceeds shall be
placed by the OWNER in an interest-bearing account. The interest accrued
shall be for the benefit of the CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors, and it
shall be paid after the WORK has been completed and accepted by the
OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that any interest accrued on the
14-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
retainage is distributed by the CONTRACTOR to its subcontractors on a pro
rata basis.
E.
Any retention proceeds withheld, and any accrued interest, shall be released
by the OWNER pursuant to an Application for Payment from the
CONTRACTOR within 45 days from the later of:
1.
the date the OWNER receives the final Application for Payment from
the CONTRACTOR;
2.
the date that a certificate of occupancy or final acceptance notice is
issued to:
(a)
the Contractor who obtained the building permit from the
building inspector or from a public agency;
(b)
the OWNER; or
(c)
the ENGINEER.
3.
the date the CONTRACTOR accepts final payment for the Work; or
4.
the date that a public agency or building inspector having authority to
issue its own certificate of occupancy does not issue the certificate
but permits partial or complete occupancy of a newly constructed or
remodeled building; provided, however, that if only partial occupancy
of a building is permitted, any retention proceeds withheld and
retained, and any accrued interest, shall be partially released in direct
proportion to the value of the part of the building occupied.
Each Application for Payment from the CONTRACTOR shall include
documentation of lien releases or waivers.
F.
Notwithstanding any other provision in this Article to the contrary,
1.
If the CONTRACTOR is in default or breach of the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents, the OWNER may withhold
from payment to the CONTRACTOR for so long as reasonably
necessary an amount necessary to cure the breach or default of the
CONTRACTOR; or
2.
If the WORK or a portion of the WORK has been substantially
completed, the OWNER may retain until completion up to twice the
14-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
fair market value of the WORK of the CONTRACTOR that has not
been completed:
3.
G.
H.
(a)
in accordance with the Contract Documents; or
(b)
in the absence of applicable provisions in the Contract
Documents to generally accepted craft standards.
If the OWNER refuses payment under subparagraphs (F)(i) or (ii), it
shall describe in writing within 45 days of withholding such amounts
what portion of the WORK was not completed according to the
standards specified in the Contract Documents.
The CONTRACTOR shall distribute retention proceeds as outlined below:
1.
Except as provided in Paragraph 14.03.G.2, below, if the
CONTRACTOR receives retention proceeds, it shall pay each of its
subcontractors from whom retention has been withheld each
subcontractor’s share of the retention received within ten days from
the day that all or any portion of the retention proceeds is received
from the OWNER.
2.
Notwithstanding Paragraph 14.03.G.1, above, if a retention payment
received by the CONTRACTOR is specifically designated for a
particular subcontractor, payment of the retention shall be made to
the designated subcontractor.
Except as otherwise provided in the Supplementary General Conditions, the
value of materials stored at the site shall be valued at 95 percent of the value
of the materials. This amount shall be based upon the value of all
acceptable materials and equipment stored at the site or at another location
agreed to in writing by the OWNER; provided, each individual item has a
value of more than $5,000 and will become a permanent part of the WORK.
The Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale,
invoice, or other documentation warranting that the CONTRACTOR has
received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges,
security interests, and encumbrances (which are hereinafter in these General
Conditions referred to as "Liens") and evidence that the materials and
equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other
arrangements to protect the OWNER's interest therein, all of which will be
satisfactory to the OWNER.
14-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
14.4
CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE
A.
14.5
14.6
The CONTRACTOR warrants and guarantees that title to all work, materials,
and equipment covered by an Application for Payment, whether incorporated
in the WORK or not, will pass to the OWNER no later than the time of final
payment free and clear of all liens.
REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
A.
The ENGINEER will, within 7 days after receipt of each Application for
Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and
present the Application to the OWNER, or return the Application to the
CONTRACTOR indicating in writing the ENGINEER's reasons for refusing to
recommend payment. In the later case, the CONTRACTOR may make the
necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Thirty days after
presentation of the Application for Payment with the ENGINEER's
recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of
Paragraph 14.05B) become due and when due will be paid by the OWNER
to the CONTRACTOR.
B.
The OWNER may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended
by the ENGINEER to compensate for claims made by the OWNER on
account of the CONTRACTOR's performance of the WORK or other items
entitling the OWNER to a credit against the amount recommended, but the
OWNER must give the CONTRACTOR written notice within 7 days (with a
copy to the ENGINEER) stating the reasons for such action.
PARTIAL UTILIZATION
A.
The OWNER may utilize or place into service any item of equipment or other
usable portion of the WORK at any time prior to completion of the WORK.
The OWNER shall notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of its intent to
exercise this right. The notice will identify the equipment or specific portion
or portions of the WORK to be utilized or otherwise placed into service.
B.
It shall be understood by the CONTRACTOR that until such written
notification is issued, all responsibility for care and maintenance of all items
or portions of the WORK to be partially utilized shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR. Upon the issuance of a notice of partial utilization, the
ENGINEER will deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a written
recommendation as to division of responsibilities between the OWNER and
the CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance,
14-4
GENERAL CONDITIONS
heat, utilities and insurance. Upon the OWNER's acceptance of these
recommendations, the ENGINEER's aforesaid recommendation will be
binding on the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR until final payment.
C.
14.7
14.8
The CONTRACTOR shall retain full responsibility for satisfactory completion
of the WORK, regardless of whether a portion thereof has been partially
utilized by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR's one year correction period
shall commence only after the date of Final Completion for the WORK.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A.
The CONTRACTOR shall pay to the OWNER the amount specified in the
Supplemental General Conditions, not as a penalty but as liquidated
damages, if he fails to complete the WORK or specified parts of the WORK
within the time or times agreed upon. The periods for which these damages
shall be paid shall be the number of Days from the agreed date or Contract
Time as contained in the Agreement, or from the date of termination of any
extension of time approved by the OWNER, to the date or dates on which
the ENGINEER certifies Substantial Completion of WORK or specified parts
of the WORK as provided in Article 14.08, herein. The OWNER may deduct
the amount of said damages from any monies due or to become due the
CONTRACTOR. After Substantial Completion, if the CONTRACTOR fails to
complete the remaining WORK within 45 days or any proper extension
thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER the amount
stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as liquidated damages for
each day that expires after the 45 days until readiness for final payment.
B.
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the
CONTRACTOR and the OWNER because of the impracticability and
extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the OWNER
would sustain; and said amount is agreed to be the amount of damages
which the OWNER would sustain. Said damages are not in lieu of but in
addition to other actual or consequential damages to which the OWNER may
be entitled.
C.
All times specified in the Contract Documents are hereby declared to be of
the essence.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
When the CONTRACTOR considers the WORK ready for its intended use,
and the CONTRACTOR has delivered to the ENGINEER all maintenance
and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of
14-5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
inspection, marked-up record documents and other documents, all as
required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR may notify the
OWNER and the ENGINEER in writing that the WORK is substantially
complete and request that the ENGINEER prepare a Certificate of
Substantial Completion. Within a reasonable time thereafter, the OWNER,
the CONTRACTOR, and the ENGINEER shall make an inspection of the
WORK to determine the status of completion. If the ENGINEER does not
consider the WORK substantially complete, the ENGINEER will notify the
OWNER and CONTRACTOR in writing giving the reasons therefor. If the
ENGINEER considers the WORK substantially complete, the ENGINEER will
prepare and deliver to the OWNER for its execution the Certificate of
Substantial Completion signed by the ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR,
which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion.
B.
The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be a release by the
CONTRACTOR of the OWNER and its agents from all claims and liability to
the CONTRACTOR for anything done or furnished for, or relating to, the
WORK or for any act or neglect of the OWNER or of any person relating to
or affecting the WORK, to the date of Substantial Completion, except
demands against the OWNER for the remainder of the amounts kept or
retained from progress payments and excepting pending, unresolved claims
filed in writing prior to the date of Substantial Completion. At the time of
delivery of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the ENGINEER will
deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, if applicable, a written
recommendation as to division of responsibilities between the OWNER and
the CONTRACTOR with respect to security, operation, safety, maintenance,
heat, utilities and insurance. Upon the OWNER's acceptance of these
recommendations, the ENGINEER's recommendation will be binding on the
OWNER and the CONTRACTOR until final payment.
C.
The OWNER, upon written notice to the CONTRACTOR, shall have the right
to exclude the CONTRACTOR from the WORK after the date of Substantial
Completion, and complete all or portions of the WORK at the
CONTRACTOR's expense.
14-6
GENERAL CONDITIONS
14.9
COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
A.
Upon written certification from the CONTRACTOR that the WORK is
complete (if a Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued this
certification must occur within 45 days of that date), the ENGINEER will
make a final inspection with the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. If the
OWNER and ENGINEER do not consider the WORK complete, the
ENGINEER will notify the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR in writing of all
particulars in which this inspection reveals that the WORK is incomplete or
defective. The CONTRACTOR shall immediately take the measures
necessary to remedy these deficiencies. If the ENGINEER and OWNER
consider the WORK complete, the CONTRACTOR may proceed to file its
application for final payment pursuant to this Article. At the request of the
CONTRACTOR, the ENGINEER may recommend to the OWNER that
certain minor deficiencies in the WORK that do not prevent the entire WORK
from being used by the OWNER for its intended use, and the completion of
which will be unavoidably delayed due to no fault of the CONTRACTOR, be
exempted from being completed prerequisite to final payment. These
outstanding items of pickup work, or "punch list items", shall be listed on the
ENGINEER's Notice of Completion, together with the recommended time
limits for their completion, and extended warranty requirements for those
items and the value of such items.
B.
After the issuance of the Notice of Completion and after the CONTRACTOR
has completed corrections that have not been exempted to the satisfaction of
the ENGINEER and delivered to the ENGINEER all required additions and
modifications to maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,
guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents
and other documents, all as required by the Contract Documents; and after
the ENGINEER has indicated that the WORK is acceptable, the
CONTRACTOR may make application for final payment following the
procedure for progress payments. The final application for payment shall be
accompanied by all documentation called for in the Contract Documents and
other data and schedules as the OWNER or ENGINEER may reasonably
require, including an affidavit of the CONTRACTOR that all labor, services,
material, equipment and other indebtedness connected with the WORK for
which the OWNER or his property might in any way be responsible, have
been paid or otherwise satisfied, and a consent of the payment bond surety
to final payment, all in forms approved by the OWNER.
14-7
GENERAL CONDITIONS
14.10 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A.
If, on the basis of the ENGINEER's observation of the WORK during
construction and final inspection, and the ENGINEER's review of the final
application for payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by
the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER is satisfied that the WORK has
been completed and the CONTRACTOR has fulfilled all of his obligations
under the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER will, within ten days after
receipt of the final application for payment, indicate in writing his
recommendation of payment and present the application to the OWNER for
payment. Thereupon, the ENGINEER will give written notice to the OWNER
and the CONTRACTOR that the WORK is acceptable by executing the
ENGINEER's Notice of Completion. Otherwise, the ENGINEER will return
the application to the CONTRACTOR, indicating in writing the reasons for
refusing to recommend final payment, in which case the CONTRACTOR
shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the application.
B.
Within 45 calendar days after the ENGINEER's filing of the Notice of
Completion, the OWNER will make final payment including all deducted
retainage (except as noted below) to the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER's
remittance of final payment shall be the OWNER's acceptance of the WORK
if formal acceptance of the WORK is not indicated otherwise. The final
payment shall be that amount remaining after deducting all prior payments
and all amounts to be kept or retained under the provisions of the Contract,
including the following items:
1.
Liquidated damages, as applicable.
2.
All amounts retained by the OWNER under Paragraph 14.03(F).
14.11 CONTRACTOR'S CONTINUING OBLIGATIONS
A.
The CONTRACTOR's obligation to perform and complete the WORK in
accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. Neither
recommendation of any progress or final payment by the ENGINEER, nor
the issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion or Notice of
Completion, nor payment by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR under the
Contract Documents, nor any use or occupancy of the WORK or any part
thereof by the OWNER, nor any act of acceptance by the OWNER nor any
failure to do so, nor any review of a shop drawing or sample submittal, will
constitute an acceptance of work or materials not in accordance with the
Contract Documents or a release of the CONTRACTOR's obligation to
perform the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents.
14-8
GENERAL CONDITIONS
14.12 FINAL PAYMENT TERMINATES LIABILITY OF OWNER
A.
Final payment is defined as the last progress payment made to the
CONTRACTOR for earned funds, less deductions listed in Paragraph 14.10B
herein. The acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of the final payment referred
to in Paragraph 14.10 herein, shall be a release of the OWNER and its
agents from all claims of liability to the CONTRACTOR for anything done or
furnished for, or relating to, the work or for any act or neglect of the OWNER
or of any person relating to or affecting the work, except demands against
the OWNER for the remainder, if any, of the amounts kept or retained under
the provisions of Paragraph 14.10 herein; and excepting pending, unresolved
claims filed prior to the date of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
14-9
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
15.1
15.2
SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER
A.
The OWNER acting through the ENGINEER may, by written notice to the
Contractor, temporarily suspend the WORK, in whole or in part, for a period
or periods of time, but not to exceed 90 days, for the convenience and
benefit of the OWNER upon the occurrence of any one or more of the
following: (1) unsuitable weather; (2) delay in delivery of OWNER- furnished
equipment or materials, or such other conditions as are considered
unfavorable for prosecution of the work; (3) Shortfall in construction funds;
(4) Constraints imposed by public entities, public utilities, property owners or
legal proceedings; (5) Failure or delay in acquisition of easements or right-ofway by the OWNER; or (6) Other conditions which, in the opinion of the
OWNER, warrant a delay in the WORK. Suspended WORK shall be
resumed by the CONTRACTOR within 10 calendar days of receipt from the
ENGINEER of written notice to proceed. Whenever the OWNER temporarily
suspends work for any conditions enumerated in this Article 15.01 A, the
CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time as
specified in Article 12.03 C.
B.
The suspension of work shall be effective upon receipt by the Contractor of
the written order suspending the work and shall be terminated upon receipt
by the Contractor of the written order terminating the suspension.
C.
The CONTRACTOR hereby indemnifies and holds harmless the OWNER
and ENGINEER, their officers, agents and employees, from and against all
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including lost profits and attorney's
fees, arising out of or resulting from the temporary suspension of the WORK,
whether for the OWNER's convenience described in this Article or for
whatever other reasons, including the stoppage of work by the ENGINEER
for the CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any order issued by the
ENGINEER.
TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY OWNER (CONTRACTOR DEFAULT)
A.
In the event of default by the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may give written
notice to the CONTRACTOR of OWNER's intent to terminate the Agreement.
The notice shall state the event of default and the time allowed to remedy the
default. It shall be considered a default by the CONTRACTOR whenever the
CONTRACTOR shall: (1) declare bankruptcy, become insolvent, or assign its
assets for the benefit of its creditors; (2) fail to provide materials or
workmanship meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents; (3)
disregard or violate provisions of the Contract Documents or ENGINEER's
15-1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
instructions, (4) fail to prosecute the WORK according to the approved
progress schedule; or, (5) fail to provide a qualified superintendent,
competent workmen, or materials or equipment meeting the requirements of
the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR fails to remedy the
conditions constituting default within the time allowed, the OWNER may then
issue a Notice of Termination.
B.
15.3
TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY OWNER (FOR CONVENIENCE)
A.
15.4
In the event the Agreement is terminated in accordance with Paragraph
15.02A, the OWNER may take possession of the WORK and may complete
the WORK by whatever method or means the OWNER may select. The cost
of completing the WORK shall be deducted from the balance which would
have been due the CONTRACTOR had the Agreement not been terminated
and the WORK completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If
such cost exceeds the balance which would have been due, the
CONTRACTOR shall pay the excess amount to the OWNER. If such cost is
less than the balance which would have been due, the CONTRACTOR shall
have no claim to the difference.
The OWNER may terminate the Agreement at any time if it is found that
reasons beyond the control of either the OWNER or CONTRACTOR make it
impossible or against the OWNER's interests to complete the WORK. In
such a case, the CONTRACTOR shall have no claims against the OWNER
except: (1) for the value of the work, as determined by the engineer,
performed by the Contractor up to the date the Agreement is terminated;
and, (2) for the cost of materials and equipment on hand, in transit, or on
definite commitment, as of the date the Agreement is terminated, which
would be needed in the WORK and which meet the requirements of the
Contact Documents. The value of work performed and the cost of materials
and equipment delivered to the site, as mentioned above, shall be
determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the procedure prescribed
from making the final application for payment and final payment under
Paragraphs 14.09 and 14.10.
TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT BY CONTRACTOR
A.
The CONTRACTOR may terminate the Agreement upon 10 days written
notice to the OWNER, whenever: (1) the WORK has been suspended under
the provisions of Paragraph 15.01, for more than 90 consecutive days
through no fault or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, and notice to resume
work or to terminate the agreement has not been received from the OWNER
within this time period; or, (2) the OWNER should fail to pay the
15-2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
CONTRACTOR any monies due him in accordance with the terms or the
Contract Documents and within 60 days after presentation to the OWNER by
the CONTRACTOR of a request therefor, unless within said 10-day period
the OWNER shall have remedied the condition upon which the payment
delay was based. In the event of such termination, the CONTRACTOR shall
have no claims against the OWNER except for those claims specifically
enumerated in Paragraph 15.03, and as determined in Accordance with the
requirements of that paragraph.
15-3
GENERAL CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 16 - MISCELLANEOUS
16.1
GIVING NOTICE
A.
16.2
TITLE TO MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK
A.
16.3
Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of
written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in
person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the
corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or
certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the
giver of the notice.
The OWNER reserves the right to retain title to all soils, stone, sand, gravel,
and other materials developed and obtained from excavations and other
operations connected with the WORK. Unless otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents, neither the CONTRACTOR nor any subcontractor shall
have any right, title, or interest in or to any such materials. The
CONTRACTOR will be permitted to use in the WORK, without charge, any
such materials which meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
RIGHT TO AUDIT
A.
If the CONTRACTOR submits a claim to the OWNER for additional
compensation, the OWNER shall have the right, as a condition to
considering the claim, and as a basis for evaluation of the claim, and until the
claim has been settled, to audit the CONTRACTOR's books. This right shall
include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other evidence
and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify all
direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or
anticipated to be incurred and for which the claim has been submitted. The
right to audit shall include the right to inspect the CONTRACTOR's plants, or
such parts thereof, as may be or have been engaged in the performance of
the WORK. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the right to audit
encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon subcontractors. The right
to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be exercisable through such
representatives as the OWNER deems desirable during the
CONTRACTOR's normal business hours at the office of the CONTRACTOR.
The CONTRACTOR shall make available to the OWNER for auditing, all
relevant accounting records and documents, and other financial data, and
upon request, shall submit true copies of requested records to the OWNER.
16-1
16.4
ASBESTOS
A.
If the CONTRACTOR during the course of work observes the existence of
asbestos in any structure or building, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly
notify the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The OWNER shall consult with the
ENGINEER regarding removal or encapsulation of the asbestos material and
the CONTRACTOR shall not perform any work pertinent to the asbestos
material prior to receipt or special instruction from the OWNER through the
ENGINEER.
16-2
ARTICLE 17- GENERAL
17.1
17.2
GENERAL
1.
These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General
Conditions of the Contract and any other provisions of the Contract
Documents as indicated herein. All provisions which are not so amended or
supplemented remain in full force and effect.
2.
The terms used in these Supplemental General Conditions which are defined
in the General Conditions of the Contract have the meanings assigned to
them in the General Conditions of the Contract herein.
SUPPLEMENTAL DEFINITIONS
1.
ENGINEER
The "Engineer" is David L. Jensen and Associates Engineers; 547 West
500 South, #140. Bountiful, Utah84010.
18-1
ARTICLE 18 - AMOUNTS OF LIQUIDATED
DAMAGES, BONDS AND INSURANCE
18.1
AMOUNT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
A.
18.2
PERFORMANCE AND OTHER BOND AMOUNTS
A.
18.3
As provided in Article 14.07 of the General Conditions, the Contractor shall
pay to the Owner as liquidated damages the amount of $1,000 for each
calendar day’s delay beyond the Contract Time for substantial completion.
The Contractor shall pay to the Owner as liquidated damages the amount of
$200 for each calendar day’s delay beyond 45 calendar days from the date
of substantial Completion until the Engineer issues the Notice of Final
Completion.
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a satisfactory Performance Bond in the
amount of 100 percent of the Contract Price and a satisfactory Payment
Bond in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract Price.
INSURANCE AMOUNTS
The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 5.02 of the General
Conditions shall provide for not less than the following amounts or greater where
required by Laws and Regulations:
A.
Workers' Compensation under Paragraph 5.02B.1 of the General Conditions:
1.
B.
State: Utah
Statutory
Comprehensive General Liability: (under Paragraph 5.02B.2 of the General
Conditions):
1. Bodily Injury (including completed operations and products liability):
$ 500,000
$ 1,000,000
Each Occurrence
Annual Aggregate
Property Damage:
$ 500,000
$ 1,000,000
or a combined single limit of
18-2
Each Occurrence
Annual Aggregate
$1,000,000
2.
Property Damage liability insurance including, Explosion, Collapse
and Underground coverages, where applicable.
3.
Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted
$ 1,000,000
C.
Annual Aggregate
Comprehensive Automobile Liability:
General Conditions:)
1.
Bodily Injury
$ 500,000
$ 1,000,000
2.
Each Person
Each Occurrence
Property Damage:
$ 500,000
Each Occurrence
or combined single limit of
D.
(Under Paragraph 5.02B.3 of the
Builders Risk:
$1,000,000
Not required.
18-3
ARTICLE 19 - PHYSICAL CONDITIONS AND WEATHER DELAYS
19.1
INCLEMENT WEATHER DELAYS
A.
The Contractor's construction schedule shall be based upon the inclusion of
at least three (3) days of inclement weather delays. Reference Article 12,
paragraph 12.02 of the General Conditions for additional requirements.
19-1
ARTICLE 20 - SUBCONTRACT LIMITATIONS
20.1
SUBCONTRACT LIMITATIONS
A.
In addition to the provisions of Paragraph 6.05 of the General Conditions, the
CONTRACTOR shall perform not less than 20 percent of the WORK with its
own forces (i.e., without subcontracting). The 20 percent requirement shall
be understood to refer to the WORK, the value of which totals not less than
20 percent of the Contract Price.
20-1
ARTICLE 21 - MISCELLANEOUS
21.01
PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, the Engineer, and
their officers, agents, and employees, against all claims or liability arising from the
use of any patented or copyrighted design, device, material, or process by the
Contractor or any of his subcontractors in the performance of the work.
21-1
Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 1000
01 2500
01 2600
01 2900
01 3100
01 3200
01 3300
01 3516
01 4000
01 4200
01 6000
01 7700
01 7823
01 7839
1 7900
SUMMARY
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
REFERENCES
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
01 0000 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Project information.
2.
Work covered by Contract Documents.
3.
Phased construction.
4.
Work under separate contracts.
5.
Access to site.
6.
Coordination with occupants.
7.
Work restrictions.
8.
Specification and drawing conventions.
9.
Miscellaneous provisions.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.2
PROJECT INFORMATION
A.
Project Identification: Jordan Valley Water Treatment Plant
1.
Project Location: 15305 South 3200 West, Herriman, UT 84065
B.
Owner/Tenant: Jordan Valley Water Conservancy District.
1.
Owner's Representative: Marcelo Anglade, P.E.
C.
Engineer: David L. Jensen and Associates
1.
Richard D. Jensen, P.E.
1.3
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
1.4
The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1.
Project consists of HVAC upgrade to laboratory facility.
ACCESS TO SITE
A.
General: Contractor shall have the necessary use of Project site for construction operations
during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by Owner's right to perform
day-to-day operations, maintain security measures, or to retain other contractors on the
facilities.
B.
General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.
C.
Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction
operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused
by construction operations.
SUMMARY
011000 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.5
COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A.
1.6
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction
period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate
Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations.
Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used
facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities
without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Notify Owner not less than 24 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
1.
Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
2.
Work in production areas may only occur on weekends or after the tenants work shift(s).
B.
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
Notify Owner not less than one day in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
C.
Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and
vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1.
Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
D.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or on building site.
E.
Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site
is not permitted.
1.7
SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The
words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied
where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2.
Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated
otherwise.
B.
Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work
of all Sections in the Specifications.
C.
Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are
described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to
identify materials and products:
1.
Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in
the individual Specifications Sections.
SUMMARY
011000 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of
the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.
Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing
Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
011000 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B.
1.
Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.
2.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be
provided, if applicable.
b.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other
parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
c.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific
features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work
specified.
d.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
e.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
f.
Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of engineers and owners.
h.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i.
Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,
from ICC-ES.
j.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in
delivery.
k.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
012500 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
l.
3.
1.4
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible
with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.
m.
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Engineer will notify Contractor through Construction Manager of acceptance or rejection
of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Engineer’s Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b.
Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution
with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility
tests recommended by manufacturers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for
change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related
submittals.
1.
Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied:
a.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
b.
Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified
product provided.
c.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.
d.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
e.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
f.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
g.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
h.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution
has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
B.
Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed.
012500 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.3
Engineer will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, on Engineer’s Standard
Letterhead.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Engineer will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Engineer are not instructions either to stop
work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2.
Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after
receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the
Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
b.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
c.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
e.
Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Engineer.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a
change to Engineer.
1.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
3.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
4.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5.
Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
012600 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
1.4
Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Engineer.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.5
On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Engineer will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in these contract documents.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive.
B.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on additional work previously agreed to be on a “time
and material” basis as required by the Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
012600 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process
Applications for Payment.
B.
1.
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
2.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements
governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.
1.2
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.
Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.
b.
Submittal schedule.
c.
Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.
2.
Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date but no later than
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
3.
Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with
each phase of payment.
B.
Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for
the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a.
Project name and location.
b.
Name of Engineer.
c.
Engineer’s project number.
d.
Contractor's name and address.
e.
Date of submittal.
2.
Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.
3.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project
Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in
excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a.
Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project
closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and
subcontract amount.
4.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
5.
Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
6.
Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of
values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in General
Conditions.
C.
Application for Payment Forms: Use forms included herein.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form (pg. K1-K2). Execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete
applications without action.
1.
Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
E.
Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment
to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of
lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
F.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related
to the Work covered by the payment.
1.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
2.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.
3.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
4.
Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
G.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
List of subcontractors.
2.
Schedule of values.
3.
Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4.
Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
H.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of
Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for
portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I.
Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted
and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
2.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4.
"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment."
5.
"Contractor's Affidavit of Payment."
6.
"Consent of Surety for Final Payment."
7.
Evidence that claims have been settled.
8.
Final liquidated damages settlement statement.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
012900 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
Coordination drawings.
2.
Requests for Information (RFIs).
3.
Project Web site.
4.
Project meetings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
RFI: Request from Owner, Engineer, or Contractor seeking information required by or
clarifications of the Contract Documents.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.
2.
Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
2.
Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.
2.
Preparation of the schedule of values.
013100 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in
individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited
space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration
of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to
indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of engineer, structural,
civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
b.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that
appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed
resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will
not be considered changes to the Contract.
B.
Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1.
Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of
visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.
2.
Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical
and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to
accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
3.
Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans
and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
equipment.
4.
Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.
5.
Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles,
door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and
similar items.
6.
Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being
coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's
responsibility.
1.6
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A.
General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.
1.
Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.
2.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
B.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or
interpretation and the following:
1.
Project name.
013100 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Project number.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Engineer.
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
RFI subject.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items
needing interpretation.
C.
RFI Forms: Software-generated form, acceptable to Engineer.
D.
Engineer's Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow
seven working days for Engineer’s response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer or
Construction Manager after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
Requests for approval of submittals.
b.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
c.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
d.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
e.
Requests for interpretation of Engineer’s actions on submittals.
f.
Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2.
Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3.
Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Engineer and Construction Manager in writing within 10
days of receipt of the RFI response.
1.7
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
2.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
3.
Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including
Owner and Engineer, within three days of the meeting.
013100 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
Contractor's construction schedule.
2.
Construction schedule updating reports.
3.
Daily construction reports.
4.
Site condition reports.
B.
1.
Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned
early start and finish times.
2.
Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.
3.
Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network
schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
1.3
A.
Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1.
Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.
2.
PDF electronic file.
3.
Two paper copies.
B.
Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction
period. Show logic ties for activities.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule
for entire construction period.
1.
Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and
date on label.
D.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for
each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration,
013200 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total
float in calendar days.
1.
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
2.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in
ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if
known.
3.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
4.
Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed
until most recent Application for Payment.
E.
Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
F.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G.
Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,
submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and
reports.
1.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities
involved.
2.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of
Substantial Completion.
1.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically
allowed by Engineer.
2.
Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in
schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3.
Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's
construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4.
Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.
5.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer’s administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6.
Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch
list items and final completion.
013200 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
2.
Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.
3.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
4.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
Coordination with existing construction.
b.
Limitations of continued occupancies.
c.
Uninterruptible services.
d.
Use of premises restrictions.
e.
Provisions for future construction.
f.
Seasonal variations.
g.
Environmental control.
5.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work.
D.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.
E.
Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:
1.
Unresolved issues.
2.
Unanswered Requests for Information.
3.
Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4.
Notations on returned submittals.
5.
Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
F.
Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means
by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
2.2
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
B.
Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include
skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on
indicated activities.
C.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded,
time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.
1.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be
accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.
a.
Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not
excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates,
regardless of Engineer’s approval of the schedule.
2.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
3.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days
and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.
D.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
013200 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the
following activities:
a.
Preparation and processing of submittals.
b.
Mobilization and demobilization.
c.
Purchase of materials.
d.
Delivery.
e.
Fabrication.
f.
Utility interruptions.
g.
Installation.
h.
Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.
i.
Testing and commissioning.
j.
Punch list and final completion.
k.
Activities occurring following final completion.
Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim
completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract
milestone dates.
Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled
network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as
necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
a.
Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical
path.
E.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its
submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect
of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
F.
Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating
straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the
following:
1.
Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
2.
Description of activity.
3.
Main events of activity.
4.
Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.
5.
Early and late start dates.
6.
Early and late finish dates.
7.
Activity duration in workdays.
8.
Total float or slack time.
9.
Average size of workforce.
10.
Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).
G.
Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports
showing the following:
1.
Identification of activities that have changed.
2.
Changes in early and late start dates.
3.
Changes in early and late finish dates.
4.
Changes in activity durations in workdays.
5.
Changes in the critical path.
6.
Changes in total float or slack time.
7.
Changes in the Contract Time.
013200 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.3
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
2.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
3.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
4.
Equipment at Project site.
5.
Material deliveries.
6.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.
7.
Accidents.
8.
Meetings and significant decisions.
9.
Unusual events.
10.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
12.
Emergency procedures.
13.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
14.
Change Orders received and implemented.
15.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
16.
Services connected and disconnected.
17.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
18.
Partial completions and occupancies.
19.
Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
2.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
3.
As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
B.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer and Owner, separate
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a
need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
2.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
013200 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural
requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
1.
Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and
reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
2.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
3.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer's
responsive action.
B.
Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not
require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with
requirements.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,
fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making
corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and
reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of digital data files of the Contract Drawings
will not be provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1.
Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract
Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.
a.
Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b.
Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form
acceptable to Owner and Engineer.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
2.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
013300 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a.
Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C.
Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.
Time for review shall commence on Engineer’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the
Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of
the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
3.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
D.
Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
2.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer.
3.
Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name of Engineer.
d.
Name of Construction Manager.
e.
Name of Contractor.
f.
Name of subcontractor.
g.
Name of supplier.
h.
Name of manufacturer.
i.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
j.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
k.
l.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
m.
Other necessary identification.
4.
Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and
unless Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,
initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
a.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified
number of copies to Engineer.
5.
Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately
for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Engineer
will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor.
a.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use facsimile of sample form included in
Project Manual.
b.
Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following
information:
1)
Project name.
2)
Date.
3)
Destination (To:).
4)
Source (From:).
5)
Name and address of Engineer.
6)
7)
Name of Contractor.
013300 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
E.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name
for each of multiple items.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Remarks.
Signature of transmitter.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
2.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a.
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by
a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).
Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
LNHS-061000.01.A).
3.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Engineer.
4.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a.
Project name.
b.
Date.
c.
Name and address of Engineer.
d.
e.
Name of Contractor.
f.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
g.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
h.
Category and type of submittal.
i.
Submittal purpose and description.
j.
Specification Section number and title.
k.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each
of multiple items.
l.
m.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
n.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
o.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
p.
Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
q.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
r.
Other necessary identification.
s.
Remarks.
5.
Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a.
Project name.
b.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
c.
Manufacturer name.
d.
Product name.
013300 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.
G.
Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
H.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
2.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
3.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer’s action
stamp.
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action
submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Copy owner on all submittals.
B.
General Submittal Procedure Requirements:
1.
Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a.
Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an
electronic Project record document file.
2.
Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will return two copies.
3.
Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise
indicated. Engineer will not return copies.
4.
Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed
by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
a.
Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted
certificates and certifications where indicated.
b.
Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications
where indicated.
C.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data
are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
2.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
3.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
b.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
c.
Standard color charts.
d.
Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
f.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
g.
Notation of coordination requirements.
h.
Availability and delivery time information.
013300 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
b.
Printed performance curves.
c.
Operational range diagrams.
d.
Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop
Drawings.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Submit Product Data in the following format:
a.
b.
Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will
return two copies.
D.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal based on Engineer’s digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the
following information, as applicable:
a.
Identification of products.
b.
Schedules.
c.
Compliance with specified standards.
d.
Notation of coordination requirements.
e.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f.
Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
3.
Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
a.
b.
Two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Engineer will return one copy.
c.
Three opaque copies of each submittal. Engineer will retain two copies; remainder
will be returned.
E.
Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary
indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the
following information in tabular form:
1.
Submit product schedule in the following format:
a.
b.
Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.
Engineer will return two copies.
F.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200
"Construction Progress Documentation."
G.
Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.
H.
Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with
requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."
I.
Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified
in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
J.
Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data."
013300 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
K.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact
information of engineers and owners, and other information specified.
L.
Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure
Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and
personnel certified.
M.
Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is
authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.
N.
Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of
manufacturing experience where required.
O.
Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
P.
Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q.
Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with
requirements in the Contract Documents.
R.
Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
S.
Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.
T.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements."
U.
Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.
V.
Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
W.
Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
X.
Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.
013300 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for
calculations. Include page numbers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with
other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections
and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700
"Closeout Procedures."
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
ENGINEER’S ACTION
3.2
A.
General: Engineer will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and
will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
C.
Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
for resubmittal without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
013300 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes special procedures for alteration work.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work
performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.
B.
Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.
C.
Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Engineer’s prebid selection of work to
be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.
D.
Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle
methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless
indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
E.
Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material
type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Engineer.
F.
Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original, or
as otherwise indicated.
G.
Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This
includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading
materials.
H.
Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is
the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either the same
or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
L.
Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated.
1.3
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their
contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to
Owner that may be encountered or uncovered during the Work, regardless of whether they
were previously documented, remain Owner's property.
013516 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.4
A.
Alteration Work Program: Submit 10 days before work begins.
B.
Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit 10 days before work begins.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a
"Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are
trained in lead-safe work practices.
B.
Alteration Work Program: Prepare a written plan for alteration work for whole Project, including
each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations. Show
compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other Sections.
Coordinate this whole-Project alteration work program with specific requirements of programs
required in other alteration work Sections.
1.
Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and noise-control
partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated with continuing on-site
operations and other known work in progress.
2.
Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning radii,
and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.
C.
Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including
placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-control devices during
each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and
requirements. Include fire-watch personnel's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire safety.
D.
Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.
1.6
STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS
A.
Salvaged Materials:
1.
Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is
indicated.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label
contents of containers.
3.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
B.
Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:
1.
Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated.
2.
Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during
handling. Label contents of containers.
3.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4.
Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and
miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.
C.
Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Engineer, items may be dismantled and
taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their
original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete.
013516 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from
moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.
1.
Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original
location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by
annotating the identifying marks.
2.
Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
3.
Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F or
more above the dew point.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROTECTION
A.
Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and
surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.
1.
Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being
protected.
2.
Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from
areas where alteration work is being performed.
3.
Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes.
4.
Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work.
5.
Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the
public or adjacent surfaces.
6.
Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural
elements.
7.
Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining.
8.
Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from other areas
of the building.
B.
Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:
1.
Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove
existing materials unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the
alteration work program.
C.
Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions.
Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials,
components, and vegetation.
D.
Utility and Communications Services:
1.
Notify Owner, Engineer, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or controlling
wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before commencing
operations.
2.
Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as
required for alteration work.
3.
Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect
against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to
existing utilities.
E.
Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is
functioning properly. Notify Engineer immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not
begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.
013516 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
F.
3.2
Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the
drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by
sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.
Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean
water to pass.
Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of work in an area, install roofing protection as indicated on
Drawings.
PROTECTION FROM FIRE
A.
General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:
1.
Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. Perform duties titled
"Owner's Responsibility for Fire Protection."
2.
Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and
chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.
a.
If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such
materials.
B.
Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures
while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including
welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where
open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are
anticipated:
1.
Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding or other
high-heat equipment. Use of open-flame equipment is not permitted. Notify Owner at
least 72 hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.
2.
As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the
building.
3.
Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where
flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a
combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.
4.
Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature
material from reaching surrounding combustible material.
5.
Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors,
holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.
6.
Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials,
station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed.
Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch
according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:
a.
Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms.
b.
Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from firewatch duties.
c.
Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are
not present.
d.
Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning
no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work in each area to detect hidden
or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained.
e.
Maintain fire-watch personnel at each area of Project site until two hours after
conclusion of daily work.
C.
Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for
disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in
each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fireextinguisher and blanket use.
013516 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
3.3
Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption
while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield
them temporarily with guards.
1.
Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused,
and when nearby work is complete.
PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS
A.
Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding
buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives.
B.
Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected
for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in
alteration work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and
UV resistant and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply
protective materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid
masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly
remove protective materials.
C.
Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.
D.
Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
E.
Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that
prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to
landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.
3.4
GENERAL ALTERATION WORK
A.
Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from
alterations.
B.
Notify Engineer of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from
environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from
structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.
1.
Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Engineer.
013516 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
2.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
3.
Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement
activities performed by Engineer.
C.
Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to
verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to
show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified
installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved
mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.
1.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify
performance characteristics.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
F.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of
the Work and for completed Work.
014000 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that
certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that
requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J.
Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully
completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;
being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum
quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply
with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate,
for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before
proceeding.
1.4
A.
Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,
submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before
starting work on the following systems:
1.
Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the
designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
2.
Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-forceresisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
1.5
REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other
Sections. Include the following:
1.
Date of issue.
2.
Project title and number.
3.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
014000 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections
specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1.
Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report.
2.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
3.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
4.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance
complies with requirements.
5.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice
in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services
of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for this Project.
F.
Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be
performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy
qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
1.
Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
014000 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
G.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
2.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
H.
Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer
who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
I.
Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the
following:
1.
Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a.
Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.
b.
Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing
results to prevent delaying the Work.
2.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection,
and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests
and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies
with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
J.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form
of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for the completed Work:
1.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Engineer.
2.
Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4.
Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
5.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
6.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
K.
Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified
in individual Specification Sections.
1.7
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged
to perform.
2.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
B.
Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the
Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.
014000 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in
writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to
observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of
substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the
Work, and submittal of written reports.
D.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
E.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
2.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
3.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
5.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
F.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
Access to the Work.
2.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
6.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
7.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
G.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
014000 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.8
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and
inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, as
indicated in Statement of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
B.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and in Statement
of Special Inspections attached to this Section, and as follows:
1.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
2.
Notifying Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in
the Work during performance of its services.
3.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Engineer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
4.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which
includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
5.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
6.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
Date test or inspection was conducted.
2.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.
4.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test
and inspection log for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
3.2
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched
areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible
as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in
Section 017300 "Execution."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
014000 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B.
"Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
C.
"Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."
D.
"Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,
in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,"
"scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E.
"Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control
performance of the Work.
F.
"Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations.
G.
"Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to
dimension, finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site.
H.
"Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I.
"Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which
Project is to be built.
1.2
INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A.
Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part
of the Contract Documents by reference.
B.
Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless
otherwise indicated.
C.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not
bound with the Contract Documents.
1.
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain
copies directly from publication source.
REFERENCES
014200 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.3
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's
"Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books'
"National Trade & Professional Associations of the United States."
B.
Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1.
AABC - Associated Air Balance Council; www.aabc.com.
2.
AAMA - American Architectural Manufacturers Association; www.aamanet.org.
3.
AAPFCO - Association of American Plant Food Control Officials; www.aapfco.org.
4.
AASHTO - American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
www.transportation.org.
5.
AATCC - American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists; www.aatcc.org.
6.
ABMA - American Bearing Manufacturers Association; www.americanbearings.org.
7.
ACI - American Concrete Institute; (Formerly: ACI International); www.concrete.org.
8.
ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association; www.concrete-pipe.org.
9.
AEIC - Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The); www.aeic.org.
10.
AF&PA - American Forest & Paper Association; www.afandpa.org.
11.
AGA - American Gas Association; www.aga.org.
12.
AHAM - Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers; www.aham.org.
13.
AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (The); www.ahrinet.org.
14.
AI - Asphalt Institute; www.asphaltinstitute.org.
15.
AIA - American Institute of Architects (The); www.aia.org.
16.
AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction; www.aisc.org.
17.
AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute; www.steel.org.
18.
AITC - American Institute of Timber Construction; www.aitc-glulam.org.
19.
AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; www.amca.org.
20.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute; www.ansi.org.
21.
AOSA - Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.; www.aosaseed.com.
22.
APA - APA - The Engineered Wood Association; www.apawood.org.
23.
APA - Architectural Precast Association; www.archprecast.org.
24.
API - American Petroleum Institute; www.api.org.
25.
ARI - Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
26.
ARI - American Refrigeration Institute; (See AHRI).
27.
ARMA - Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association; www.asphaltroofing.org.
28.
ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers; www.asce.org.
29.
ASCE/SEI - American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute; (See
ASCE).
30.
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers;
www.ashrae.org.
31.
ASME - ASME International; (American Society of Mechanical Engineers);
www.asme.org.
32.
ASSE - American Society of Safety Engineers (The); www.asse.org.
33.
ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering; www.asse-plumbing.org.
34.
ASTM - ASTM International; (American Society for Testing and Materials International);
www.astm.org.
35.
ATIS - Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions; www.atis.org.
36.
AWEA - American Wind Energy Association; www.awea.org.
37.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute; www.awinet.org.
38.
AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada;
www.awmac.com.
39.
AWPA - American Wood Protection Association; (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers'
Association); www.awpa.com.
REFERENCES
014200 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
81.
82.
83.
84.
85.
86.
87.
88.
REFERENCES
AWS - American Welding Society; www.aws.org.
AWWA - American Water Works Association; www.awwa.org.
BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; www.buildershardware.com.
BIA - Brick Industry Association (The); www.gobrick.com.
BICSI - BICSI, Inc.; www.bicsi.org.
BIFMA - BIFMA International; (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's
Association); www.bifma.com.
BISSC - Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee; www.bissc.org.
BWF - Badminton World Federation; (Formerly: International Badminton Federation);
www.bwfbadminton.org.
CDA - Copper Development Association; www.copper.org.
CEA - Canadian Electricity Association; www.electricity.ca.
CEA - Consumer Electronics Association; www.ce.org.
CFFA - Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc.; www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com.
CFSEI - Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute; www.cfsei.org.
CGA - Compressed Gas Association; www.cganet.com.
CIMA - Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.cellulose.org.
CISCA - Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association; www.cisca.org.
CISPI - Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; www.cispi.org.
CLFMI - Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; www.chainlinkinfo.org.
CPA - Composite Panel Association; www.pbmdf.com.
CRI - Carpet and Rug Institute (The); www.carpet-rug.org.
CRRC - Cool Roof Rating Council; www.coolroofs.org.
CRSI - Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; www.crsi.org.
CSA - Canadian Standards Association; www.csa.ca.
CSA - CSA International; (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services); www.csainternational.org.
CSI - Construction Specifications Institute (The); www.csinet.org.
CSSB - Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau; www.cedarbureau.org.
CTI - Cooling Technology Institute; (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute); www.cti.org.
CWC - Composite Wood Council; (See CPA).
DASMA - Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association; www.dasma.com.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute; www.dhi.org.
ECA - Electronic Components Association; (See ECIA).
ECAMA - Electronic Components Assemblies & Materials Association; (See ECIA).
ECIA - Electronic Components Industry Association; www.eciaonline.org.
EIA - Electronic Industries Alliance; (See TIA).
EIMA - EIFS Industry Members Association; www.eima.com.
EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.ejma.org.
ESD - ESD Association; (Electrostatic Discharge Association); www.esda.org.
ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology Association; (See PLASA).
EVO - Efficiency Valuation Organization; www.evo-world.org.
FIBA - F?d?ration Internationale de Basketball; (The International Basketball Federation);
www.fiba.com.
FIVB - F?d?ration Internationale de Volleyball; (The International Volleyball Federation);
www.fivb.org.
FM Approvals - FM Approvals LLC; www.fmglobal.com.
FM Global - FM Global; (Formerly: FMG - FM Global); www.fmglobal.com.
FRSA - Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc.;
www.floridaroof.com.
FSA - Fluid Sealing Association; www.fluidsealing.com.
FSC - Forest Stewardship Council U.S.; www.fscus.org.
GA - Gypsum Association; www.gypsum.org.
GANA - Glass Association of North America; www.glasswebsite.com.
GS - Green Seal; www.greenseal.org.
014200 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
118.
119.
120.
121.
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
REFERENCES
HI - Hydraulic Institute; www.pumps.org.
HI/GAMA - Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association; (See AHRI).
HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association; (See NAAMM).
HPVA - Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association; www.hpva.org.
HPW - H. P. White Laboratory, Inc.; www.hpwhite.com.
IAPSC - International Association of Professional Security Consultants; www.iapsc.org.
IAS - International Accreditation Service; www.iasonline.org.
IAS - International Approval Services; (See CSA).
ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials; (See ICC).
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.; www.icea.net.
ICPA - International Cast Polymer Alliance; www.icpa-hq.org.
ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc.; www.icri.org.
IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission; www.iec.ch.
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The); www.ieee.org.
IES - Illuminating Engineering Society; (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America); www.ies.org.
IESNA - Illuminating Engineering Society of North America; (See IES).
IEST - Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology; www.iest.org.
IGMA - Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; www.igmaonline.org.
IGSHPA - International Ground Source Heat Pump Association; www.igshpa.okstate.edu.
ILI - Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc.; www.iliai.com.
Intertek - Intertek Group; (Formerly: ETL SEMCO; Intertek Testing Service NA);
www.intertek.com.
ISA - International Society of Automation (The); (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems, and
Automation Society); www.isa.org.
ISAS - Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (The); (See ISA).
ISFA - International Surface Fabricators Association; (Formerly: International Solid
Surface Fabricators Association); www.isfanow.org.
ISO - International Organization for Standardization; www.iso.org.
ISSFA - International Solid Surface Fabricators Association; (See ISFA).
ITU - International Telecommunication Union; www.itu.int/home.
KCMA - Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association; www.kcma.org.
LMA - Laminating Materials Association; (See CPA).
LPI - Lightning Protection Institute; www.lightning.org.
MBMA - Metal Building Manufacturers Association; www.mbma.com.
MCA - Metal Construction Association; www.metalconstruction.org.
MFMA - Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.maplefloor.org.
MFMA - Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.metalframingmfg.org.
MHIA - Material Handling Industry of America; www.mhia.org.
MIA - Marble Institute of America; www.marble-institute.com.
MMPA - Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (Formerly: Wood Moulding &
Millwork Producers Association); www.wmmpa.com.
MPI - Master Painters Institute; www.paintinfo.com.
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.;
www.mss-hq.org.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; www.naamm.org.
NACE - NACE International; (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International);
www.nace.org.
NADCA - National Air Duct Cleaners Association; www.nadca.com.
NAIMA - North American Insulation Manufacturers Association; www.naima.org.
NBGQA - National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc.; www.nbgqa.com.
NCAA - National Collegiate Athletic Association (The); www.ncaa.org.
NCMA - National Concrete Masonry Association; www.ncma.org.
NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau; www.nebb.org.
014200 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
137.
138.
139.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
158.
159.
160.
161.
162.
163.
164.
165.
166.
167.
168.
169.
170.
171.
172.
173.
174.
175.
176.
177.
178.
179.
180.
181.
182.
183.
184.
185.
REFERENCES
NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association; www.necanet.org.
NeLMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association; www.nelma.org.
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association; www.nema.org.
NETA - InterNational Electrical Testing Association; www.netaworld.org.
NFHS - National Federation of State High School Associations; www.nfhs.org.
NFPA - NFPA; (National Fire Protection Association); www.nfpa.org.
NFPA - NFPA International; (See NFPA).
NFRC - National Fenestration Rating Council; www.nfrc.org.
NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association; www.nhla.com.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority; www.nlga.org.
NOFMA - National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association; (See NWFA).
NOMMA - National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association; www.nomma.org.
NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association; www.nrca.net.
NRMCA - National Ready Mixed Concrete Association; www.nrmca.org.
NSF - NSF International; (National Sanitation Foundation International); www.nsf.org.
NSPE - National Society of Professional Engineers; www.nspe.org.
NSSGA - National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association; www.nssga.org.
NTMA - National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The); www.ntma.com.
NWFA - National Wood Flooring Association; www.nwfa.org.
PCI - Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute; www.pci.org.
PDI - Plumbing & Drainage Institute; www.pdionline.org.
PLASA - PLASA; (Formerly: ESTA - Entertainment Services and Technology
Association); www.plasa.org.
RCSC - Research Council on Structural Connections; www.boltcouncil.org.
RFCI - Resilient Floor Covering Institute; www.rfci.com.
RIS - Redwood Inspection Service; www.redwoodinspection.com.
SAE - SAE International; (Society of Automotive Engineers); www.sae.org.
SCTE - Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; www.scte.org.
SDI - Steel Deck Institute; www.sdi.org.
SDI - Steel Door Institute; www.steeldoor.org.
SEFA - Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association; www.sefalabs.com.
SEI/ASCE - Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers; (See
ASCE).
SIA - Security Industry Association; www.siaonline.org.
SJI - Steel Joist Institute; www.steeljoist.org.
SMA - Screen Manufacturers Association; www.smainfo.org.
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association;
www.smacna.org.
SMPTE - Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers; www.smpte.org.
SPFA - Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance; www.sprayfoam.org.
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; www.spib.org.
SPRI - Single Ply Roofing Industry; www.spri.org.
SRCC - Solar Rating and Certification Corporation; www.solar-rating.org.
SSINA - Specialty Steel Industry of North America; www.ssina.com.
SSPC - SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings; www.sspc.org.
STI - Steel Tank Institute; www.steeltank.com.
SWI - Steel Window Institute; www.steelwindows.com.
SWPA - Submersible Wastewater Pump Association; www.swpa.org.
TCA - Tilt-Up Concrete Association; www.tilt-up.org.
TCNA - Tile Council of North America, Inc.; (Formerly: Tile Council of America);
www.tileusa.com.
TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc.; www.tema.org.
TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association; (Formerly: TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance);
www.tiaonline.org.
014200 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
186. TIA/EIA - Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance; (See
TIA).
187. TMS - The Masonry Society; www.masonrysociety.org.
188. TPI - Truss Plate Institute; www.tpinst.org.
189. TPI - Turfgrass Producers International; www.turfgrasssod.org.
190. TRI - Tile Roofing Institute; (Formerly: National Tile Roofing Manufacturing Association);
www.tileroofing.org.
191. UBC - Uniform Building Code; (See ICC).
192. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; www.ul.com.
193. UNI - Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association; www.uni-bell.org.
194. USAV - USA Volleyball; www.usavolleyball.org.
195. USGBC - U.S. Green Building Council; www.usgbc.org.
196. USITT - United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc.; www.usitt.org.
197. WASTEC - Waste Equipment Technology Association; www.wastec.org.
198. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau; www.wclib.org.
199. WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association; www.wcmanet.org.
200. WDMA - Window & Door Manufacturers Association; www.wdma.com.
201. WI - Woodwork Institute; (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California);
www.wicnet.org.
202. WMMPA - Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association; (See MMPA).
203. WSRCA - Western States Roofing Contractors Association; www.wsrca.com.
204. WPA - Western Wood Products Association; www.wwpa.org.
C.
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.
1.
DIN - Deutsches Institut f?r Normung e.V.; www.din.de.
2.
IAPMO - International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials; www.iapmo.org.
3.
ICC - International Code Council; www.iccsafe.org.
4.
ICC-ES - ICC Evaluation Service, LLC; www.icc-es.org.
D.
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the
following list.
1.
COE - Army Corps of Engineers; www.usace.army.mil.
2.
CPSC - Consumer Product Safety Commission; www.cpsc.gov.
3.
DOC - Department of Commerce; National Institute of Standards and Technology;
www.nist.gov.
4.
DOD - Department of Defense; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
5.
DOE - Department of Energy; www.energy.gov.
6.
EPA - Environmental Protection Agency; www.epa.gov.
7.
FAA - Federal Aviation Administration; www.faa.gov.
8.
FG - Federal Government Publications; www.gpo.gov.
9.
GSA - General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
10.
HUD - Department of Housing and Urban Development; www.hud.gov.
11.
LBL - Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory; Environmental Energy Technologies
Division; http://eetd.lbl.gov.
12.
OSHA - Occupational Safety & Health Administration; www.osha.gov.
13.
SD - Department of State; www.state.gov.
14.
TRB - Transportation Research Board; National Cooperative Highway Research
Program; www.trb.org.
15.
USDA - Department of Agriculture; Agriculture Research Service; U.S. Salinity
Laboratory; www.ars.usda.gov.
16.
USDA - Department of Agriculture; Rural Utilities Service; www.usda.gov.
17.
USDJ - Department of Justice; Office of Justice Programs; National Institute of Justice;
www.ojp.usdoj.gov.
REFERENCES
014200 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
18.
19.
USP - U.S. Pharmacopeia; www.usp.org.
USPS - United States Postal Service; www.usps.com.
E.
Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and
regulations in the following list.
1.
CFR - Code of Federal Regulations; Available from Government Printing Office;
www.gpo.gov/fdsys.
2.
DOD - Department of Defense; Military Specifications and Standards; Available from
Department of Defense Single Stock Point; http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
3.
DSCC - Defense Supply Center Columbus; (See FS).
4.
FED-STD - Federal Standard; (See FS).
5.
FS - Federal Specification; Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point;
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil.
a.
Available from Defense Standardization Program; www.dsp.dla.mil.
b.
Available from General Services Administration; www.gsa.gov.
c.
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building Design
Guide; www.wbdg.org/ccb.
6.
MILSPEC - Military Specification and Standards; (See DOD).
7.
USAB - United States Access Board; www.access-board.gov.
8.
USATBCB - U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; (See
USAB).
F.
State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following
list.
1.
CBHF; State of California; Department of Consumer Affairs; Bureau of Electronic
Appliance and Repair, Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation; www.bearhfti.ca.gov.
2.
CCR; California Code of Regulations; Office of Administrative Law; California Title 24
Energy Code; www.calregs.com.
3.
CDHS; California Department of Health Services; (See CDPH).
4.
CDPH; California Department of Public Health; Indoor Air Quality Program; www.caliaq.org.
5.
CPUC; California Public Utilities Commission; www.cpuc.ca.gov.
6.
SCAQMD; South Coast Air Quality Management District; www.aqmd.gov.
7.
TFS; Texas Forest Service; Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry;
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu.
REFERENCES
014200 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in
Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; and comparable products.
B.
1.
Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2.
New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or
facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new
products.
3.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or
exceed those of specified product.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's
product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or
model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics
for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the
specification.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product.
Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request.
Engineer will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product
request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional
information or documentation, whichever is later.
a.
Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."
b.
Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a
comparable product request within time allocated.
B.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.
016000 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products
for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if
previously selected products were also options.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
2.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
3.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
4.
Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and
to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.
C.
Storage:
1.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
2.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
3.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
4.
Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
5.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
6.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
1.6
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2.
Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3.
Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for
submitting special warranties.
016000 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are
undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.
1.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make
selection.
5.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
B.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for
Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
2.
Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
3.
Products:
a.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers
and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be
considered.
b.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed
product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.
4.
Manufacturers:
a.
Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with
requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience
will not be considered.
b.
Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers,
provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed
manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's
product.
5.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product
indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or
indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.
Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other
characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in
"Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the
other named manufacturers.
016000 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample", provide
a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer’s decision
will be final on whether a proposed product matches.
1.
If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other
specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution
Procedures" for proposal of product.
D.
Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by
Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with
requirements. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's
product line that includes both standard and premium items.
2.2
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Conditions for Consideration: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for comparable
product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these
requirements:
1.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
2.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
3.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
4.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of aengineers and owners, if requested.
5.
Samples, if requested.
016000 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,
but not limited to, the following:
1.
Substantial Completion procedures.
2.
Final completion procedures.
3.
Warranties.
4.
Final cleaning.
5.
Repair of the Work.
B.
1.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
2.
Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
3.
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's
personnel.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
1.4
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in
other Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and
corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why
the Work is incomplete.
B.
Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction
permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.
Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction
photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and
similar final record information.
Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,
workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar
documents.
Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,
spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by
Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
a.
Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item
and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer’s
signature for receipt of submittals.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
C.
Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior
to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that
are incomplete at time of request.
1.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
2.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3.
Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4.
Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.
5.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
7.
Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency
responders.
8.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
9.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
10.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
D.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a
minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and
tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after
inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items
identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
2.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.
1.6
FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,
complete the following:
1.
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment
Procedures."
2.
Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer’s Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.7
and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of
request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify
Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
1.8
Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if
necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order.
2.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3.
Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a.
MS Excel electronic file. Engineer will return annotated copy.
b.
PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated copy.
c.
Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return two copies.
SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A.
Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
2.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
3.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
4.
Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty
and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling
navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.
C.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
1.
Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not
applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum
allowable VOC levels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with
local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:
a.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
b.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
c.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
d.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
e.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
f.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
g.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
i.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.
j.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
l.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
m.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
n.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
p.
C.
3.2
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities
and Controls." Prepare written report.
REPAIR OF THE WORK
A.
Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective
parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly
adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,
provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.
Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified
condition.
1.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.
2.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
a.
Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels
and identification.
3.
Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede
operation or reduce longevity.
4.
Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and
noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for
new fixtures.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
017700 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
2.
Emergency manuals.
3.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
4.
Product maintenance manuals.
5.
Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual
Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed
manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.
1.
Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are
acceptable.
2.
Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions
and field conditions.
B.
Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:
1.
PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file.
Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer.
a.
Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable
item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance
directory.
b.
Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.
Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose
title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Engineer will return two copies.
C.
Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.
Engineer will return copy with comments.
1.
Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of
each corrected manual within 5 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to
commencing demonstration and training.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to
desired information.
B.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for
each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a
system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
Title page.
017823 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
C.
Title Page: Include the following information:
1.
Subject matter included in manual.
2.
Name and address of Project.
3.
Name and address of Owner.
4.
Date of submittal.
5.
Name and contact information for Contractor.
6.
Name and contact information for Construction Manager.
7.
Name and contact information for Engineer.
8.
Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.
9.
Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the
systems contained in the manuals.
10.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
D.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to
the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
E.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
F.
Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic
PDF file for each manual type required.
1.
Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where
scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable
file size.
2.
File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file
names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names
used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and
subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite
manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names
in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark
panel on opening file.
G.
Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary
to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve
on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents.
Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
2.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.
Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
3.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.
4.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
017823 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
2.2
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual
Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and
equipment indicated on Contract Documents.
2.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
3.
Operating standards.
4.
Operating procedures.
5.
Operating logs.
6.
Wiring diagrams.
7.
Control diagrams.
8.
Piped system diagrams.
9.
Precautions against improper use.
10.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
B.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract
Documents.
2.
Manufacturer's name.
3.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
4.
Equipment function.
5.
Operating characteristics.
6.
Limiting conditions.
7.
Performance curves.
8.
Engineering data and tests.
9.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Startup procedures.
2.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
3.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
4.
Regulation and control procedures.
5.
Instructions on stopping.
6.
Normal shutdown instructions.
7.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
8.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
9.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.3
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include
source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
017823 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
Product name and model number.
2.
Manufacturer's name.
3.
Color, pattern, and texture.
4.
Material and chemical composition.
5.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
Inspection procedures.
2.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
2.4
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance
service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service
agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.
2.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
3.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
4.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
D.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
Test and inspection instructions.
2.
Troubleshooting guide.
3.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
4.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
5.
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
6.
Demonstration and training video recording, if available.
017823 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
E.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies
indicated.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
D.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only
sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or
component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,
identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data
applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
E.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
F.
Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and
maintenance documentation.
017823 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,
including the following:
1.
Record Drawings.
2.
Record Specifications.
3.
Record Product Data.
B.
1.
Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
1.2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop
Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.
1.
Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for
preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.
a.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
b.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.
c.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
2.
Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use
personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record
prints.
3.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
4.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record
documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,
dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record
documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
017839 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,
including the following:
1.
Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
2.
Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.
3.
Demonstration and training video recordings.
4.
Provide minimum eight (8) hours of instruction and training.
A.
1.3
Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,
including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction
time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for
each training module.
1.
Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and
training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording
of live instructional module.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance
personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project,
and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning
performance.
B.
Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with
requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and
maintenance procedures and training.
C.
Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures
related to demonstration and training.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to
minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.
B.
Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data
has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.
017900 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSTRUCTION PROGRAM
A.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections.
B.
Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a
description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each
module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or
component:
1.
Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:
a.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
b.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
c.
Operating standards.
d.
Regulatory requirements.
e.
Equipment function.
f.
g.
h.
Performance curves.
2.
Documentation: Review the following items in detail:
a.
Emergency manuals.
b.
Operations manuals.
c.
Maintenance manuals.
d.
Project record documents.
e.
Identification systems.
f.
Warranties and bonds.
g.
Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.
3.
Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.
b.
c.
Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.
d.
Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.
e.
Sequences for electric or electronic systems.
f.
4.
Operations: Include the following, as applicable:
a.
Startup procedures.
b.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
c.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
d.
Regulation and control procedures.
e.
Control sequences.
f.
Safety procedures.
g.
h.
Normal shutdown instructions.
i.
Operating procedures for emergencies.
j.
Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.
k.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
l.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
m.
5.
Adjustments: Include the following:
a.
Alignments.
b.
Checking adjustments.
c.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
d.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
017900 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
8.
Troubleshooting: Include the following:
a.
Diagnostic instructions.
b.
Test and inspection procedures.
Maintenance: Include the following:
a.
Inspection procedures.
b.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
c.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
d.
Procedures for routine cleaning
e.
Procedures for preventive maintenance.
f.
Procedures for routine maintenance.
g.
Instruction on use of special tools.
Repairs: Include the following:
a.
Diagnosis instructions.
b.
Repair instructions.
c.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly
instructions.
d.
Instructions for identifying parts and components.
e.
Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training
module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with
requirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."
INSTRUCTION
A.
Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to
coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of
participants, instruction times, and location.
B.
Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.
1.
Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.
2.
Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.
3.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.
C.
Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.
1.
Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
D.
Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully
operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation
and maintenance data submittals.
E.
Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's
mastery of module by use of an oral performance-based test.
017900 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 2100
03 3111
03 3913
REINFORCING STEEL
NORMAL WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
WATER CONCRETE CURING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 3 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 03 2100 - REINFORCING STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install concrete reinforcing steel as described in Contract Documents.
REFERENCES
A.
Association Publications:
1. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections.
th
Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15 St.,
NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org).
2. International Code Council (IBC):
a. IBC Chapter 17, ‘Structural Tests and Special Inspections’.
B.
Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing):
1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented.
Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly
perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration
parameters according to their scopes of accreditation.
2. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided
for by Owner.
3. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for
by Contractor.
4. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or
placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with
approved construction documents and referenced standards. An “inspection” is not required by
code provisions but may be required by contract documents. “Special inspection” is required by
code provisions and by contract documents.
a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of work requiring inspection by approved
inspector who is present in area where the work is being performed.
b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of work requiring inspection by
approved inspector who is present in area where the work has been or is being performed
and at completion of the work.
5. Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered
design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant
construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for
performing inspections or special inspections.
6. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
7. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct
product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance
and compliance with industry standards.
8. Service Provider: An agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections.
9. Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant,
mill, factory, or shop.
10. Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for
project.
11. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
Reinforcing Steel
-1-
03 2100
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
12. Testing Agency Laboratory: An agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to
determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship.
13. Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building
materials and workmanship. “Test” is not required by code provisions but may be required by
contract documents. “Special test” is required by code provisions and by contract documents.
14. Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product,
service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.
C.
1.3
1.4
Reference Standards:
1. American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 318-08, ‘Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.’
b. ACI SP-04, ‘ACI Detailing Manual’ 2004 edition.
2. ASTM International:
a. ASTM A615 / A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.'
3. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Reinforcing Steel testing):
a. ASTM A615 / A615M-09b, ‘Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.’
4. ASTM International (Following are specifically referenced for Testing Agencies):
a. ASTM E329-09: ‘Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection
and/or Testing.’
b. ASTM E543-09, ‘Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.’
c. ASTM E1212-09, ‘Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive
Testing Agencies.’
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Pre-Installation Conferences:
1. Participate in pre-installation conference.
2. In addition to agenda items specified, review following:
a. Installation scheduling and reinforcing placement.
b. Review Section for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities
and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section.
1) Review frequency of testing and inspections.
B.
Scheduling:
1. Notify Testing Agency and Engineer as directed.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Reinforcing placement drawings.
B.
Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Mill certificates for mill tests for reinforcing in accordance with ASTM A615/A615M.
1) Mill test is to be approved before fabrication begins.
C.
Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 7800:
a. Record Documentation:
1) Testing and Inspection Reports:
a) Testing Agency Inspection Reports of reinforcing steel.
Reinforcing Steel
-2-
03 2100
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Testing and Inspection.
1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection for inspection of reinforcing steel.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Deliver bars separated by size and tagged with manufacturer's heat or test identification number.
2. Reinforcing steel shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other coating at time of delivery
and placing.
B.
Storage And Handling Requirements:
1. Properly protect rebar on site after delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
A.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
2.3
Reinforcing Steel:
1. Reinforcing bars shall have grade identification marks and conform to ASTM A615/A615M.
a. Grade 60 minimum. Field bent dowels may be Grade 40.
b. Bars shall be deformed type.
2. Bars shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other bond-reducing coatings.
3. Bars shall be free of heavy rust scales and flakes, or other bond-reducing coatings.
Bar Supports:
1. Type Two Acceptable Products:
a. Concrete 'dobies' or blocks wired to reinforcing.
b. Manufactured chairs with 4 sq in bearing surface on sub-grade, or other feature to prevent
chair from being pushed into sub-grade or damaging vapor retarder under slabs on grade.
c. Equals as approved by Architect before installation. See Section 01 6200.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate reinforcing steel according to ACI SP-04, 'ACI Detailing Manual, and details on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Site Tolerances:
1. Provide following minimum concrete cover for reinforcement (ACI 318):
a. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
1) Slabs, walls, and joists:
a) No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1-1/2 inches.
b) No. 11 bars and smaller: 3/4 inches.
B.
Bend bars cold.
C.
Accurately place and support with chairs, bar supports, spacers, or hangers as recommended by 'ACI
Detailing Manual,' 2004 edition, except slab on grade work. Support bars in slabs on grade and
Reinforcing Steel
-3-
03 2100
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
footings with specified bar supports around perimeter and at 4-1/2 feet on center each way maximum
to maintain specified concrete cover. Install bar supports at bar intersections.
3.2
D.
Dowel vertical reinforcement for formed concrete columns or walls out of footing or structure below
with rebar of same size and spacing required above.
E.
Securely anchor and tie reinforcing bars and dowels before placing concrete. Set wire ties with ends
directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
F.
Avoid splices of reinforcing bars at points of maximum stress. Lap bars 40 bar diameters minimum
unless dimensioned otherwise on Drawings. Run steel reinforcing bars continuous through cold joints.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Reinforcing Steel:
a. Inspections are not required and will be performed at discretion of Architect.
b. Inspections, if performed, will include following:
1) Periodic inspection of reinforcement steel and placement.
a) Inspect that all steel bars must be positively identified as to heat number and mill
analysis.
b) All steel bars that cannot be identified by heat number and mill analysis shall have
one tensile and one bend test made for each 2 metric tons or fraction thereof, of
each size and kind of reinforcing steel.
END OF SECTION
Reinforcing Steel
-4-
03 2100
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 03 3111 - NORMAL WEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install Project concrete work as described in Contract Documents.
2. Quality of concrete used on Project but furnished under other Sections.
B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section:
1. Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, and fastening devices for other work, including those for bases
only for Mechanical and Electrical.
2. Concrete accessories.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
Association Publications:
1. American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, MI www.concrete.org. Abstracts of ACI
Periodicals and Publications.
a. ACI 224R-01, Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures (Reapproved 2008).
b. ACI 224.1R-07, Causes, Evaluation, and Repair of Cracks in Concrete Structures (March 1,
2007).
c. ACI 224.2R-92: Cracking of Concrete Members in Direct Tension (Reapproved 2004)
d. ACI 224.3R-95, Joints in Concrete Construction (Reapproved 2008).
e. ACI 302.1R-04: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction (March 23, 2004).
f.
ACI 302.2R-06, ‘Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring
Materials (August 15, 2006).
g. ACI CP-1-08, ‘Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technician
– Grade 1 (Jan 01, 2008).
h. ACI Flatwork Finisher Certification Program.
i.
ACI Field Technician Certification Program.
j.
SP-204-01, ‘Design and Construction Practices to Mitigate Cracking.’
k. SP-231R-10, ‘Report on Early-Age Cracking: Causes, Measurement and Mitigation.’
2. Council of American Structural Engineers. CASE Form 101: Statement of Special Inspections.
th
Washington, DC: CASE, 2001. (c/o American Council of Engineering Companies, 1015 15 St.,
NW, Washington, DC 20005; 202-347-7474; www.acec.org).
3. International Code Council (IBC):
a. IBC Chapter 17, ‘Structural Tests and Special Inspections’.
B.
Definitions (Following are specifically referenced for testing):
1. Accreditation: Process in which certification of competency, authority, or credibility is presented.
Verify that laboratories have an appropriate quality management system and can properly
perform certain test methods (e.g., ANSI, ASTM, and ISO test methods) and calibration
parameters according to their scopes of accreditation.
2. Approved: To authorize, endorse, validate, confirm, or agree to.
3. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of following:
blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and
silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
4. Field Quality Assurance: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided
for by Owner.
5. Field Quality Control: Testing, Inspections, Special Testing and Special Inspections provided for
by Contractor.
6. Inspection/Special Inspection: Inspection of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or
placement of components and connections requiring special expertise to ensure compliance with
approved construction documents and referenced standards. “Inspection” is not required by code
Normal Weight Structural Concrete
-1-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
provisions but may be required by Contract Documents. “Special inspection” is required by code
provisions and by Contract Documents.
a. Inspection-Continuous: Full-time observation of the Work requiring inspection by approved
inspector who is present in area where the Work is being performed.
b. Inspection-Periodic: Part-time or intermittent observation of the Work requiring inspection by
approved inspector who is present in area where the Work has been or is being performed
and at completion of the Work.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,
Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform particular construction operation, including
installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify
selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated,
qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation.
They are not samples. Approved mockups establish standard by which the Work will
be judged.
Observation: Visual observation of building / site elements or structural system by registered
design professional for general conformance to approved construction documents at significant
construction stages and at completion. Observation does not include or waive responsibility for
performing inspections or special inspections.
Owner’s Representative: Owner’s Designated Representative (Project Manager or Facilities
Manager) whom will have express authority to bind Owner with respect to all matters requiring
Owner’s approval or authorization.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with
specified criteria.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by testing agency qualified to conduct
product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance
and compliance with industry standards.
Service Provider: Agency or firm qualified to perform required tests and inspections.
Source Quality Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, i.e., plant,
mill, factory, or shop.
Special Inspector: Certified individual or firm that implements special inspection program for
project.
Testing Agency: Entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
Testing Agency Laboratory: Agency or firm qualified to perform field and laboratory tests to
determine characteristics and quality of materials and workmanship.
Test/Special Test: Field or laboratory tests to determine characteristics and quality of building
materials and workmanship. “Test” is not required by code provisions but may be required by
Contract Documents. “Special test” is required by code provisions and by Contract Documents.
Verification: Act of reviewing, inspecting, testing, etc. to establish and document that product,
service, or system meets regulatory, standard, or specification requirements.
C. Reference Standards:
1. American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials:
a. AASHTO M 153-06, ‘Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.’
b. AASHTO M 213-01 (2010), ‘Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types)’.
2. American Concrete Institute:
a. ACI 117-06: ‘Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials and
Commentary.’
b. ACI 301-05, ‘Specification for Structural Concrete.’
c. ACI 302.2R-06, ‘Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring
Materials.
d. ACI 318-08, ‘Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.’
-2-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
ASTM International:
a. ASTM A615/A615M-09b, 'Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.'
b. ASTM C31/C31M-10, ‘Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field.’
c. ASTM C33/C33M-08, ‘Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.’
d. ASTM C39/C39M-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens.’
e. ASTM C42/C42M-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and
Sawed Beams of Concrete.’
f.
ASTM C94/C94M-10, 'Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.'
g. ASTM C140-10, ‘Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
and Related Units.’
h. ASTM C143/C143M-10, 'Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.'
i.
ASTM C150/C150M-09, 'Standard Specification for Portland Cement.'
j.
ASTM C171-07, ‘Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.’
k. ASTM C172/C172M-10, ‘Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.’
l.
ASTM C173/C173M-10b, ‘Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method.’
m. ASTM C192/C192M-07, ’Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Laboratory.’
n. ASTM C231/C231M-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method.’
o. ASTM C260-06, 'Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.'
p. ASTM C494/C494M-10a, 'Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
q. ASTM C567-05a, ‘Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural Lightweight
Concrete.’
r.
ASTM C595/C595M-10, ‘Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.’
s. ASTM C597-09, ‘Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity Through Concrete.’
t.
ASTM C618-08a, 'Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.'
u. ASTM C803/C803M-03(2010), ‘Standard Test Method for Penetration Resistance of
Hardened Concrete.’
v. ASTM C805/C805M-08, ‘Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened
Concrete.’
w. ASTM C989-09a, ‘Standard Specification for Slag Cement for use in Concrete and Mortars.’
x. ASTM C1077-10c, 'Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.'
y.
ASTM C1116/C1116M-10, ‘Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Concrete.’
z.
ASTM C1157/C1157M-10, ‘Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement.’
aa. ASTM C1399/C1399M-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Obtaining Average Residual-Strength
of Fiber-Reinforced Concrete.’
bb. ASTM C1688/C1688M-08, ‘Standard Test Method for Density and Void Content of Freshly
Mixed Pervious Concrete’.
cc. ASTM D1751-04(2008), 'Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types).'
dd. ASTM D1752-04a(2008), ‘Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and
Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.’
ee. ASTM D3666-09a, ‘Standard Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing
and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials.’
ff. ASTM E329-09: ‘Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection
and/or Testing.’
gg. ASTM E543-09, ‘Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing.’
hh. ASTM E1212-09, ‘Standard Practice for Quality Management Systems for Nondestructive
Testing Agencies.’
-3-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
ASTM F710-08, ‘Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient
Flooring.
jj. ASTM F1869-10, ‘Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of
Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.’
kk. ASTM F2170-09, ‘Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete
Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.’
Corps of Engineers:
a. CRD-C 508 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction.
ii.
4.
1.3
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Schedule pre-installation conference prior to placing of footings, installation of foundation forms
and reinforcing steel, and installation of anchors, dowels, inserts, and block outs in foundation
walls and slabs.
2. In addition to agenda items specified, review following:
a. Installation scheduling, coordination, placement of concrete, and placement of items
installed in and under floor slab.
b. Review requirements for preparation of subgrade.
c. Review aggregate base requirements.
d. Review formwork requirements.
e. Review approved mix design requirements and use of admixtures.
f.
Review placement, finishing, and curing of concrete including cold and hot weather
requirements.
g. Review jointing requirements and joint layout.
h. Review concrete slab tolerances and corrective measures if tolerances not met.
i.
Review safety issues.
j.
Require ready mix supplier to work with HVSMF supplier regarding mix designs and
batching procedures and with pumping subcontractor if mix is pumped.
1) Flat work subcontractor (placing and finishing), pumper subcontractor, superintendant
are to be at Pre-Installation Conference to discuss concrete mix design, placing of
concrete, finishing of concrete and curing of concrete.
2) Review Special Procedure Submittal.
k. Review Section for Testing and Inspection administrative requirements and responsibilities
and Field Quality Control tests and inspections required of this section.
1) Review frequency of testing and inspections.
B. Scheduling:
1. Notify Testing Agency and Architect 24 hours minimum before placing concrete.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals:
1. Shop Drawings:
a. Show dimensioned locations of anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns.
B. Informational Submittals:
1. Certificates:
a. Installers:
1) Certification for National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).
2) Certification for ACI-certified Flatwork Finishers and Technicians.
2. Design Data:
a. Mix Design:
1) Furnish proposed mix design to Architect for review prior to commencement of Work.
-4-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a)
3.
Include density (unit weight) and void content determined per ASTM
C1688/C1688M for fresh mixed properties and per ASTM C140 for hardened
concrete properties.
b) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and
justification for proposed use.
b. Ready-Mix Supplier:
1) Require mix plant to furnish delivery ticket for each batch of concrete. Keep delivery
tickets at job-site for use of Owner or his representatives. Tickets shall show following:
a) Name of ready-mix batch plant.
b) Serial number of ticket.
c) Date and truck number.
d) Name of Contractor.
e) Name and location of Project.
f)
Specific class or designation of concrete conforming to that used in Contract
Documents.
g) Amount of concrete.
h) Amount and type of cement.
i)
Total water content allowed by mix design.
j)
Amount of water added at plant.
k) Sizes and weights of sand and aggregate.
l)
Time loaded.
m) Type, name, manufacturer, and amount of admixtures used.
n) Design Data.
2) Provide certificates with supporting testing reports verifying compliance with Contract
Document requirements and that materials provided are from single source for
following:
a) Cement.
b) Aggregate.
c) Fly Ash.
Source Quality Control Submittals:
a. Concrete mix design: Submit mix designs to meet following requirements:
1) Proportions:
a) Mix Type A:
(1) 3000 psi minimum at 28 days.
(2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50 by weight.
b) Mix Type B:
(2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 to 0.50 maximum by weight.
c) Mix Type C:
d) Mix Type D (also to be used for exterior concrete subject to freeze thaw
conditions):
(2) Water / Cement Ratio: 0.45 maximum by weight.
e) Mix Type E:
(3) Cementitious material per cubic yard of concrete: 540 lbs.
(4) High Volume Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement mix amounts:
(a) Forta Ferro by FORTA Corporation: 7 1/2 lbs per cubic yard, 2 1/4
inches fiber length.
(b) MasterFiber MAC470 by BASF: 7 1/2 lbs per cubic yard, 1.85 inches
fiber length.
(c) Strux 90/40 by Grace: 7 1/2 lbs per cubic yard 1.55 inches fiber length.
(d) Tuf Strand SF by Euclid: 7 1/2 lbs per cubic yard 2 inches fiber length.
-5-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
(5)
4.
C.
Use low dose of polycarboxylate superplasiticizer admixture of bout 22 oz
per sq yd of concrete (4 ounces per 100 pounds of cement).
f)
Mix Type F - Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC). Contractor’s option to use this
mix type:
(1) Self-consolidating concrete may be used for all architectural concrete, heavily reinforced concrete, concrete for structural repairs, and other members as
described in contract documents.
(2) All self-consolidating concrete shall contain high-range water-reducing
admixture and viscosity-modifying admixture where required.
(3) Minimum flow of 20 inches – 30 inches or as required by successful test
placement.
(4) Workability, pumpability, finishability, and setting time of mix design shall be
verified with successful test placement onsite.
(5) Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA) shall be used to optimize viscosity of
Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC) at dosage rates per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
g) Air Entrainment: 6 percent, plus or minus 1-1/2 percent for Exterior Concrete and
foundation walls exposed to freeze thaw conditions.
h) Do not add water any time during mixing cycle above amount required to meet
specified water / cement ratio. No reduction in amount of cementitious material is
allowed.
2) Slump:
a) 4 inch slump maximum before addition of high range water reducer.
b) 8 inch slump maximum with use of high range water reducer.
3) Admixtures:
a) Mix design shall show proposed admixture, amount, usage instructions, and
justification for proposed use. Do not use any admixture without Architect's written
approval.
b) Mineral: An amount of specified fly ash not to exceed 20 percent of weight of
cement may be substituted for cement. If substituted, consider fly ash with cement
in determining amount of water necessary to provide specified water / cement
ratio.
c) Chemical: Specified accelerator or retarder may be used if necessary to meet
environmental conditions.
Special Procedure Submittals:
a. High Volume Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement:
1) Construction guidelines by Manufacturer.
Closeout Submittals:
1. Include following in Operations And Maintenance Manual:
a. Record Documentation:
1) Pour Reports:
a) Provide report that records following information:
b) Date and time of start of pour, Date and time of end of pour, and Date and time of
end of finishing procedures.
c) Temperature at start of pour, Temperature at end of Pour, and Maximum
temperature during performance of finishing procedures.
d) Wind speed at start of pour, Wind speed at end of pour, and Maximum wind speed
during performance of finishing procedures.
e) Humidity at start of pour, Humidity at end of pour, and High and low humidity
during performance of finishing procedures.
f)
Cloud cover at start of pour, Cloud cover at end of pour, and High and low cloud
cover during performance of finishing procedures.
g) Screeding method and equipment used.
h) Saw cut method and equipment used.
2) Testing and Inspection Reports:
-6-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a)
1.5
Testing Agency Testing and Inspecting Reports of concrete.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Requirements, but is not limited to following:
1. Installers and Installation Supervisor:
a. ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified
Concrete Flatwork Technician.
2. Ready-Mix Supplier:
a. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M requirements and be certified according to NRMCA's
'Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities.'
3. Testing Agencies:
a. Independent agency qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329.
1) Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technicians, Grade I according to ACI CP-1 or equivalent certification program.
2) Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency
laboratory supervisor shall be ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician Grade II.
B. Testing and Inspection:
1. Owner will provide Testing and Inspection on concrete:
a. See Section 01 1200: ‘Multiple Contract Summary’.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery And Acceptance Requirements:
1. Expansion Filler Material:
a. Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
2. High Volume Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement:
a. Deliver synthetic fiber reinforcement in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged
containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, unique identification
number, code approvals, and directions for use, manufacturer, and weight of fibers.
B. Storage And Handling Requirements:
a. Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
b. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage.
2. High Volume Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement:
a. Store synthetic fiber reinforcement in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with
Manufacturer’s instructions and storage temperature requirements.
b. Keep packaging sealed until ready for use.
c. Protect synthetic fiber reinforcement during handling to prevent contamination.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Manufacturer Contact List:
a. BASF Admixtures, Cleveland, OH www.basf-admixtures.com.
b. Bonsal American, Charlotte, NC www.bonsal.com.
c.
Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals, Kansas City, KS www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com.
d. Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH www.euclidchemical.com.
e. Fritz-Pak Concrete Admixtures, Dallas, TX www.fritzpak.com.
-7-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
Grace Construction Products, Cambridge, MA www.graceconstruction.com and Grace
Canada Inc, Ajax, ON (905) 683-8561.
L & M Construction Chemicals, Omaha, NE www.lmcc.com.
Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp, Rockville, MD www.larsenproducts.com.
Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ www.sikaconstruction.com and Sika Canada, Pointe
Claire, QC www.sika.ca.
Sonneborn / BASF Building Systems, Shakopee, MN www.chemrex.com.
Unitex, Kansas City, MO www.unitex-chemicals.com.
U S Mix Products Co, Denver, CO www.usspec.com.
W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com.
B. Performance:
1. Design Criteria: Conform to requirements of ASTM C94/C94M unless specified otherwise.
a. Floor Slab for interior concrete slabs:
1) Class 1 Floor:
a) Anticipated type of traffic: exposed surface – foot traffic.
b) Special considerations: Uniform finish, nonslip aggregated in specific areas,
curing.
c) Final finish: Normal steel-troweled finish, nonslip finish where required.
2. Capacities:
a. For testing purposes, following concrete strengths are required:
1) At 7 days: 60 percent minimum of 28 day strengths.
2) At 28 days: 100 percent minimum of 28 day strengths.
3) At 28 days:
a) Mix Type A: 3000 psi.
b) Mix Type B: 3500 psi.
c) Mix Type C: 4000 psi.
d) Mix Type D: 4500 psi.
e) Mix Type E: 3000 psi.
C. Materials:
1. Table One:
Portland Cement / Blended Hydraulic Cement Equivalencies
ASTM C150/C150M (Low Alkali)
ASTM C595/C595M
ASTM C1157/C1157M
Type I
IP
GU
Type II
IP (MS)
MS
Type III
HE
Type V
HS
2.
3.
Hydraulic Cement: Meet requirements of ASTM C150/C150M, Type <Insert Type>.
a. Meet requirements of ASTM C595/C595M, Type <Insert Type>.
b. Meet requirements of ASTM C1157/C1157M, Type <Insert Type>.
Aggregates:
a. General:
1) Submit a letter on quarry’s letterhead that certifies all aggregate for concrete complies
with the requirements of this section. Material certificates which are submitted shall be
signed by both the materials producer and the contractor, certifying that materials
comply with or exceed requirements specified herein to the Architect, Civil and
Structural Engineering Consultant and the Independent Testing Laboratory for review
and approval.
2) Aggregates for all concrete shall come from a quarry that is DOT approved and meets
or exceeds durability Class I aggregate. The quarry shall submit a letter to Engineer
that certifies that all aggregate complies with DOT requirements for durability.
Aggregate not meeting DOT durability requirements shall not be used.
-8-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
c.
Coarse:
1) Meet requirements of ASTM C33/C33M or nonconforming aggregate that by test or
actual service produces concrete of required strength and conforms to local governing
codes.
2) Aggregate shall be uniformly graded by weight as follows:
a)
Table Two: Flat Work, Size No. 67.
Sieve
Percent Passing
One Inch
100
3/4 Inch
90 - 100
3/8 Inch
20 - 55
No. 4
0 - 10
No. 8
0-5
b)
Table Three:
Sieve
1-1/2 Inch
One Inch
1/2 Inch
No. 4
No. 8
Fine:
1) Meet requirements of ASTM C33/C33M.
2) Aggregate shall be uniformly graded by weight as follows:
a)
4.
5.
All Other, Size No. 57.
Percent Passing
100
95 - 100
25 - 60
0 - 10
0-5
Table Four:
Sieve
3/8 Inch
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
Percent Passing
100
95 - 100
80 - 100
50 - 85
25 - 60
10 - 30
2 - 10
Water: Clear, apparently clean, and potable.
Admixtures And Miscellaneous:
a. Mineral:
1) Fly Ash Pozzolan: Meet requirements of ASTM C618, Class F or C and with loss on
ignition (LOI) of 3 percent maximum.
b. Chemical:
1) No admixture shall contain calcium chloride nor shall calcium chloride be used as an
admixture. All chemical admixtures used shall be from same manufacturer and
compatible with each other.
2) Air Entraining Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C260.
b) Type Two Acceptable Products:
c) MB-VR, MB-AE or Micro Air by BASF.
d) Air Mix 200 or AEA-92 by Euclid.
e) Air plus or Super Air Plus by Fritz-Pak.
f)
Sika Air by Sika.
g) Daravair or Darex II AEA by W R Grace.
h) Equal as approved by Architect before use.
3) Water Reducing Admixture:
-9-
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type A and containing not more than
0.05 percent chloride ions.
c) Pozzolith Series by BASF.
d) Eucon WR 75 or Eucon 91 by Euclid.
e) FR-2 or FR-3 by Fritz-Pak.
f)
Plastocrete 160 by Sika.
g) Daracem 50/55, WRDA-64, or WRDA-82 by W R Grace.
Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type D and contain not more than 0.05
percent chloride ions.
c) Pozzolith Series by BASF.
d) Eucon Retarder 75 by Euclid.
e) FR-1 or Modified FR-1 by Fritz-Pak.
f)
Plastiment by Sika.
g) Daratard-17 or Daratard-40 by W R Grace.
High Range Water Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer):
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type F or G and containing not more
than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
c) Rheobuild 1000 or Glenium Series by BASF.
d) Eucon 37 or Eucon 537 by Euclid.
e) Supercizer 1 through 7 by Fritz-Pak.
f)
Sikament 300 by Sika.
g) Darachem-100 or WRDA-19 by W R Grace.
Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture:
a) Meet requirements of ASTM C494/C494M, Type C or E and containing not more
than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
c) Accelguard 80 by Euclid.
d) Pozzolith NC 534 or 122HE or Pozzutec 20+
e) Daraset or Polarset by W R Grace.
f)
Equal as approved by Architect before use.
Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture:
a) Liquid admixture to inhibit corrosion of steel reinforcement in concrete by
introducing proper amount of anodic inhibitor. Admixture shall contain 30%
calcium nitrite solution and shall be used where called for in specifications or on
drawings.
c) Eucon CIA by Euclid.
d) Equal as approved by Architect before use.
Alkali-Silica Reactivity Inhibiting Admixture:
a) Specially formulated lithium nitrate admixture for prevention of alkali-silica reactivity
(ASR) in concrete. Admixture must have test data indicating
conformance to ASTM C1293, “Standard Test Method for Concrete Aggregates by
Determination of Length Change of Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction”.
c) Eucon Integral ARC by Euclid.
Viscosity Modifying Admixture (VMA):
- 10 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a)
Liquid admixture used to optimize viscosity of Self-Consolidating Concrete (SCC).
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide following at dosage rates per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
c) Visctrol by Euclid.
10) Shrinkage Reducing Admixture (SRA):
a) Liquid admixture specifically designed to reduce drying shrinkage and potential for
cracking.
c) Eucon SRA by Euclid.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agents:
a. Acrylic Additive by Bonsal American.
b. Day Chem Ad Bond (J-40) by Dayton Superior.
c.
Flex-Con by Euclid Chemical Co.
d. Larsen Weldcrete by Larsen Products Corp.
e. Everbond by L & M Construction Chemicals.
f.
Acryl Set by BASF.
g. Sonocrete by Sonneborn.
h. U S Spec Multicoat by U S Mix Products.
i.
Intralok by W R Meadows.
j.
Equal as approved by Architect before use.
B. Evaporation Retardant:
a. Confilm by BASF.
b. Sure Film J-74 by Dayton Superior.
c.
Euco-Bar By Euclid Chemical Co.
d. E-Con by L & M Construction Chemicals.
e. Pro Film by Unitex.
f.
U S Spec Monofilm ER by U S Mix Products.
g. Equal as approved by Architect before use. See Section 01 6200.
C. Expansion Filler Material:
a. Design Criteria:
1) Resilient, flexible, non-extruding, expansion-contraction joint filler meeting requirements
of ASTM D1751 and AASHTO M-213.
2) 1/2 inch thick.
3) Resilience:
a) When compressed to half of original thickness, recover to minimum of 70 percent
of original thickness.
b. Type Two Acceptable Products:
1) Fiber Expansion Joint by W R Meadows, Hampshire, IL www.wrmeadows.com.
2)
Equal as approved by Architect before installation.
- 11 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories required by Divisions 22,
23, and 26 shall be installed and inspected before placing concrete.
2. Install inserts, bolts, boxes, templates, pipes, conduits, and other accessories furnished under
other Sections to be installed as part of work of this Section.
a. Tie anchor bolts for hold-down anchors and columns securely to reinforcing steel.
B. Removal:
1. Remove water and debris from space to be placed.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques:
1. Cold Weather Concreting Procedures:
a. General Requirements:
1) Materials and equipment required for heating and protection of concrete shall be
approved and available at Project site before beginning cold weather concreting.
2) Forms, reinforcement, metallic embedments, and fillers shall be free from snow, ice,
and frost. Surfaces that will be in contact with newly placed concrete, including subgrade materials, shall be 35 deg F minimum at time of concrete placement.
3) Thaw sub-grade 6 inches deep minimum before beginning concrete placement. If
necessary, re-compact thawed material.
4) Use no frozen materials or materials containing ice.
b. Requirements When Average 24 Hour Temperature, midnight to midnight, Is Below 40 deg
F:
1) Temperature of concrete as placed and maintained shall be 55 deg F minimum and 75
deg F maximum.
2) Heat concrete for 72 hours minimum after placing if regular cement is used; for 48
hours if high early strength cement is used; or longer if determined necessary by
Architect.
a) During this period, maintain concrete surface temperature between 55 and 75 deg
F.
3) Vent flue gases from combustion heating units to outside of enclosure to prevent
carbonation of concrete surface.
4) Prevent concrete from drying during heating period. Maintain housing, insulation,
covering, and other protection 24 hours after heat is discontinued.
5) After heating period, if temperature falls below 32 deg F, protect concrete from freezing
until strength of 2000 psi minimum is achieved.
a) Protect flatwork exposed to melting snow or rain during day and freezing during
night from freezing until strength of 3500 psi minimum is achieved.
c.
Requirements When Average 24 Hour Temperature, midnight to midnight, Is Above 40 deg
F, but when temperature falls below 32 deg F:
1) Protect concrete from freezing for 72 hours after placing, or until strength of 2000 psi is
achieved, whichever is longer.
2) Protect flatwork exposed to melting snow or rain during day and freezing during night
from freezing until strength of 3500 psi minimum is achieved.
d. Protect soil supporting concrete footings from freezing under any circumstances.
2. Hot Weather Concreting Procedures:
a. Maximum concrete temperature allowed is 90 deg F in hot weather.
b. Cool aggregate and subgrades by sprinkling.
c.
Avoid cement over 140 deg F.
d. Use cold mixing water or ice.
- 12 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
e.
Use fog spray or evaporation retardant to lessen rapid evaporation from concrete surface.
B. Tolerances:
1. Tolerances shall conform to requirements of ACI 117, except where specified differently.
2. Local Flatness / Levelness of Interior Slabs:
a. Specified Overall Value of FF30 / FL24 and Minimum Local Value of FF20 / FL15 when tested
in accordance with ASTM E1155.
b. Table Five: Maximum Variation Tolerances.
Thickness, standard
Thickness, footings
Plan, 0 - 20 feet
Plan, 40 feet or greater
Plan, footings
Eccentricity, footings
Openings, size
Openings, location
Plumb
Consecutive Steps, treads
Consecutive Steps, risers
Flight of Stairs, treads
Flight of Stairs, risers
3.
plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch
minus 0 inch
1/2 inch
3/4 inch
plus 1/2 inch
2 inch max standard,
1/2 inch at masonry
minus 1/4 inch, plus One inch
plus / minus 1/2 inch at center
1/2 inch max
1/4 inch
1/8 inch
1/4 inch in total run
1/8 inch in total height
Remedy For Out-of-Tolerance Building Slabs:
a. Sections of slabs to be covered by carpet, which do not meet specified tolerances but are
within 10 percent of specified tolerances, may be corrected by grinding or filling, at Owner's
option.
b. Remove and replace sections of slabs measuring outside specified correctable tolerances.
C. Placing:
1. General:
a. Place as soon after mixing as possible.
b. Deposit as nearly as possible in final position.
c.
Placing of concrete shall be continuous until panel or section is complete.
d. In order to avoid overloading of forms and ties, observe following rate of filling for various air
temperatures:
1) Table Six: Placing Rate.
Temperature
40 deg F
50 deg F
60 deg F
70 deg F
Rate of Fill per Hour
2 feet
3 feet
4 feet
5 feet
e.
2.
Compact concrete in forms by vibrating and other means where required. Thoroughly work
in concrete around reinforcing bars.
f.
Consolidate concrete thoroughly.
g. Do not embed aluminum in concrete.
h. Do not use contaminated, deteriorated, or re-tempered concrete.
i.
Avoid accumulation of hardened concrete.
Footings:
a. Bear 12 inches minimum into undisturbed earth or on mechanically compacted engineered
fill. Step footings at ratio of 1-1/2 horizontal to One vertical unless detailed otherwise.
Exterior wall footing shall bear <Insert Dimension> minimum below finish grades.
- 13 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Level top of finish footing and leave rough.
Where joints are required, bulkhead, key horizontally, and dowel with two No. 5 reinforcing
bars, 48 inches long.
Foundations And Walls: Leave steel projecting where required for floor tie.
Exterior Slabs:
a. Dusting with cement not permitted.
b. For continuous placing and where shown on Drawings, saw cut one inch deep control joints
before shrinkage occurs (2 inches at 6 inches slabs).
Equipment Bases: Coordinate with appropriate Sections for locations and dimensions.
Joints:
a. Where possible, locate joints under partitions or where joints will cause least disruption to
floor coverings.
b. Construction Joints: Locate where shown on Drawings to least impair strength of completed
structure. Construction joints in foundation walls shall not occur within 6 feet of corner and
be keyed.
Bonding Fresh And Hardened Concrete:
a. Re-tighten forms.
b. Roughen surfaces.
c.
Clean off foreign matter and laitance.
d. Wet but do not saturate.
e. Slush with neat cement grout or apply bonding agent.
f.
Proceed with placing new concrete.
Anchor Bolts:
a. Place anchor bolts not tied to reinforcing steel immediately following leveling of concrete.
Reconsolidate concrete around bolt immediately after placing bolt.
b. Do not disturb bolts during finishing process.
Substrate For Geocomposite Foundation Drainage System:
a. Concrete surfaces shall be of sound structural grade and have smooth finish free of fins,
ridges, protrusions, rough spalled areas, loose aggregate, exposed course aggregate, voids
or entrained air holes. Rough surfaces shall receive well-adhered parge coat.
b. Repair voids, rock pockets, and excessively rough surfaces with approved non-shrink grout
or grind to match unrepaired areas.
c.
Surfaces at cold joints shall be on same plane.
D. Finishing:
1. Rubbed Finish, Exposed Vertical Surfaces:
a. Smooth Rubbed Finish shall be as specified.
2. Steel Trowel Finishes, Interior Flatwork:
a. Float and steel trowel interior slabs after concrete has set enough to avoid bringing water
and fines to surface.
b. If power troweling is used, get approval of finish from Architect.
3. Broom Finishes, Exterior Flatwork Not Specified:
a. Broom finish exterior slabs.
b. Round edges including edges formed by expansion joints.
c.
Remove edger marks.
E. Curing:
1. All Other Concrete Flatwork And Curbs: Membrane cure as specified.
3.3
A.
Field Tests And Inspections:
1. Concrete:
a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection for concrete as per ASTM C1077.
b. Testing Agency will sample and test for quality control during placement of concrete as
directed by Architect.
- 14 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.4
Inspections are not required and will be performed at discretion of Architect.
Number of tests may vary at discretion of Architect.
Testing and inspections, if performed, will include following:
1) Periodic inspection of reinforcement steel and placement.
a) Inspect that all steel bars must be positively identified as to heat number and mill
analysis.
b) All steel bars that cannot be identified by heat number and mill analysis shall have
one tensile and one bend test made for each 2 metric tons or fraction thereof, of
each size and kind of reinforcing steel.
2) Inspection of bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete.
3) Periodic inspection of anchors installed in hardened concrete.
4) Periodic inspection verifying use of required design mix.
5) Inspection at time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests,
perform slump and air content tests, and determine temperature of concrete.
6) Inspection of concrete and shotcrete placement for proper application techniques.
7) Periodic inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques.
8) Periodic inspect of formwork for shape, location and dimensions of concrete member
being formed.
a) Certified Inspector shall inspect forms for general location, configuration, camber,
shoring, sealing of form joints, correct forming material, concrete accessories, and
form tie locations.
9) Concrete moisture and alkalinity testing.
f.
Testing Agency will sample and test during placement of concrete as directed by Architect
and may include following:
1) Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172/C172M, except modified for slump to comply
with ASTM C94/C94M.
a) Slump: ASTM C143/C143M, Test each time set of compressive specimens are
made.
b) Air Content: ASTM C173/C173M, volumetric method for lightweight or normal
weight concrete; ASTM C231/C231M pressure method for normal weight concrete
each time set of compression test specimens are made.
c) Concrete Temperature: Test each time set of compressive specimens are made.
d) Unit Weight: ASTM C567, Test each time set of compressive specimens are
made.
g. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C31/C31M; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.
Concrete Paving:
a. Testing Agency shall provide testing and inspection including following:
1) Obtain one composite sample for each day’s pour of each concrete plus one set for
each 50 cu. yd or fraction thereof.
2) One specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen
retained in reserve for later testing if required.
3) If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting
and curing in-place concrete.
4) Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three
consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and
no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more
than 500 psi.
PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete that has not received its initial set from precipitation to avoid excess water in mix and
unsatisfactory surface finish.
- 15 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B. Do not allow materials resulting from construction activities, which will affect concrete or application of
finish floor systems adversely, to come in contact with interior concrete slabs.
C. Protect interior concrete floors from stains, paint, mortar and other maintenance.
END OF SECTION
- 16 -
03 3111
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 03 3913 - WATER CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
1.3
1. Quality of water concrete curing as described in Contract Documents.
Reference Standards:
1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials;
a. AASHTO M182-05-UL, ‘Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenafi.’
2. American Society of Testing and Materials:
a. ASTM C171-07, ‘Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.’
SUBMITTALS
A.
Action Submittals:
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's product data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Water-Curing Materials:
a. Absorptive Cover: Meet requirements of AASHTO M 182, Class 2 burlap cloth made from
jute or kenaf and weighing minimum of 9 oz per sq yd when dry.
b. Moisture-Retaining Cover: White, opaque membrane meeting requirements of ASTM C171
minimum.
c. Equals as approved by Architect before using. Both covers may be combined into single,
manufactured product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PROCEDURE
A.
Cover concrete with absorptive cover followed by moisture-retaining cover, both at widest practicable
widths. Lap sides and edges of each 12 inches minimum.
B.
During curing period, immediately repair holes or tears in moisture-retaining cover with additional
cover material and waterproof tape.
C.
Keep absorptive cover saturated, rewetting during curing period as necessary.
D.
Keep concrete covered and moist seven days minimum.
END OF SECTION
Water Concrete Curing
-1-
03 3913
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
05 0000 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes structural steel
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.4
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified installer, fabricator and testing agency.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
D.
Source quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification
Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
C.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D.
Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
1.
2.
3.
AISC 303.
AISC 360.
RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
051200 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M Grade 50.
C.
Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36.
D.
Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36
E.
Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.
F.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.
G.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.2
BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A.
Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1.
2.
2.3
Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating
Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with
mechanically deposited zinc coating.
GROUT
A.
2.4
Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate
grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
FABRICATION
A.
2.5
Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.
SHOP CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Joint Type: Snug tightened
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
051200 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.6
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and
standards:
1.
2.
C.
2.7
Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches
Surfaces to be field welded.
Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.
Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
Galvanized surfaces.
SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and
exposed surfaces.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
C.
Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested
and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at
testing agency's option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.
Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and
locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with
requirements.
051200 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ERECTION
A.
Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B.
Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.3
FIELD CONNECTIONS
A.
High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.
1.
B.
Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
1.
3.4
Joint Type: Snug tightened
Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
inspect field welds.
B.
Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1.
In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be
accepted.
Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the
Contract Documents.
051200 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 0500
22 0519
22 0523.12
22 0523.14
22 0529
22 0548
22 0553
22 0719
22 1116
22 1119
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes the following:
1.
Submittals.
2.
Quality Assurance
3.
Examination.
4.
Preparation.
5.
Repair/Restoration.
6.
Cleaning.
7.
Piping Installation.
8.
Dielectric fittings.
9.
Sleeves.
10.
Escutcheons.
11.
Grout.
12.
Plumbing demolition.
13.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
14.
Supports and anchorages.
15.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated
spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and plumbing equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Manufacturer’s catalog data for each manufactured item.
a.
Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include
Manufacturer’s catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to
show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show
capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item
with applicable data underlined.
b.
Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier.
220500 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
1.4
Shop Drawings:
1.
Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating system, control panel,
etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control and operational components and
devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams.
2.
Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items
such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings
showing electrical power requirements and connection locations.
3.
Drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components in panels and their
function.
4.
Other shop drawings required by Division 22 trade Sections.
COMMON INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A.
Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with Manufacturer’s installation instructions and
recommendations to extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or
stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. Notify Engineer of conflicts
between Manufacturer’s installation instructions and contract documents requirements prior to
proceeding.
B.
Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work. Secure
work true to line and level. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located, and
aligned with other work. Allow for expansion and building movement.
C.
Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work. Arrange joints in exposed work to
obtain best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to Engineer for final decision.
D.
Install each component during weather conditions and project status that will ensure best
possible results. Isolate each part of completed construction from incompatible material as
necessary to prevent deterioration.
E.
Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to reduce necessity of
uncovering completed construction for that purpose.
F.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not shown, install individual components at
standard mounting heights recognized within the industry or local codes for that application.
Refer questionable mounting height decisions to Engineer for final decision.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C.
Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If
minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
220500 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
E.
1.6
Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Plumbing Codes and Gas
Ordinances applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with
rules, regulations and ordinances.
In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company
regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in
writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences.
Identification:
1.
Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in
place when Product is turned over to Owner.
2.
Materials shall bear Manufacturer’s name and trade name. Equipment and materials of
same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform
appearance, operation, and maintenance.
A.
Summary:
1.
This Section includes administrative and procedure requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
a.
b.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials,
finishes, systems and equipment.
B.
Submittals:
1.
Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
a.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect’s comments. Submit 3
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect’s comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EXAMINATION:
A.
Site Inspection:
1.
Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this
Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which
mechanical work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction.
2.
No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence
related to failure to examine site conditions.
B.
Drawings:
1.
Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork,
equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other
trades will permit.
2.
Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these
drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These
drawings take precedence over Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings.
3.
Because of scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting
this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories
required to meet conditions.
C.
Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment
of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
220500 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified
items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit
space available.
2.2
PREPARATION:
A.
Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and
roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with
Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.
B.
Changes Due to Equipment Selection:
1.
Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or
connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings, if requested by
Architect, showing proposed installations.
2.
If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony
with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork,
supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary.
3.
Provide any additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment
required for proper operation of the system resulting from selection of equipment,
including all required changes in affected trades.
4.
Be responsible for the proper location of roughing-in and connections provided under
other Divisions.
2.3
REPAIR/RESTORATION:
A.
Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of
work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage
done by it.
1.
Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and
appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown.
2.
Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
B.
Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit
installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
2.4
CLEANING:
A.
Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Remove stickers from fixtures and
adjust flush valves.
B.
No more than one week before Final Inspection, flush out bearings and clean other lubricated
surfaces with flushing oil. Provide best quality and grade of lubricant specified by Equipment
Manufacturer.
C.
Replace filters in equipment for moving air with new filters of specified type no more than one
week before Final Inspection.
2.5
PIPING INSTALLATION:
A.
Interface With Other Work:
1.
Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in
sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items
and see they are properly installed.
220500 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to
completely control entire apparatus.
1.
Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping
may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not
relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every
respect.
2.
Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or
block access to doors, windows, or access openings.
a.
Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles.
b.
Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping
specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses.
1)
Make connections of dissimilar metals with di-electric unions.
2)
Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on
both sides of traps.
c.
Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, bull head tees, close nipples, or
running traps.
d.
running couplings.
e.
Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. Provide drain valves at low
points and manual air vents at high points in hot water heating and cooling water
piping.
f.
Install piping to insure noiseless circulation.
g.
Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be
regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final
acceptance.
3.
Do not install piping in shear walls.
C.
Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope and
anchorage.
1.
Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site. Remove burr
and cutting slag from pipes.
2.
Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps
and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged
connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if
requested.
3.
Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
4.
Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls
using Unistrut and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork.
Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed.
5.
Supports for Horizontal Piping:
a.
Support metal piping at 96 inches mm on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches or
larger and 72 inches on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch or less.
b.
Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches on center maximum.
c.
Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required.
6.
Supports for Vertical Piping:
a.
Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level.
b.
Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported
directly from building structure.
c.
Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall.
7.
Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scott 33
plastic tape.
8.
Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe:
a.
Provide for expansion in every 30 feet of straight run.
b.
Provide 12 inch offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof.
c.
Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls,
partitions, or structural members. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or
220500 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
9.
10.
D.
2.6
roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on grade. Seal sleeves with
specified sealants.
Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch above floor finish in mechanical equipment
rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor.
Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight.
Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and
are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain
pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.7
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
G.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
2.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
3.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
4.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
2.8
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
220500 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
2.9
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.10
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
D.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
2.11
A.
2.12
A.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
3.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
General:
1.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section
for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual
contents.
220500 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following
information.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Date of submittal.
e.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
f.
Name and address of Architect.
g.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions
for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
a.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2 by-11-inch paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets
inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
1)
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
b.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to
Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
c.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
d.
1)
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text
pages and use as foldouts.
2)
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate
locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
Include copies of approved shop drawings and copies of warranties required in individual
Sections of Division 22.
Operation Manuals
1.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards,
operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license
requirements.
2.
a.
b.
Manufacturer’s name.
c.
d.
Equipment function.
e.
f.
g.
Performance curves.
h.
i.
3.
Operation Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and
normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating
instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
220500 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
identification.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual
1.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair
materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
2.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
and telephone number of installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and crossreference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
3.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and
inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for
cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.
5.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
6.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
D.
Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manual
1.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturer’s maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
2.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For
each product, list name, address, and telephone number of installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
3.
Manufacturer’s Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturer’s maintenance
documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for
maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for
each component part or piece of equipment.
4.
Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training
videotape if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures.
5.
6.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation
and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
7.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
8.
220500 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective
Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to
be removed.
1.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
3.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
4.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
5.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
3.2
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
220500 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
N.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements
required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble
mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten
bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight
seal.
O.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
seal.
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for materials.
Q.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
220500 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
4.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6.
PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M.
Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
2.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
220500 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.7
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
plumbing materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.8
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
3.9
O & M MANUAL PREPREPARATION
A.
and maintenance of each product, material and finish incorporated into the Work.
B.
220500 - 13
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Manufacturer’s Data: Where manuals contain manufacturer’s standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data includes more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
D.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
E.
Comply with Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
220500 - 14
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Dial-type pressure gages.
2.
Gage attachments.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
Product certificates.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRESSURE GAGES
A.
Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.
b.
Ashcroft Inc.
c.
Ernst Flow Industries.
d.
Flo Fab Inc.
e.
Marsh Bellofram.
f.
Miljoco Corporation.
g.
Noshok.
h.
Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
i.
REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.
j.
Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
k.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
l.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
m.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
n.
WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.
o.
Winters Instruments - U.S.
2.
Standard: ASME B40.100.
3.
Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.
4.
Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottomoutlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.
6.
Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.
7.
Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.
8.
Pointer: Dark-colored metal.
220519 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
9.
10.
11.
2.2
Window: Glass or plastic.
Ring: Stainless steel.
Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.
GAGE ATTACHMENTS
A.
Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type
surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.
B.
Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the
most readable position.
B.
Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.
C.
Install pressure gages in the following locations:
1.
Outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.
D.
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
E.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.2
PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE
A.
3.3
Pressure gages at outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:
1.
Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.
PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 50 psi.
220519 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Brass ball valves.
2.
Bronze ball valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of valve.
1.
Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
2.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
3.
ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
4.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
C.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
D.
Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with
copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
E.
Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
F.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.
H.
Valves in Insulated Piping:
1.
Include 2-inch stem extensions.
2.
Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves
that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.
3.
Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
2.2
BRASS BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Brass Ball Valves with Full Port and Brass Trim:
1.
following:
220523.12 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
2.3
a.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
b.
Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
c.
Hammond Valve.
d.
Jomar Valve.
e.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
f.
Red-W hite Valve Corporation.
g.
Stockham; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
h.
Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
b.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
c.
Body Design: Two piece.
d.
Body Material: Forged brass.
e.
Ends: Threaded and soldered.
f.
Seats: PTFE.
g.
Stem: Brass.
h.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
i.
Port: Full.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Hammond Valve.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
g.
Zurn Industries, LLC.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Body Material: Bronze.
e.
Ends: Threaded and soldered.
f.
Seats: PTFE.
g.
Stem: Bronze or brass.
h.
i.
Port: Full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
220523.12 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.2
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP
ratings may be substituted.
B.
Select valves with the following end connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
2.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
3.3
DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
2.
One piece, brass ball valve.
3.
One piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
4.
Two-piece, brass ball valves with full port and brass trim.
5.
Two-piece, bronze ball valves with full port and bronze or brass trim.
END OF SECTION 220523.12
220523.12 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Bronze swing check valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.
Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.
2.
ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
3.
4.
ASME B16.18 for solder joint.
5.
C.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
2.2
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
Jenkins Valves; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
Powell Valves.
g.
h.
220523.14 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
B.
i.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
b.
c.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
d.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
e.
Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
f.
Disc: Bronze.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles.
f.
Disc: PTFE.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
3.3
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
A.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP
ratings may be substituted.
B.
End Connections:
220523.14 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.4
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.
DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves, Class 125, bronze disc with soldered or
threaded end connections.
220523.14 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4.
Fastener systems.
5.
Pipe positioning systems.
6.
Equipment supports.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.3
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall
withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
2.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
2.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
5.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
220529 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
C.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
2.2
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength
and vapor barrier.
B.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium
silicate with 100-psig minimum compressive strength.
C.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.4
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5
PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS
A.
2.6
Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for
positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
220529 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
2.
2.8
PIPE STANDS
A.
General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of
manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation
without membrane penetration.
D.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for
roof installation without membrane penetration.
2.
Base: Plastic.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
4.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support.
E.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of bases, vertical horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
2.
Bases: One or more; plastic.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5.
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F.
Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structuralsteel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof
curb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
220529 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
D.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste
piping connections to each plumbing fixture.
F.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
G.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
K.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
220529 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
e.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
220529 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
C.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments
for general service applications.
F.
Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for
hostile environment applications.
G.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping
and tubing.
H.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes
NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
7.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
8.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
220529 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
9.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
K.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
2.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
3.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
4.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
5.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
6.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
7.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
8.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
9.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
N.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches.
2.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
3.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
220529 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
P.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Q.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
R.
Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and
waste piping for plumbing fixtures.
220529 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.
Quality of and requirements for anchorage and seismic restraint systems and vibration
isolation systems for plumbing piping and equipment.
B.
1.
Section 03 3111: Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2.
Furnishing and installing of seismic restraint and vibration isolation systems is by installer
of equipment requiring such systems.
a.
Manufacturers of equipment specified to receive seismic restraint shall provide
product data needed for calculation of seismic restraint needs. This information
shall include, but not be limited to, equipment dimensions, dimensioned anchor
points, operating weight, and center of gravity dimension.
1.2
A.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
Site Class as Defined in ASCE, Section 9.4.
2.
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.
3.
Category I:
a.
Buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the
event of failure including, but not limited to: Agricultural facilities, certain temporary
facilities, minor storage facilities.
4.
Category II:
a.
All buildings and other structures except those listed in Categories I, III, and IV.
5.
Category III:
a.
Buildings and other structures that represent a substantial hazard to human life in
the event of failure including, but not limited to:
1)
Buildings and other structures where more than 300 people congregate in
one area.
2)
Buildings and other structures with day care facilities with capacity greater
than 150.
3)
Buildings and other structures with elementary school or secondary school
facilities with capacity greater than 250.
4)
Buildings and other structures with a capacity greater than 500 for colleges
or adult education facilities.
5)
Health care facilities with a capacity of 50 or more resident patients but not
having surgery or emergency treatment facilities.
6)
Jails and detention facilities.
7)
Power generating stations and other public utility facilities not included in
Category IV.
b.
Buildings and other structures not included in Category IV (including, but not
limited to, facilities that manufacturer, process, handle, store, use or dispose of
such substances as hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, hazardous waste, or
explosives) containing sufficient quantities of hazardous materials to be dangerous
to the public if released.
6.
Category IV:
220548 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a.
7.
8.
Buildings and other structures designated as essential facilities including, but not
limited to:
1)
Hospitals and other health care facilities having surgery or emergency
treatment facilities.
2)
Fire, rescue, ambulance, and police stations and emergency vehicle
garages.
3)
Designated earthquake, hurricane, or other emergency shelters.
4)
Designated emergency prepardness, communication, and operation centers
and other facilities required for emergency response.
5)
Power generating stations and other public utility facilities required in an
emergency.
6)
Ancillary structures (including, but not limited to, communication towers, fuel
storage tanks, cooling towers, electrical substation structures, fire water
storage tanks or other structures housing or supporting water, or other firesuppression material or equipment) required for operation of Category IV
structures during an emergency.
7)
Aviation control towers, air traffic control centers, and emergency aircraft
hangers.
8)
Water storage facilities and pump structures required to maintain water
pressure for fire suppression.
9)
Buildings and other structures having critical national defense functions.
b.
Buildings and other structures (including, but not limited to, facilities that
manufacturer, process, handle, store, use, or dispose of such substances as
hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, hazardous waste, or explosives) containing
extremely hazardous materials where the quantity of the material exceeds a
threshold quantity established by the authority having jurisdiction.
c.
Component Importance Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
d.
Component Response Modification Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
e.
Component Amplification Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As per ASCE,
Section 9.4
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: As per ASCE, Section 9.4.
B.
General Requirements:
1.
Install full line size flexible pipe connectors at the inlet and outlet of each piece of
plumbing equipment and where shown on the drawings. All connectors shall be suitable
for use at the temperature, pressure, and service encountered at the point of installation
and operation. End fitting connectors shall conform to the pipefitting schedule. Control
rods or protective braid must be used to limit elongation to 3/8 inch. Flexible connectors
shall not be required for suspended in-line pumps.
2.
Unless otherwise specified, all and plumbing equipment and pipe shall be restrained to
resist seismic forces. Restraints shall maintain equipment, piping in a captive position.
Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet the seismic requirements as
defined in the latest issue of the IBC or local jurisdiction building code. Equipment
importance factors are determined. As follows:
Ip = 1.5
Life-safety component is required to function after an earthquake.
Ip = 1.5
Component contains hazardous or flammable material.
Ip = 1.5
Storage racks in occupancies open to the general public (e.g., warehouse
retail stores).
Ip = 1.0
All other components.
C.
Seismic Restraint Shall Not Be Required for the Following:
1.
Rigidly floor mounted plumbing components in all seismic design categories, where Ip =
1.0 and flexible connections between the components and associated duct work, piping
220548 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
1.3
and conduit are provided, that are mounted at 4 feet or less above a floor level and
weight 400 pounds or less and are not critical to the continued operation of the structure.
Suspended, wall mounted and flexibly mounted equipment are not included in this
exclusion.
Hanging, wall mounted, and flexibly supported plumbing components that weigh 20
pounds or less, where Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections are provided between the
components and associated duct work, piping and conduit.
Piping supported by individual clevis hangers where the distance, as measured from the
top of the pipe to the supporting structure, is less than 12 inches for the entire pipe run
and the pipe can accommodate the expected deflections. Trapeze or double rod hangers
where the distance from the top of the trapeze or support to the structure is less than 12
inches for the entire run. Hanger rods shall not be constructed in a manner that would
subject the rod to bending moments (swivel, eye bolt, or vibration isolation hanger
connection to structure).
High deformability piping (steel, copper, aluminum with welded, brazed, ground, or
screwed connections) designated as having an Ip = 1.5 and a nominal pipe size of 1 inch
or less where provisions are made to protect the piping from impact or to avoid the
impact of larger piping or other mechanical equipment. Note, any combination of piping
supported on a trapeze where the total weight exceeds 10 pounds per foot must be
braced.
screwed connections) and limited deformability piping (cast iron, FRP, PVC) designated
with an Ip = 1.0 and a nominal pipe size of 1-inch and less in the mechanical equipment
room, or 2-inch and less outside the mechanical equipment room.
PVC or other plastic or fiberglass vent piping.
Manufacturer’s Responsibilities:
1.
Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
2.
Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
3.
Provide installation instructions and shop drawings for all materials supplied under this
section of the specifications.
4.
Provide calculations to determine restraint loads resulting from seismic forces presented
in local building code. Seismic calculations shall be certified by a licensed engineer in
the employ of the seismic equipment manufacturer with a minimum 5 years experience.
Provide calculations for all floor or roof-mounted equipment 400 pounds or greater (20
pounds or greater for Ip = 1.5), all suspended or wall mounted equipment 20 pounds or
greater, and vibration isolated equipment 20 pounds or greater.
5.
Seismic restraint load ratings must be certified and substantiated by testing or
calculations under direct control of a registered professional engineer.
6.
Calculations and restraint device submittal drawings shall specify anchor bolt type,
embedment, concrete compressive strength, minimum spacing between anchors, and
minimum distances of anchors from concrete edges. Concrete anchor locations shall not
be near edges, stress joints, or an existing fracture. All bolts shall be ASTM A307 or
better.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.
1.
Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
220548 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.4
A.
Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
B.
C.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based
on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismicrestraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
D.
Manufacturer must be a member of the Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers
Association (VISCMA).
E.
Steel components shall be cleaned and painted with industrial enamel. All nuts, bolts and
washers shall be zinc-electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of
welding slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer.
F.
All isolators, bases and seismic restraints exposed to the weather shall utilize cadmium-plated,
epoxy coat or PVC coated springs and hot dipped galvanized steel components. Nuts, bolts
and washers may be zinc-electroplated. Isolators for outdoor mounted equipment shall provide
adequate restraint for the greater of either wind loads required by local codes or withstand a
minimum of 30 pounds per square foot applied to any exposed surface of the equipment
G.
Provide a written quality control procedure that outlines complete compliance of attachment of
cabling restraints to brackets. For swaged connections, provide a gage to verify swage. For
screw/clamp connection, provide torque values for attachment fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A.
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
following:
a.
Ace Mountings Co., Inc.
b.
California Dynamics Corporation.
c.
Isolation Technology, Inc.
d.
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
e.
Mason Industries, Inc.
f.
Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.
220548 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
g.
Vibration Isolation.
h.
Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
Surface Pattern: Smooth pattern.
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A.
2.3
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Mounting Plates:
a.
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
b.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to
support structure.
3.
Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material.
RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A.
2.4
Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a.
Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.
b.
material.
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
220548 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the
spring at rated load.
Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.
Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.
Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without
deformation or failure.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator
pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
2.6
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Two-Part Telescoping Housing: A steel top and bottom frame separated by an
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.
a.
Drilled base housing for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad
attached to the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
220548 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.7
e.
f.
g.
h.
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed.
a.
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to
the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Top plate with threaded mounting holes.
c.
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING
A.
2.8
ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part
Telescoping Housing:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with
adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
a.
b.
Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level
equipment.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT
A.
Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a
minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.
1.
Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical
travel in both directions.
2.
Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psig on isolation material providing equal isolation in all
directions.
220548 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.9
RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.
1.
Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable
to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet
location requirements.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an
opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
3.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel
contact.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
8.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
9.
Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
220548 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.12
SNUBBERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,
and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1.
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
3.
Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch-thick resilient cushion.
2.13
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A.
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
4.
Unistrut.
B.
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels
with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the
other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension,
compression, and torsion forces.
2.14
RESTRAINT CABLES
A.
following:
1.
2.
Loos & Co., Inc.
3.
B.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with
a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
2.15
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
A.
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
TOLCO.
B.
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
connections to hanger rod.
220548 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices used.
E.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
F.
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.
B.
Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2
VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or
ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
2.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component.
E.
Piping Restraints:
1.
Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
2.
Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum
of 80 feet o.c.
3.
Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.
220548 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
G.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of
ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component.
H.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
I.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
J.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
K.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full
design strength.
3.
Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty
sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to
which anchor is to be fastened.
4.
Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.
5.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.3
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A.
3.4
Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate
with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one
supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Perform tests and inspections.
C.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at
least seven days' advance notice.
3.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
4.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
5.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
220548 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
8.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
220548 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Pipe labels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE LABELS
A.
following:
1.
Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.
2.
Brady Corporation.
3.
Brimar Industries, Inc.
4.
Carlton Industries, LP.
5.
Champion America.
6.
Craftmark Pipe Markers.
7.
emedco.
8.
Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.
9.
LEM Products Inc.
10.
Marking Sevices Inc.
11.
Seton Identification Products.
B.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
C.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
D.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
E.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both
directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2.
Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings
in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels,
and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
220553 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible
enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Domestic Water Piping
a.
Background: Safety green.
b.
Letter Colors: White.
220553 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:
1.
Domestic cold and hot-water piping.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 220716 "Plumbing Equipment Insulation."
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and
cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
B.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation
Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground
Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
manufacturers specified:
a.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
b.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
c.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
220719 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
2.2
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
following:
a.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
b.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
c.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
2.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
C.
ASJ Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap
seams and joints.
1.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
a.
Company; CP-82.
b.
c.
Company; 85-20.
d.
2.
2.3
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; 30-80/30-90.
b.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film
thickness.
3.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
4.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
220719 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
2.4
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1.
a.
Company; CP-10.
b.
c.
Company; 46-50.
d.
e.
Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/W C-5.
2.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
3.
4.
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
5.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
2.5
ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
4.
5.
Color: White.
6.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
7.
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
2.6
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
2.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
a.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
b.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
c.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
d.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
220719 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
2.7
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
220719 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
2.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.
Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip,
spaced 4 inches o.c.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and
at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches
similar to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
Vibration-control devices.
2.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
3.
Nameplates and data plates.
4.
Cleanouts.
3.3
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping
and fire-resistive joint sealers.
C.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
2.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
220719 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.4
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
220719 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.5
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied
in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
available.
2.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
3.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
220719 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
3.6
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FINISHES
A.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
inspection of the completed Work.
B.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.7
A.
B.
1.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
C.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.8
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.9
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculated Hot Water, Aboveground: Insulation shall be the
following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.
220719 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.
A.
System purging and disinfecting activities report.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting
materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
B.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic
piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
2.2
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.
B.
Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.
C.
Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
D.
Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
E.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
F.
Copper Unions:
1.
MSS SP-123.
2.
Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.
3.
Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.
4.
Solder-joint or threaded ends.
G.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
1.
Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in
each end.
2.
Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDMrubber, O-ring seal in each end.
221116 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.3
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
1.
AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and
asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D.
Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.5
Same size as pipes to be joined.
Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.
End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
following:
a.
A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
b.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
c.
Central Plastics Company.
d.
HART Industrial Unions, LLC.
e.
Jomar Valve.
f.
Matco-Norca.
g.
h.
Wilkins.
i.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
3.
Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
4.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C.
Dielectric Flanges:
1.
following:
221116 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
Matco-Norca.
d.
e.
Wilkins.
f.
Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint
copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
D.
Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
1.
following:
a.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
c.
d.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
2.
Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.
3.
4.
Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.
5.
Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.
6.
Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.
E.
Dielectric Nipples:
1.
following:
a.
Elster Perfection Corporation.
b.
Grinnell Mechanical Products.
c.
Matco-Norca.
d.
Precision Plumbing Products.
e.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Standard: IAPMO PS 66.
3.
Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.
4.
Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.
5.
End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.
6.
Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
C.
Install domestic water piping level and plumb.
D.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
221116 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
E.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in
Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
F.
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
G.
otherwise.
H.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
I.
J.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
K.
L.
M.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
N.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for
sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."
O.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations for walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 “Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping.”
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
C.
1.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
2.
damaged.
D.
Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints"
chapter.
E.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join
copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
F.
Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with
tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
221116 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
G.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and
thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
H.
Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join
pipe and fittings according to the following:
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements. Apply primer.
2.
3.
PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
I.
Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of
both piping systems.
3.3
TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
B.
Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
1.
Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
2.
Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
C.
Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal
transition fittings or unions.
3.4
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.
D.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.5
A.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
1.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.
2.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:
a.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
b.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
c.
Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
4.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
221116 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
2.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
F.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and
maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
D.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to
the following:
1.
Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than
equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.
3.7
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.8
Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and
installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Piping Inspections:
a.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
b.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities
having jurisdiction:
1)
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing
or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.
2)
Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests
specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance
with requirements.
c.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or
inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
d.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.
Piping Tests:
a.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.
221116 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a
separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered
or concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating
pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test
source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure
constitute defects that must be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof
until satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
B.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
3.9
ADJUSTING
A.
3.10
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3.
Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4.
Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.
a.
Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to
provide hot-water flow in each branch.
b.
Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
5.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during
installation.
6.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
7.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and are clean and ready for use.
8.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if
methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:
a.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
2)
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
d.
Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
221116 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
D.
Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and
soldered joints.
221116 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
2.
Strainers.
3.
Hose bibbs.
4.
Wall hydrants.
5.
Drain valves.
6.
Water-hammer arresters.
B.
1.
Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages, and flow
meters in domestic water piping.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
2.2
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 14.
A.
2.3
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise
indicated.
WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES
A.
Water Regulators:
1.
following:
a.
Cash Acme.
b.
c.
Honeywell W ater Controls.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.
221119 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 60 psig.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.
STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
A.
2.5
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with
AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3.
End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
4.
Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.
5.
Perforation Size:
a.
Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.
b.
Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.
c.
Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.
6.
Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.
WALL HYDRANTS
A.
Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants:
1.
Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.
2.
3.
Operation: Loose key.
4.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
5.
Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.
6.
Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with
ASME B1.20.7.
7.
Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.
8.
Operating Keys(s): One with each wall hydrant.
B.
Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants:
1.
Standard: ASSE 1019, Type A or Type B.
2.
Type: Automatic draining with integral air-inlet valve.
3.
Classification: Type A, for automatic draining with hose removed.
4.
5.
Operation: Wheel handle.
6.
Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall
clamp.
7.
Inlet: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4.
8.
Outlet: Exposed with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.
2.6
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:
1.
Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.
2.
Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.
3.
Size: NPS 3/4.
4.
Body: Copper alloy.
5.
6.
Seats and Seals: Replaceable.
7.
Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.
221119 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
8.
9.
2.7
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7
and cap with brass chain.
WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS
A.
Water-Hammer Arresters:
1.
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
Josam Company.
c.
MIFAB, Inc.
d.
Precision Plumbing Products.
e.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
f.
Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.
g.
Tyler Pipe; a subsidiary of McWane Inc.
h.
i.
2.
Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
3.
Type: Metal bellows.
4.
Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on outlet.
B.
Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.
3.3
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections:
1.
Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, double-check, backflowprevention assembly and double-check, detector-assembly backflow preventer according
to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.
B.
Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
C.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
221119 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
221119 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
23 0500
23 0513
23 0517
23 0519
23 0523.12
23 0523.13
23 0523.14
23 0529
23 0548
23 0553
23 0594
23 0713
23 0716
23 0719
23 0900
23 0993
23 1123
23 2113
23 2116
23 2123
23 2500
23 2513
23 3113
23 3300
23 3600
23 4100
23 5216
23 7412
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC – AIR/HYDRONIC
DUCT INSULATION
HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC - BACNET
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
HYDRONIC PIPING
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
HYDRONIC PUMPS
HVAC WATER TREATMENT
WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
METAL DUCTS
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
CONDENSING BOILERS
PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes the following:
1.
Submittals:
2.
Quality Assurance:
3.
Examination.
4.
Preparation.
5.
Repair/Restoration.
6.
Cleaning.
7.
Piping Installation.
8.
Dielectric fittings.
9.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
10.
Sleeves.
11.
Escutcheons.
12.
Grout.
13.
HVAC demolition.
14.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
15.
Concrete bases.
16.
Supports and anchorages.
17.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data:
1.
Manufacturer’s catalog data for each manufactured item.
a.
Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include
Manufacturer’s catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to
show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show
capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item
with applicable data underlined.
230500 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
C.
1.4
Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating system, control panel,
etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control and operational components and
devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams.
2.
Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items
such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings
showing electrical power requirements and connection locations.
3.
Drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components in panels and their
function.
a.
Other shop drawings required by Division 23 trade Sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
2.
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
C.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
1.
The contractor shall verify motor voltages with the electrical drawings before ordering
motorized equipment and controls. Motor name plate voltage shall be NEMA standard
200 volt for 208 volt three phase system and shall be NEMA. Standard 230 volt for 240
volt three phase or single phase system. Starter heaters installed shall be coordinated
with the name plate data.
D.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1.
Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of Plumbing Codes and Gas
Ordinances applicable to Project. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with
rules, regulations and ordinances.
2.
In case of differences between building codes, laws, local ordinances, utility company
regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Notify Architect in
writing of such differences before performing work affected by such differences.
E.
Identification:
1.
Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in
place when Product is turned over to Owner.
2.
Materials shall bear Manufacturer’s name and trade name. Equipment and materials of
same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform
appearance, operation, and maintenance.
1.5
A.
Summary:
1.
This Section includes administrative and procedure requirements for preparing operation
and maintenance manuals, including the following:
a.
230500 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
B.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials,
finishes, systems and equipment.
Submittals:
1.
Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.
a.
Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect’s comments. Submit 3
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect’s comments.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EXAMINATION:
A.
Site Inspection:
1.
Examine premises to understand conditions that may affect performance of work of this
Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which
mechanical work is dependent for efficiency and report work that requires correction.
2.
No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence
related to failure to examine site conditions.
B.
Drawings:
1.
Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork,
equipment, etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other
trades will permit.
2.
Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these
drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These
drawings take precedence over Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings.
3.
Because of scale of Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories that may be required. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting
this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories
required to meet conditions.
C.
Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment
of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
If approval is received by Addendum or Change Order to use other than originally specified
items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit
space available.
2.2
PREPARATION:
A.
Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and
roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with
Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.
B.
Changes Due to Equipment Selection:
1.
Where equipment specified or otherwise approved requires different arrangement or
connections from that shown in Contract Documents, submit drawings, if requested by
Architect, showing proposed installations.
2.
If proposed changes are approved, install equipment to operate properly and in harmony
with intent of Contract Documents. Make incidental changes in piping, ductwork,
supports, installation, wiring, heaters, panelboards, and as otherwise necessary.
3.
Provide any additional motors, valves, controllers, fittings, and other additional equipment
required for proper operation of the system resulting from selection of equipment,
including all required changes in affected trades.
230500 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
2.3
Be responsible for the proper location of roughing-in and connections provided under
other Divisions.
REPAIR/RESTORATION:
A.
Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of
work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage
done by it.
1.
Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and
appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown.
2.
Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
B.
Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit
installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
2.4
CLEANING:
A.
Clean exposed piping, ductwork, equipment, and fixtures. Remove stickers from fixtures and
adjust flush valves.
B.
No more than one week before Final Inspection, flush out bearings and clean other lubricated
surfaces with flushing oil. Provide best quality and grade of lubricant specified by Equipment
Manufacturer.
C.
Replace filters in equipment for moving air with new filters of specified type no more than one
week before Final Inspection.
2.5
PIPING INSTALLATION:
A.
Interface With Other Work:
1.
Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are to be installed by others in
sufficient time to be incorporated into construction as work proceeds. Locate these items
and see they are properly installed.
B.
Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to
completely control entire apparatus.
1.
Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections. Piping
may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This does not
relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every
respect.
2.
Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment, ducts, or devices, or
block access to doors, windows, or access openings.
a.
Arrange so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles.
b.
Provide accessible flanges or ground joint unions, as applicable for type of piping
specified, at connections to equipment and on bypasses.
1)
Make connections of dissimilar metals with di-electric unions.
2)
Install valves and unions ahead of traps and strainers. Provide unions on
both sides of traps.
c.
running traps.
d.
running couplings.
e.
Install piping systems so they may be easily drained. Provide drain valves at low
points and manual air vents at high points in hot water heating and cooling water
piping.
f.
Install piping to insure noiseless circulation.
230500 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
g.
3.
Place valves and specialties to permit easy operation and access. Valves shall be
regulated, packed, and glands adjusted at completion of work before final
acceptance.
Do not install piping in shear walls.
C.
Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope and
anchorage.
1.
Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site. Remove burr
and cutting slag from pipes.
2.
Work piping into place without springing or forcing. Make piping connections to pumps
and other equipment without strain at piping connection. Remove bolts in flanged
connections or disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected, if
requested.
3.
Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
4.
Except for underground pipe, suspend piping from roof trusses or clamp to vertical walls
using Unistrut and clamps. Do not hang pipe from other pipe, equipment, or ductwork.
Laying of piping on any building element is not allowed.
5.
Supports for Horizontal Piping:
a.
Support metal piping at 96 inches mm on center maximum for pipe 1-1/4 inches or
larger and 72 inches on center maximum for pipe 1-1/8 inch or less.
b.
Support thermoplastic pipe at 48 inches on center maximum.
c.
Provide support at each elbow. Install additional support as required.
6.
Supports for Vertical Piping:
a.
Place riser clamps at each floor or ceiling level.
b.
Securely support clamps by structural members, which in turn are supported
directly from building structure.
c.
Provide clamps as necessary to brace pipe to wall.
7.
Insulate hangers for copper pipe from piping by means of at least two layers of Scott 33
plastic tape.
8.
Expansion of Thermoplastic Pipe:
a.
Provide for expansion in every 30 feet of straight run.
b.
Provide 12 inch offset below roof line in each vent line penetrating roof.
D.
Provide sleeves around pipes passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls, partitions, or
structural members. Do not place sleeves around soil, waste, vent, or roof drain lines passing
through concrete floors on grade. Seal sleeves with specified sealants.
1.
Sleeves through floors shall extend 1/4 inch above floor finish in mechanical equipment
rooms above basement floor. In other rooms, sleeves shall be flush with floor.
2.
Sleeves through floors and foundation walls shall be watertight.
E.
Provide spring clamp plates (escutcheons) where pipes run through walls, floors, or ceilings and
are exposed in finished locations of building. Plates shall be chrome plated heavy brass of plain
pattern and shall be set tight on pipe and to building surface.
2.6
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.7
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
230500 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch
maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
C.
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.
G.
1.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
2.
2.8
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
F.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.9
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A.
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space
between pipe and sleeve.
B.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and
number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
C.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
D.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to
secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
2.10
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
230500 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends
and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.11
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
D.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
2.12
A.
2.13
A.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
2.
3.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
General:
1.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section
for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not
part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual
contents.
2.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following
information.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Date of submittal.
e.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
f.
Name and address of Architect.
g.
3.
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section
number in Project Manual.
230500 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions
for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
a.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness
necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2 by-11-inch paper; with
clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets
inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.
1)
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
b.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark
each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components
of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to
Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.
c.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose
diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
d.
1)
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text
pages and use as foldouts.
2)
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in
labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate
locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles,
descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
Include copies of approved shop drawings and copies of warranties required in individual
Sections of Division 23.
B.
Operation Manuals
1.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards,
operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license
requirements.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Equipment function.
e.
f.
g.
Performance curves.
h.
i.
3.
Operation Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and
normal shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating
instructions; and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
4.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram
controls as installed.
5.
identification.
C.
Product Maintenance Manual
1.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair
materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
2.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name
and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address,
230500 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
and telephone number of installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and crossreference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and
inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for
cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials
and related services.
Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manual
1.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system,
include source information, manufacturer’s maintenance documentation, maintenance
procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information,
maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
2.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in
manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For
each product, list name, address, and telephone number of installer or supplier and
maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in
Project Manual.
3.
Manufacturer’s Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturer’s maintenance
documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for
maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for
each component part or piece of equipment.
4.
Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,
disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training
videotape if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures.
5.
6.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts,
with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation
and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.
7.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name
and telephone number of service agent.
8.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure
Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
230500 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
C.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity
and quality.
D.
Building owner shall have first right of refusal for any equipment or material that is to be
removed.
3.2
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping
systems.
B.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
otherwise.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
M.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
230500 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
N.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2.
Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.
3.
seal.
O.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1.
seal.
P.
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
C.
assembly.
D.
E.
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
1.
2.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
230500 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2.
3.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
4.
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
2.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M.
Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.5
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
2.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
3.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
CONCRETE BASES
A.
Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's
written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
230500 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7
Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in
both directions than supported unit.
Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.
Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete
base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.
Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.
Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in
Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete (Limited Applications)."
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8
ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B.
Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or
will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood members.
C.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.9
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
230500 - 13
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.10
O & M MANUAL PREPREPARATION
A.
and maintenance of each product, material and finish incorporated into the Work.
B.
C.
Manufacturer’s Data: Where manuals contain manufacturer’s standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data includes more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
D.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the
and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings
to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
E.
Comply with Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures” for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
230500 - 14
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
Motor controllers.
2.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
3.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
4.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty Design B at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet
above sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected
loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating
sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1, 12-12 NEMA premium efficient.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
2.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Stator: Random-wound, squirrel cage, induction design.
F.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
230513 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
Insulation: Motor overall Class shall be F with Class H inverter duty insulated wire.
I.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
2.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 180T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame
sizes smaller than 140T.
2.4
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient 1700 V spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses
produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.
2.
Energy- and NEMA Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F
insulation.
3.
Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.
4.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1.31 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
2.5
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements
of specific motor application:
1.
Permanent-split capacitor.
2.
Split phase.
3.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
4.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal
range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
230513 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Sleeves.
2.
Sleeve-seal systems.
3.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
C.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
coated, with plain ends.
D.
PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
E.
Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2.2
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
following.
1.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
2.
CALPICO, Inc.
3.
Metraflex Company (The).
4.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
5.
Proco Products, Inc.
B.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space
between piping and sleeve.
1.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
2.
Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.
3.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to
sealing elements.
230517 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.3
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and
walls are constructed.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
2.
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
D.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
2.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
3.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
E.
pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for
firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
3.2
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
B.
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make
a watertight seal.
230517 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.3
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
2.
Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping
and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.
1)
3.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal
system.
1)
b.
1)
4.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
b.
5.
Interior Partitions:
a.
b.
Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves.
230517 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Liquid-in-glass thermometers.
2.
Thermowells.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3
A.
1.4
Product certificates.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS
A.
Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:
1.
following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Ashcroft Inc.
b.
Flo Fab inc.
c.
Marsh Bellofram
d.
Miljoco Corporation.
e.
Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.
f.
Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.
g.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
h.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water
i.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
j.
Weksler Glass Thermometer Corp.
Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.
Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.
Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.
Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings
graduated in deg F.
Window: Glass or plastic.
Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.
a.
Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.
Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of
1.5 percent of scale range.
230519 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.2
THERMOWELLS
A.
Thermowells:
1.
2.
Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
3.
Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.
4.
Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.
5.
Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.
6.
External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
7.
Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.
8.
Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
9.
Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.
10.
Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.
11.
Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of
thermometer connection.
B.
Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical
position in piping tees.
B.
Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if
required to match sizes.
C.
Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.
D.
Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.
E.
Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.
F.
Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.
G.
Install thermometers in the following locations:
1.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.
2.
Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and
maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.
3.4
THERMOMETER SCHEDULE
A.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following:
230519 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
B.
Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be the following:
1.
Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.
C.
Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.
3.5
THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE
A.
Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.
230519 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Bronze ball valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
2.
3.
ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.
4.
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
5.
C.
D.
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
E.
F.
G.
1.
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger.
2.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.
H.
Valves in Insulated Piping:
1.
Include 2-inch stem extensions.
2.
Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves
that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.
3.
Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.
I.
J.
Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:
1.
following:
a.
American Valve, Inc.
230523.12 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
b.
c.
d.
Hammond Valve.
e.
Lance Valves.
f.
Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
g.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
j.
Description:
a.
b.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Threaded.
g.
Seats: PTFE.
h.
Stem: Bronze.
i.
j.
Port: Full.
K.
Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Hammond Valve.
d.
Lance Valves.
e.
f.
NIBCO INC.
g.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Threaded.
g.
Seats: PTFE.
h.
Stem: Stainless steel.
i.
Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
j.
Port: Full.
L.
Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Regular Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
DynaQuip Controls.
d.
Hammond Valve.
e.
f.
Lance Valves.
g.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
230523.12 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
M.
j.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Threaded.
g.
Seats: PTFE.
h.
Stem: Bronze.
i.
j.
Port: Regular.
Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Regular Port and Stainless-Steel Trim:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Threaded.
g.
Seats: PTFE.
h.
Stem: Stainless steel.
i.
Ball: Stainless steel, vented.
j.
Port: Regular.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
A.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
B.
Select valves with the following end connections:
230523.12 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.3
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Two piece, full port, bronze with stainless-steel trim.
1.
Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
230523.12 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230523.13 - BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
2.
High-performance butterfly valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
C.
D.
E.
1.
Gear Actuator: For valves NPS 8 and larger.
2.
Handlever: For valves NPS 6 and smaller.
F.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions with extended necks.
2.2
IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
1.
following:
a.
ABZ Valve and Controls.
b.
Bray Controls.
c.
d.
Cooper Cameron Valves.
e.
DeZURIK.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
h.
KITZ Corporation.
i.
j.
NIBCO INC.
k.
Norriseal.
l.
m.
Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
230523.13 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
n.
o.
Tyco Valves & Controls.
p.
Description:
a.
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.
b.
c.
Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
d.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
e.
Seat: EPDM.
f.
Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
g.
Disc: Aluminum bronze.
B.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Ductile-Iron Disc:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Bray Controls.
c.
Center Line; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
d.
e.
f.
DeZURIK.
g.
Hammond Valve.
h.
Jomar Valve.
i.
KITZ Corporation.
j.
k.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
l.
NIBCO INC.
m.
Norriseal.
n.
o.
p.
Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
q.
r.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Seat: EPDM.
f.
g.
Disc: Nickel-plated or -coated ductile iron.
C.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Stainless-Steel Disc:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Bray Controls.
c.
d.
e.
DeZURIK.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
h.
KITZ Corporation.
i.
230523.13 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
2.3
j.
Mueller Steam Specialty.
k.
NIBCO INC.
l.
Norriseal.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Seat: EPDM.
f.
g.
Disc: Stainless steel.
HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
Class 150, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Bray Controls.
c.
d.
DeZURIK.
e.
Flowseal; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Jamesbury; Metso.
h.
i.
NIBCO INC.
j.
Process Development & Control, Inc.
k.
l.
m.
XOMOX; Crane Chempharma Flow Solutions.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
CWP Rating: 285 psig at 100 deg F.
c.
d.
Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel.
e.
Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal.
f.
Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane.
g.
Disc: Carbon steel.
h.
Service: Bidirectional.
B.
Class 300, Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Bray Controls.
c.
d.
DeZURIK.
e.
Flowseal; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.
230523.13 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
f.
Hammond Valve.
g.
Jamesbury; Metso.
h.
i.
NIBCO INC.
j.
Process Development & Control, Inc.
k.
l.
m.
XOMOX; Crane Chempharma Flow Solutions.
Description:
a.
b.
CWP Rating: 720 psig at 100 deg F.
c.
d.
Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, or ductile iron.
e.
Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal.
f.
Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane.
g.
Disc: Carbon steel.
h.
Service: Bidirectional.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
3.3
A.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,
stainless-steel disc.
2.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat,
stainless-steel disc.
3.
High-Performance Butterfly Valves: [Class 150] [Class 300], single flange.
230523.13 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230523.14 - CHECK VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Bronze lift check valves.
2.
Bronze swing check valves.
3.
Iron swing check valves.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.
2.
3.
4.
ASME B16.18 for solder joint.
5.
C.
D.
E.
F.
2.2
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Hammond Valve.
d.
e.
Jomar Valve.
f.
KITZ Corporation.
g.
Macomb Groups (The).
h.
i.
NIBCO INC.
j.
Powell Valves.
230523.14 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
k.
l.
m.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: Bronze.
B.
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
KITZ Corporation.
e.
f.
NIBCO INC.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: PTFE.
C.
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
KITZ Corporation.
e.
f.
g.
NIBCO INC.
h.
i.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: Bronze.
D.
1.
following:
a.
230523.14 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
2.3
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ends: Threaded.
f.
Disc: PTFE.
IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
KITZ Corporation.
e.
Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.
f.
g.
h.
NIBCO INC.
i.
Powell Valves.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.
c.
NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.
d.
Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
e.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
f.
Ends: Flanged.
g.
Trim: Bronze.
h.
Gasket: Asbestos free.
B.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats:
1.
following:
a.
b.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Flanged.
g.
Trim: Composition.
h.
Seat Ring: Bronze.
230523.14 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
i.
j.
k.
C.
2.4
Disc Holder: Bronze.
Disc: PTFE.
Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
g.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Flanged.
g.
Trim: Bronze.
h.
IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL
A.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring-Closure Control:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a.
NIBCO INC.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Ends: Flanged.
g.
Trim: Bronze.
h.
i.
Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring.
B.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever and Weight-Closure Control:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Hammond Valve.
c.
d.
e.
NIBCO INC.
f.
g.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
230523.14 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and weight.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
3.2
ADJUSTING
A.
3.3
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
b.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with
spring; metal-seat check valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules.
2.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules.
3.
4.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules.
3.4
A.
1.
Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.
2.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B.
230523.14 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged
ends.
Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever
and spring.
STEAM-CONDENSATE VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
1.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
B.
1.
Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged
ends.
2.
Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
3.
Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring.
230523.14 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
2.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
3.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
4.
Fastener systems.
5.
Equipment supports.
A.
1.3
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems, system contents, and test water.
2.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
3.
Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
3.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
4.
5.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
B.
Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
230529 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.2
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
2.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength
and vapor barrier.
B.
Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or
ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
C.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
D.
For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
E.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air
temperature.
2.4
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and
building materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
2.5
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.6
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
230529 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
2.7
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
PIPE AND DUCT STANDS
A.
General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of
manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
B.
Compact Pipe and Duct Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or Vshaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C.
Low-Type, Single Pipe and Duct Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof
installation without membrane penetration.
D.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for
2.
Base: Plastic.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
4.
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support.
E.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:
1.
Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for
2.
Bases: One or more; plastic.
3.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
4.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
5.
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
F.
Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe and Duct Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from
structural-steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent
stationary roof curb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
2.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
C.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
230529 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
2.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
F.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
G.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
I.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and
larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;
fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
J.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
K.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
L.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
a.
3.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
a.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
c.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
d.
e.
5.
Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of
length at least as long as protective shield.
6.
Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
230529 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.2
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3.
Remove welding flux immediately.
4.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.6
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
230529 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments
for general service applications.
F.
Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for
hostile environment applications.
G.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping
and tubing.
H.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
I.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
J.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
3.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes
NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
4.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
6.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
7.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
8.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
9.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
K.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
2.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
L.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
2.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
M.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
230529 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
c.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
N.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
1.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to
prevent crushing insulation.
3.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
O.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches.
2.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
3.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
P.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
Q.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
230529 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Elastomeric isolation pads.
2.
Elastomeric isolation mounts.
3.
Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.
4.
Open-spring isolators.
5.
Housed-spring isolators.
6.
Restrained-spring isolators.
7.
Housed-restrained-spring isolators.
8.
Pipe-riser resilient supports.
9.
Resilient pipe guides.
10.
Elastomeric hangers.
11.
Spring hangers.
12.
Snubbers.
13.
Restraint channel bracings.
14.
Restraint cables.
15.
Seismic-restraint accessories.
16.
Mechanical anchor bolts.
A.
Wind-Restraint Loading:
1.
Basic Wind Speed: As per AHJ.
2.
Building Classification Category: IV.
3.
Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component projected
on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of
normal.
B.
Seismic-Restraint Loading:
1.
Site Class as Defined in ASCE, Section 9.4.
2.
Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.
3.
Category I:
a.
Buildings and other structures that represent a low hazard to human life in the
event of failure including, but not limited to: Agricultural facilities, certain temporary
facilities, minor storage facilities.
4.
Category II:
a.
All buildings and other structures except those listed in Categories I, III, and IV.
5.
Category III:
a.
Buildings and other structures that represent a substantial hazard to human life in
the event of failure including, but not limited to:
1)
Buildings and other structures where more than 300 people congregate in
one area.
2)
Buildings and other structures with day care facilities with capacity greater
than 150.
3)
Buildings and other structures with elementary school or secondary school
facilities with capacity greater than 250.
4)
Buildings and other structures with a capacity greater than 500 for colleges
or adult education facilities.
230548 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5)
6.
7.
8.
C.
Health care facilities with a capacity of 50 or more resident patients but not
having surgery or emergency treatment facilities.
6)
Jails and detention facilities.
7)
Power generating stations and other public utility facilities not included in
Category IV.
b.
Buildings and other structures not included in Category IV (including, but not
limited to, facilities that manufacturer, process, handle, store, use or dispose of
such substances as hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, hazardous waste, or
explosives) containing sufficient quantities of hazardous materials to be dangerous
to the public if released.
Category IV:
a.
Buildings and other structures designated as essential facilities including, but not
limited to:
1)
Hospitals and other health care facilities having surgery or emergency
treatment facilities.
2)
Fire, rescue, ambulance, and police stations and emergency vehicle
garages.
3)
Designated earthquake, hurricane, or other emergency shelters.
4)
Designated emergency prepardness, communication, and operation centers
and other facilities required for emergency response.
5)
Power generating stations and other public utility facilities required in an
emergency.
6)
Ancillary structures (including, but not limited to, communication towers, fuel
storage tanks, cooling towers, electrical substation structures, fire water
storage tanks or other structures housing or supporting water, or other firesuppression material or equipment) required for operation of Category IV
structures during an emergency.
7)
Aviation control towers, air traffic control centers, and emergency aircraft
hangers.
8)
Water storage facilities and pump structures required to maintain water
pressure for fire suppression.
9)
Buildings and other structures having critical national defense functions.
b.
Buildings and other structures (including, but not limited to, facilities that
manufacturer, process, handle, store, use, or dispose of such substances as
hazardous fuels, hazardous chemicals, hazardous waste, or explosives) containing
extremely hazardous materials where the quantity of the material exceeds a
threshold quantity established by the authority having jurisdiction.
c.
Component Importance Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
d.
Component Response Modification Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
e.
Component Amplification Factor: As per ASCE, Section 9.6.
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): As per ASCE,
Section 9.4
Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: As per ASCE, Section 9.4.
1.
Install full line size flexible pipe connectors at the inlet and outlet of each pump, cooling
tower, condenser, chiller, coiling connections and where shown on the drawings. All
connectors shall be suitable for use at the temperature, pressure, and service
encountered at the point of installation and operation. End fitting connectors shall
conform to the pipefitting schedule. Control rods or protective braid must be used to limit
elongation to 3/8 inch. Flexible connectors shall not be required for suspended in-line
pumps.
230548 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
Unless otherwise specified, all mechanical equipment, pipe, and duct shall be restrained
to resist seismic forces. Restraints shall maintain equipment, piping and duct work in a
captive position. Restraint devices shall be designed and selected to meet the seismic
requirements as defined in the latest issue of the IBC or local jurisdiction building code.
Equipment importance factors are determined. As follows:
Ip = 1.5
Life-safety component is required to function after an earthquake.
Ip = 1.5
Component contains hazardous or flammable material.
Ip = 1.5
Storage racks in occupancies open to the general public (e.g., warehouse
retail stores).
Ip = 1.0
All other components.
D.
Seismic Restraint Shall Not Be Required for the Following:
1.
Rigidly floor mounted remove HVAC components in all seismic design categories, where
Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections between the components and associated duct work,
piping and conduit are provided, that are mounted at 4 feet or less above a floor level and
weight 400 pounds or less and are not critical to the continued operation of the structure.
Suspended, wall mounted and flexibly mounted equipment are not included in this
exclusion.
2.
Hanging, wall mounted, and flexibly supported HVAC components that weigh 20 pounds
or less, where Ip = 1.0 and flexible connections are provided between the components
and associated duct work, piping and conduit.
3.
Piping supported by individual clevis hangers where the distance, as measured from the
top of the pipe to the supporting structure, is less than 12 inches for the entire pipe run
and the pipe can accommodate the expected deflections. Trapeze or double rod hangers
where the distance from the top of the trapeze or support to the structure is less than 12
inches for the entire run. Hanger rods shall not be constructed in a manner that would
subject the rod to bending moments (swivel, eye bolt, or vibration isolation hanger
connection to structure).
4.
screwed connections) designated as having an Ip = 1.5 and a nominal pipe size of 1 inch
or less where provisions are made to protect the piping from impact or to avoid the
impact of larger piping or other mechanical equipment. Note, any combination of piping
supported on a trapeze where the total weight exceeds 10 pounds per foot must be
braced.
5.
screwed connections) and limited deformability piping (cast iron, FRP, PVC) designated
with an Ip = 1.0 and a nominal pipe size of 1-inch and less in the mechanical equipment
room, or 2-inch and less outside the mechanical equipment room.
6.
PVC or other plastic or fiberglass vent piping.
E.
Manufacturer’s Responsibilities:
1.
Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
2.
Provide piping, ductwork and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as
scheduled or specified.
3.
Provide installation instructions and shop drawings for all materials supplied under this
section of the specifications.
4.
Provide calculations to determine restraint loads resulting from seismic forces presented
in local building code. Seismic calculations shall be certified by a licensed engineer in
the employ of the seismic equipment manufacturer with a minimum 5 years experience.
Provide calculations for all floor or roof-mounted equipment 400 pounds or greater (20
pounds or greater for Ip = 1.5), all suspended or wall mounted equipment 20 pounds or
greater, and vibration isolated equipment 20 pounds or greater.
5.
Seismic restraint load ratings must be certified and substantiated by testing or
calculations under direct control of a registered professional engineer.
230548 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
1.3
Calculations and restraint device submittal drawings shall specify anchor bolt type,
embedment, concrete compressive strength, minimum spacing between anchors, and
minimum distances of anchors from concrete edges. Concrete anchor locations shall not
be near edges, stress joints, or an existing fracture. All bolts shall be ASTM A307 or
better.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation and seismic-restraint device.
1.
Include design calculations and details for selecting vibration isolators and seismic
restraints complying with performance requirements, design criteria, and analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1.4
A.
B.
C.
Submit shop drawings of all isolators, seismic restraints and calculations provided.
D.
The manufacturer of vibration isolation products shall submit the following data for each piece of
isolated equipment; clearly identified equipment tag, quantity and size of vibration isolators and
seismic restraints for each piece of rotating isolated equipment. Submittals for mountings and
hangers incorporating springs shall include spring diameter and free height, rated deflections,
and solid load. Submittals for bases shall clearly identify locations for all mountings as well as all
locations for attachment points of the equipment to the mounting base. Submittals shall
include seismic calculations signed and checked by a qualified licensed engineer in the employ
of the manufacturer of the vibration isolators. Catalog cut sheets and installation instructions
shall be included for each type of isolation mounting or seismic restraint used on equipment
being isolated.
E.
Submit quality assurance procedures as required under paragraph H at time of isolator/seismic
submittals. Submittal must be stamped by a registered professional engineer who is
responsible for the seismic restraint design. All vibration isolation/seismic submittals not
complying with this certification will be rejected.
F.
Provide shop drawings indicating location of all cable restraints required for pipe and ductwork.
Drawings must be stamped by manufacturer’s registered professional engineer.
G.
Mechanical equipment manufacturers shall provide certification that their equipment is capable
of resisting expected seismic loads without failure. Equipment manufacturers shall provide
suitable attachment points and/or instructions for attaching seismic restraints.
H.
Provide a certification from the seismic design engineer that the seismic restraints will comply
with the applicable code requirements. Certification must be stamped by a registered
profession engineer.
I.
Provide a Certificate of Completion from the manufacturer’s representative upon completion of
the job.
230548 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC Utah State Amendments unless
requirements in this Section are more stringent.
B.
C.
Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall
bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or
preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum
seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based
on calculations. If preapproved ratings are unavailable, submittals based on independent testing
are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismicrestraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
D.
Manufacturer must be a member of the Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers
Association (VISCMA).
E.
Steel components shall be cleaned and painted with industrial enamel. All nuts, bolts and
washers shall be zinc-electroplated. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of
welding slag and primed with zinc-chromate or metal etching primer.
F.
All isolators, bases and seismic restraints exposed to the weather shall utilize cadmium-plated,
epoxy coat or PVC coated springs and hot dipped galvanized steel components. Nuts, bolts
and washers may be zinc-electroplated. Isolators for outdoor mounted equipment shall provide
adequate restraint for the greater of either wind loads required by local codes or withstand a
minimum of 30 pounds per square foot applied to any exposed surface of the equipment.
G.
Provide a written quality control procedure that outlines complete compliance of attachment of
cabling restraints to brackets. For swaged connections, provide a gage to verify swage. For
screw/clamp connection, provide torque values for attachment fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS
A.
Elastomeric Isolation Pads:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform loading
over pad area.
3.
Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.
4.
Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.
5.
Surface Pattern: Smooth pattern.
230548 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
2.2
Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.
Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.
ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A.
2.3
Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Mounting Plates:
a.
Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and
threaded with threaded studs or bolts.
b.
Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to
support structure.
3.
material.
RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS
A.
2.4
Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Description: All-directional isolator with seismic restraints containing two separate and
opposing elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment
hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.
a.
Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.
b.
material.
OPEN-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
230548 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Baseplates: Factory-drilled steel plate for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator
pad attached to the underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to
fasten and level equipment.
HOUSED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
2.6
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators in Two-Part Telescoping Housing:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators.
a.
b.
Top housing with attachment and leveling bolt.
RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS
A.
Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
230548 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.7
g.
h.
i.
Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight
being removed.
a.
Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to
the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.
b.
Top plate with threaded mounting holes.
c.
Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.
Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.
HOUSED-RESTRAINED-SPRING
A.
2.8
ISOLATORS
Freestanding, Steel, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint in Two-Part
Telescoping Housing:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
elastomeric material and enclosing the spring isolators. Housings are equipped with
adjustable snubbers to limit vertical movement.
a.
b.
Threaded top housing with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level
equipment.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT
A.
Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a
minimum 1/2-inch- thick neoprene.
1.
Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical
travel in both directions.
2.
Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psigon isolation material providing equal isolation in all
directions.
230548 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.9
RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement
separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.
1.
Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable
to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet
location requirements.
ELASTOMERIC HANGERS
Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an
opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.
3.
Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric
material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel
contact.
SPRING HANGERS
Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in Compression:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Amber Booth ISAT
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a
maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing
isolation efficiency.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced
cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.
8.
Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower
threaded rod.
230548 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
9.
2.12
Self-centering hanger-rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support
spring coil.
SNUBBERS
A.
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Description: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts,
and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.
1.
Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or
female-wedge type.
2.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.
3.
Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch-thick resilient cushion.
2.13
RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS
A.
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
4.
Unistrut.
B.
Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel channels
with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the
other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; rated in tension,
compression, and torsion forces.
2.14
RESTRAINT CABLES
A.
following:
1.
2.
Loos & Co., Inc.
3.
B.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables. End connections made of steel
assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; with
a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.
2.15
A.
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
TOLCO.
230548 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
C.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid
equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.
D.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and
size of attachment devices used.
E.
Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant
neoprene, with a flat washer face.
F.
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel
for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with
strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS
A.
Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application
by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.
B.
Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings
to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.
C.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength is adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within
specified loading limits.
3.2
VIBRATION CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment
attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and
formwork specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
B.
Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or
ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.
C.
Comply with requirements in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs,
equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
D.
Equipment Restraints:
1.
Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate
snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and
supporting structure.
2.
Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance
between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.
3.
Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service
member of ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component.
E.
Piping Restraints:
1.
Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.
230548 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
of 80 feet o.c.
F.
G.
ICC-ES that provides required submittals for component.
H.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
I.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
J.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
K.
Drilled-in Anchors:
1.
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.
Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are
encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and
telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.
2.
design strength.
3.
4.
5.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior
applications.
3.3
ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION
A.
3.4
Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or
branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate
with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one
supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in
Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
C.
1.
Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.
Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to
restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at
least seven days' advance notice.
230548 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary
load-spreading members.
Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by
Architect.
Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.
Measure isolator restraint clearance.
Measure isolator deflection.
Verify snubber minimum clearances.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.
B.
Adjust limit stops on restrained-spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.
After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during
normal operation.
230548 - 13
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Equipment labels.
2.
Pipe labels.
3.
Valve tags.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Valve numbering scheme.
C.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
following:
a.
Brady Corporation.
b.
c.
d.
Champion America.
e.
f.
Emedco.
g.
h.
LEM Products Inc.
i.
Marking Services, Inc.
j.
2.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
3.
Letter Color: White.
4.
Background Color: Black.
5.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
6.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
7.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches,
1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for
greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the
size of principal lettering.
8.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel self-tapping screws.
9.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, capacity
rating information, the panel and circuit from which the equipment is processed.
230553 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
2.2
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond
paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and
title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
PIPE LABELS
A.
following:
1.
Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.
2.
Brady Corporation.
3.
4.
5.
Champion America.
6.
7.
Emedco.
8.
9.
LEM Products Inc.
10.
Marking Sevices Inc.
11.
B.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction.
1.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2.
Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.
2.3
VALVE TAGS
A.
Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4 inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2
inch numbers.
1.
Tag Material: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch, minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
2.
Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain.
B.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2 by 11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate
valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve
(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed or modulating) and vibrations for
identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.
1.
Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.
230553 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
B.
Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings
in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels,
and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
Near each valve and control device.
2.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
3.
Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible
enclosures.
4.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
C.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.
2.
Natural Gas Piping: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.
3.4
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering
hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use
fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following paragraphs:
1.
Valve-Tag Size and Shape:
a.
Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
b.
Natural Gas: 1-1/2 inches round.
2.
Valve-Tag Colors:
a.
Toxic and Corrosive Fluids: Black letters on a safety-orange background.
b.
Flammable Fluids: Black letters on a safety-yellow background.
230553 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
c.
d.
e.
f.
Combustible Fluids: White letters on a safety-brown background.
Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background.
Compressed Air: White letters on a safety-blue background.
Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a
safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background and white
letters on a safety-black background.
230553 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230594 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC – AIR/HYDRONIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
Constant-volume air systems.
b.
Variable-air-volume systems.
2.
Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a.
Constant-flow hydronic systems.
b.
Variable-flow hydronic systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3
A.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 15 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB
strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.
B.
Certified TAB reports.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.
1.
TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.
2.
TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB
as a TAB technician.
B.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
2.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
C.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
E.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air
Balancing."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC – AIR/HYDRONIC
230594 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3
- "System Balancing."
G.
Acceptable Test and Balance Companies
1.
BTC Services
2.
Bonneville Test and Balance
3.
Flo Rite, Inc.
4.
RS Analysis
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Section 233113
"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all
or part of a system.
2.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
230594 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with
indicated perforations.
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing
fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
2.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
8.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
3.3
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and in this Section.
1.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
2.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
E.
Fan Systems:
1.
Include labor and material for one (1) pulley and belt change per fan system.
230594 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaustair dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the
total airflow.
2.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
d.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
3.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
4.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
5.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
230594 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated
speed. Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans,
belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fanmotor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling,
full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum
required brake horsepower.
B.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
C.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
D.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
1.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.6
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point
airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units
equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
2.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
3.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make
this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
230594 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.7
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
Record final fan-performance data.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to
end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate.
Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
2.
Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3.
Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.
4.
Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.
5.
Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at
fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal
valves are kept open.
6.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7.
Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so
motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
3.8
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement
pumps:
1.
Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read
pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for
differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow
and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.
a.
If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval
from Architect and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic Pumps."
2.
Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the
pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve
until indicated water flow is achieved.
a.
Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in
overload conditions.
3.
Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the
system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake
horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual
amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.
230594 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B.
Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as
designed.
C.
Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open
position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
E.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
G.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
2.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated
flow.
3.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H.
Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump
heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.
I.
Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.
J.
Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
3.10
Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at
maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic
systems.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
2.
Motor horsepower rating.
3.
Motor rpm.
4.
Efficiency rating.
5.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation.
Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number,
and nameplate data.
230594 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.11
PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A.
Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.
B.
Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and leaving-steam
pressure, temperature, and flow.
3.12
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
2.
Water flow rate.
3.
Water pressure drop.
4.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6.
Airflow.
7.
Air pressure drop.
B.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each gas heat exchanger.
C.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:
1.
2.
Airflow.
3.
Air pressure drop.
4.
Inlet steam pressure.
D.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1.
2.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3.
Airflow.
4.
Air pressure drop.
5.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.13
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A.
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
2.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
3.
Check the refrigerant charge.
4.
Check the condition of filters.
5.
Check the condition of coils.
6.
Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
7.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
B.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
Verify the following:
1.
New filters are installed.
2.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
3.
Drain pans are clean.
4.
Fans are clean.
230594 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
C.
3.14
A.
3.15
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1.
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
3.
If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
4.
Balance each air outlet.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
2.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
3.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: Prepare weekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and
each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.16
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
2.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
B.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
Pump curves.
2.
Fan curves.
3.
Manufacturers' test data.
4.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
C.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
Title page.
230594 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
D.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
Indicated versus final performance.
b.
Notable characteristics of systems.
c.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b.
Conditions of filters.
c.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
e.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
f.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2.
Water and steam flow rates.
3.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5.
Terminal units.
6.
Balancing stations.
7.
Position of balancing devices.
230594 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
Indoor, unlined supply and outdoor air.
2.
Indoor, supply and return located in unconditioned space.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
2.
Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
3.
Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct Insulation
Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating
materials shall be applied.
B.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
E.
2.2
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
ADHESIVES
A.
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
1.
a.
Company; CP-127.
b.
c.
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
2.
3.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
C.
seams and joints.
1.
a.
Company; CP-82.
b.
c.
Company; 85-50.
d.
2.
3.
2.3
SEALANTS
A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
2.4
A.
2.5
1.
TAPES
A.
2.6
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2)
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
c.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
d.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
2.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened
to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
1)
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch-thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
d.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.
2)
GEMCO; Peel & Press.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
c.
d.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2)
GEMCO; R-150.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
GEMCO.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
A.
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
dry state.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.
2.
3.
J.
K.
1.
2.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
5.
at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
thickness.
M.
N.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.3
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
4.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through wall penetrations.
1.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install
insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with
joint sealant.
3.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least
2 inches.
4.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves
to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
E.
1.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.
2.
3.4
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 100 percent coverage of duct surfaces.
2.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of
vertical ducts as follows:
a.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.5
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c.
each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
f.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
For ducts with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor
barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by
removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to
adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install
vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic,
and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
b.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At
end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
A.
B.
3.6
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
Indoor, unlined supply and return air.
2.
Indoor, supply and return located in unconditioned space.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
2.
Flexible connectors.
3.
4.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.7
INDOOR DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Supply-Air Duct Insulation (lined): Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft.
nominal density.
B.
Supply Air Duct Insulation (unlined): Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-LB/CU ft
nominal display.
C.
Return-Air Duct Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal
density.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230716 - HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated:
1.
Air separators.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
2.
Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket
requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
b.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
e.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
C.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II
or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is
2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x
230716 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"
Article.
1.
a.
CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap.
b.
Johns Manville; MicroFlex.
c.
Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation.
d.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex.
e.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.
2.2
ADHESIVES
A.
B.
1.
a.
Company; CP-127.
b.
c.
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
2.
3.
C.
seams and joints.
1.
a.
Company; CP-82.
b.
c.
Company; 85-50.
d.
2.
3.
2.3
SEALANTS
A.
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
6.
230716 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
7.
2.4
A.
2.5
1.
TAPES
A.
2.6
1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Width: 3 inches.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
2)
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
c.
d.
2.
Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened
to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely
in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place.
a.
1)
GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.
b.
Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
c.
Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation
indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.
230716 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
d.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers, Series.
2)
GEMCO; Peel & Press.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.
b.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
c.
d.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
1)
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
2)
GEMCO; R-150.
3)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
4)
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
b.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
GEMCO.
2)
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
3.2
A.
free of voids throughout the length of equipment.
B.
for each item of equipment as specified in insulation system schedules.
230716 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
dry state.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket,
arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
J.
K.
1.
2.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches] o.c.
a.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
5.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints.
L.
thickness.
M.
N.
O.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
230716 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.3
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION
A.
3.4
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation
with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit
area, for 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.
2.
Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including
contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end
joints.
3.
Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4.
Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on
sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a.
Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b.
Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service
temperature and with substrate.
c.
On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions.
d.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
e.
Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks
and vessels.
f.
Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5.
Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band
material compatible with insulation materials.
6.
Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and
where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing
insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut
with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around
equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two
circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer
periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from
the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles
along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this
network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7.
Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches.
8.
Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,
handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection.
9.
Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and
nameplates.
10.
For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,
joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
FINISHES
A.
Equipment Insulation with ASJ, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint
system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
230716 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
B.
3.5
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection
of the completed Work.
A.
B.
Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the
"Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate
to determine compliance.
C.
3.6
EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.
C.
Heating-Hot-Water Air-Separator Insulation: Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 2 inches thick.
3.7
INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor’s option.
230716 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1.
Heating hot-water piping.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
2.
Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,
mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
C.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
2.2
ADHESIVES
A.
B.
1.
a.
Company; CP-127.
230719 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
b.
c.
2.
3.
C.
2.3
Company; 85-60/85-70.
d.
seams and joints.
1.
a.
Company; CP-82.
b.
c.
Company; 85-50.
d.
2.
3.
SEALANTS
A.
2.4
1.
a.
Company; CP-76.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Color: White.
6.
7.
A.
2.5
1.
TAPES
A.
1.
a.
b.
230719 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.6
c.
d.
Width: 3 inches.
SECUREMENTS
A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements
for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
3.2
A.
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
dry state.
D.
E.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
H.
I.
J.
1.
230719 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
L.
1.
2.
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal
seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps
with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4.
5.
at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
thickness.
N.
O.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Manholes.
5.
Handholes.
6.
Cleanouts.
3.3
PENETRATIONS
A.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
C.
230719 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.4
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same
material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
3.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
4.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve
stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
6.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
8.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
9.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
230719 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
3.5
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
2.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except
divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe
insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe
insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in
two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
5.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
2.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
3.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
4.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
3.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at
least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
available.
2.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
available.
2.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
230719 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
3.6
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FINISHES
A.
Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system
identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123
"Interior Painting."
1.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material
and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.
a.
Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
B.
Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection
of the completed Work.
C.
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
3.7
A.
B.
1.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded
fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two
locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of
flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"
Article.
C.
3.8
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
2.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
3.9
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 220 Deg F and below:
1.
NPS 1.5 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
230719 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC - BACNET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B.
See Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that relate
to this Section.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each control device indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Schematic flow diagrams.
2.
Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.
3.
Details of control panel faces.
4.
Damper schedule.
5.
Valve schedule.
6.
DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control
diagrams.
7.
Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.
1.3
A.
1.4
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Software and firmware operational documentation.
1.5
GENERAL SUBMITTALS
A.
The following shall be submitted for approval:
1.
Provide 6 copies of submittals.
2.
Data sheets for all control systems and components.
3.
Valve schedules, showing sizes, configuration capacity and location of all equipment.
4.
Control system drawings containing pertinent data to provide a functional operating
system, including a sequence of operation. Detailed shop drawings may be submitted in
an as installed form upon project completion.
B.
Drawings:
1.
After completion of contract, the Supplier shall submit review drawings, installation and
operation instruction and a recommended spare parts list.
2.
Drawings shall be standard sizes (24 inches x 36 inches) or (11 inches x 17 inches).
3.
Provide three copies of as installed drawings.
C.
System documentation by the Vendor shall include the following as a minimum:
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.6
System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.
Input/Output point and alarm point summary listing.
Electrical drawings showing all system internal and external connection points, terminal
block layouts and terminal identification.
Manufacturer’s instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance and operation of
all purchased items.
Overall system operation and maintenance instructions, including preventive
maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.
Complete recommended spare parts list.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is an authorized representative, a certified
installer, or an approved installer of the automatic control system manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
C.
Comply with NFPA 90A, “Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.”
D.
Totally native BACnet-based system, including an operators workstation using Microsoft
Windows 7 Professional as the operating system and shall be based on a distributed control
system in accordance with this specification. The operator’s workstation, all building controllers,
application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using the protocols and
network standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet. In other words,
all workstations and controllers, including unitary controllers, shall be native BACnet devices. No
gateways shall be used for communication to controllers utilizing a proprietary protocol shall
be acceptable under this section.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
B.
Coordinate equipment with Division 21 Section “Fire Alarm” to achieve compatibility with
equipment that interfaces with that system.
C.
Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section “Motor-Control Centers” to achieve compatibility
with motor starters and annunciation devices.
1.8
SCOPE OF WORK INCLUDED
A.
Furnish a Microsoft Windows based Building Automation and Control system (BACS) in
accordance with this specification section. Items of work included are as follows:
1.
Provide all necessary hardware and software to meet the specified functional
requirements.
2.
Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings and control loop
configuration data from project design data.
3.
Implement the detailed design for all system input/output points, distributed control and
system data bases, graphic displays as selected and approved by owner, logs, and
management reports based on control descriptions, logic drawings, configuration data,
and bid documents.
230900 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
B.
1.9
Design all equipment cabinets, panels, and the data communication network cables
including all associated hardware.
Provide and install all cabinets, panels, and data communication network cables including
all associated hardware.
Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, controllers, and
output devices.
Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator terminals and
peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.
Provide complete specifications for all items supplied by the Vendor from others (such as
printers, instruments, etc.).
Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of
system installation, start-up and commissioning.
Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as describe herein.
Provide as-built documentation, software, and all DDC control logic and all associated
support documentation, software, and all DDC control logic and all associated support
documentation on approved media which accurately represents the final system.
This system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment as hereinafter
specified.
a.
New Boiler and Pumps
b.
Relief Air Systems
c.
New and Existing Rooftop Units
d.
New and Existing VAV Boxes
All control equipment hereinafter specified shall be provided by the Temperature Control
Contractor under this section.
All control equipment shall be manufactured by the temperature control companies listed
in the bidding section of these documents.
Related Work In Other Sections 1.
Examine all sections for work related to work of this section, principle items of which are:
Finishes
Division 09
Mechanical
Division 23
Electrical
Division 26
2.
The following incidental work shall be performed by the designated contractor under the
supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor.
3.
The Plumbing Contractor shall:
a.
Install automatic valves that are specified to the supplied by the Temperature
Control Contractor.
b.
Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow devices and
wells.
4.
The Sheet Metal Contractor shall:
a.
Provide access doors or other approved means of access through ducts for
service to the control equipment.
b.
Install automatic dampers provided by this section.
PERFORMANCE
A.
Approved DDC control equipment and is:
1.
Alerton Technologies, Inc.
a.
Approved Installation Contractors:
1)
ATC Contractors 486-9364
2)
D & L Electric Control 756-3802
230900 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.10
A.
1.11
INSPECTION OF CONDITIONS
Examine related work and surface before starting work of this section. Report to Architect, in
writing conditions which will prevent proper provision of this work. Beginning work of this
section without reporting unsuitable conditions to Architect constitutes acceptance of conditions
by the contractor. Perform and required removal, repair or replacement of this work caused by
unsuitable conditions at no additional cost to owner.
INSTRUCTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
Upon completion of the project, the Temperature Control Contractor shall adjust and validate all
thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, etc. provided under this section.
B.
Instruction manual shall be furnished covering the function and operation of the control system
on the project for use by the owner’s operating personnel. An instruction period lasting not less
than 16 hours shall be provided to completely familiarize operating personnel with the
temperature control system.
1.12
PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED SOFTWARE AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT
A.
Operator’s workstation software shall be Microsoft Windows 7 Professional as the computer
operating system. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) application program
shall be written to communicate specifically utilizing BACnet protocols. Software shall include
password protection, scheduling (including optimum start), alarming, logging of historical data,
full graphics including animation, after hours billing program, demand limiting, full suite of field
engineering tools including graphical programming and applications. Systems using operating
systems other than that described above are strictly prohibited.
B.
Provide any upgrades in Software on a no charge basis for a minimum of 2 years after
completion of the project. These upgrades will not include any upgrades in hardware necessary
for enhancements in the system but will include any maintenance upgrades at no charge.
1.13
PROVIDE ALL TRAINING AS PART OF THIS CONTRACT
A.
Provide application engineering to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment
B.
Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the following:
Modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, execution of
commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3 persons.
C.
Provide on-site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this contract.
D.
Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If applicable,
costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner.
1.14
A.
WEB INTERFACE
General:
1.
BAS supplied shall provide an HTML-5 based access to the system as part of standard
installation. User shall be able to access all displays of real-time data that are part of the
BAS via a standard Web browser. Web browser shall tie into the network via ownersupplied Ethernet network connection. Web-page host shall be a separate device that
resides on the BAS BACnet network, but is not the BAS server for the control system.
BAS server must be a separate computer from the Web-page host device to ensure data
230900 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
and system integrity. The web-page software shall not require a per user licensing fee or
annual fees. The web-page host must be able to support on average 20 simultaneous
users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number of
users.
B.
Browser Technology
1.
Browser shall be standard version of Microsoft IE 11.0 or later. No special vendorsupplied software shall be needed on computers running browser. All displays shall be
viewable and the Web-page host shall directly access real-time data from the BAS
BACnet network. Data shall be displayed in real time and update automatically without
user interaction. User shall be able to change data on displays if logged in with the
appropriate user name and password.
C.
Communications
1.
Web-page hose shall include two Ethernet network connections. One network
connections shall be dedicated to BAS BACnet network and shall be used to gather real
time data from all the BACnet devices that form the BAS. This network shall
communicate via BACnet allowing other projects connected over a WAN. This network
shall also provide the connection to the BAS server for Web page generation.
2.
The second Ethernet connection shall provide the physical connection to the Internet or
an IP-based WAN. It shall be the port that is used for the browser to receive Web pages
and data from the Web-page host. The Web-page hose shall act as a physical barrier
between the BAS network and the WAN or Internet connection that allows the browser to
receive web pages and data. The two separate network connections provide for a
physical barrier to prevent raw BACnet traffic being exposed on the IP network.
3.
The Web-page host shall provide for complete isolation of the IP and BACnet networks
by not routing networking packets between the two networks.
4.
BAS BACnet Ethernet network shall be provided and installed by the BAS supplier.
Owner shall provide and incur any monthly charges of WAN/Internet connection.
D.
Display of Data
1.
Web page graphics shown on browser shall be replicas of the BAS displays. User shall
need no additional training to understand information presented on Web pages when
compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays shall include animation
just as BAS displays. Fans shall turn, pilot lights shall blink, coils shall change colors,
and so on.
2.
Real-time data shall be shown on all browser Web pages. This data must be directly
gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser Web page
displays without any user action. Data on the browser shall automatically refresh as
changes are detected without re-drawing the complete display.
3.
It shall be possible for user from browser Web page to change data if the user is logged
on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new value shall
change digital data. Using pull-down menus or typing in a new value shall change analog
data.
E.
Time Schedule Adjustment
1.
Web access shall allow user to view and edit all schedules in the system. This includes
standard, holiday and event schedules as described in BAS specification. Display of
schedules shall show interaction of all schedules on a single display so user sees an
overview of how all work together. User shall be able to edit schedules from this display.
2.
Display of all 3 schedules must show all ON times for standard, holiday and even
schedules in different colors on a given day. In addition, OFF times for each must also
be shown in additional colors. User shall be able to select from standard calendar what
days are to be scheduled and same display shall show all points and zones affected.
230900 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
User shall be able to set time for one day and selected all days of the week that shall be
affected as a recurrence of that same schedule for that given day.
Schedule list shall show all schedules currently defined. This list shall include all
standard, holiday and event schedules. In addition, user shall be able to select a list that
shows all scheduled points and zones.
F.
Logging of Information
1.
User shall use standard browser technology to view all trend logs in system. User shall
be able to view logged data in tabular form or graphical format. User shall be able to
adjust time interval of logged data viewed and shall be able to adjust y axis of data
viewed in graphical format. User shall also be able to down-load data through the web
interface to local computer. Data shall be in CSV format.
G.
Alarm Handling
1.
Web interface shall display alarms as they occur. User shall be able to acknowledge
alarms using browser technology. In addition, user shall be able to view history of alarm
occurrence over a user selected time frame. In addition, those alarms may be filtered for
viewing per user selected options. A single section shall display all alarms that have not
been acknowledged.
H.
Web Page Generation
1.
Web pages shall be generated automatically from the BAS displays that reside on the
BAS server. User shall access Web-page host via the network and shall initiate a web
page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into Web
pages. The Web pages generated are automatically installed on the Web page host for
access via any computer’s standard browser. Any system that requires use of an HTML
editor for generation of Web pages shall not be considered.
I.
Password Security and Activity Log
1.
Access via Web browser shall utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS
system. User shall be asked to log in once the browser makes connection to Web-page
host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked by the
BAS system. The user shall be able to change only those items that the user has
authority to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the users that
have logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were made using a
browser or via the BAS workstation.
J.
BACnet Communication
1.
Web server shall directly communicate to all devices on the BAS network using BACnet
protocol. No intermediate devices shall be necessary for BACnet communication.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
manufacturers specified.
CONTROL SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Alerton Inc.
230900 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C.
Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface
equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers
operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to
control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via
dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device
depicted by point-and-click graphics.
2.3
BACS EQUIPMENT
A.
Operator Workstation: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:
1.
Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),
integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.
2.
Processor: Intel Core is CPU 530 @ 2.93 GHZ.
3.
Random-Access Memory: 4 GB.
4.
Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 1 GB video memory, with TV out.
5.
Monitor: 17 inches, LCD color.
6.
Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.
7.
Hard-Disk Drive: 1.0 TB.
8.
CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48.
9.
Mouse: Three button, optical.
10.
Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.
11.
Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 with high-speed Internet access.
12.
Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:
a.
Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.
b.
Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.
c.
Print Speed: Minimum of 17 ppm in black and 12 ppm in color.
d.
Application Software.
B.
Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, randomaccess memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and
backup power source.
1.
Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from
other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to
operator workstation.
2.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Global communications.
b.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
c.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
d.
Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.
e.
Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and
controlled environment.
C.
Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,
nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.
1.
Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or
upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.
2.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
Global communications.
b.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
230900 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
c.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation.
D.
I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect
points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1.
Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
2.
Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
3.
Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or
resistance signals.
4.
Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open
or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and
status lights.
5.
Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current
(4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually
adjustable potentiometer.
6.
Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating-type electronic actuators.
7.
Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
E.
Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit
connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current
and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
1.
Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
2.
Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
3.
Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent
overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
4.
Size for 75% maximum of connected load.
F.
Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
1.
Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
2.
Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
3.
Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
4.
Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
2.4
UNITARY CONTROLLERS
A.
2.5
Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating
system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the
application.
1.
Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and
processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable;
memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.
2.
Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share
real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform
scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system
and report failures.
3.
Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.
ANALOG CONTROLLERS
A.
Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and
operated by electric motor.
230900 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning
action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70
deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.
C.
Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for
remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band
and authority.
1.
Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control
readjustment potentiometer.
D.
Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of motor
speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan speed.
Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor up to
minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.
2.6
ELECTRONIC SENSORS
A.
Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.
B.
Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
BEC Controls Corporation.
b.
Ebtron, Inc.
c.
Heat-Timer Corporation.
d.
I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
e.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
f.
RDF Corporation.
2.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
3.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
5.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.
6.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion
length of 2-1/2 inches.
7.
Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.
a.
Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.
b.
Set-Point Indication: Concealed.
c.
Thermometer: Concealed.
d.
Color: White.
e.
Orientation: Vertical.
8.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
9.
Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
C.
RTDs and Transmitters:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
c.
RDF Corporation.
2.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
3.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
4.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected by
temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..
230900 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 feet long, flexible; use where prone to temperature
stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2
inches.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Color: White.
e.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws.
D.
Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
General Eastern Instruments.
c.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d.
ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.
e.
TCS/Basys Controls.
f.
Vaisala.
2.
Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.
3.
Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Color: White.
e.
5.
Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting
plate.
6.
Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,
suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F.
7.
Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent
relative humidity.
E.
Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
General Eastern Instruments.
c.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
d.
e.
TCS/Basys Controls.
f.
Vaisala.
2.
Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input,
and temperature compensated.
a.
Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
b.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
c.
Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg.
d.
Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.
3.
Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for
service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.
230900 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction,
suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear
output 4 to 20 mA.
Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with
suitable scale range and differential.
Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system;
linear output 4 to 20 mA.
F.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Color: White.
5.
G.
Room sensor accessories include the following:
1.
Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.
2.
Guards: Locking, solid metal, ventilated.
3.
Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.
H.
Zone Temperature Sensor – Micro Touch:
1.
Sensor shall contain override switch, electronic sensor, setpoint bias lever and jack for
connection to Digital Display zone sensor for troubleshooting. The operator shall
program the time of on after hours override operation from 0.0, no override, to 9.9 hours
in 0. hour increments. Push buttons are to remain inactive until zone is in the after hours
mode.
2.
Setpoint bias shall be via labeled bias lever. Maximum bias shall be plus or minus 3
degrees F.
3.
Override switch shall be located under sensor housing and shall not be visible to user.
I.
Zone Temperature Sensor – Microset II:
1.
Sensor shall contain override switch, electronic sensor, setpoint bias lever and jack for
connection to Digital Display zone sensor for troubleshooting. The operator shall
program the time of an after hours override operation from 0.0, no override, to 9.9 hours
in 0. hour increments. Push buttons are to remain inactive until zone is in the after hours
mode.
2.
Setpoint bias shall be via labeled up/down buttons. Maximums bias shall be plus or
minus 3 degrees F.
3.
Override switch shall be located on sensor housing.
4.
Digital LCD display shows setpoint, room and outside air temperature.
J.
Zone Temperature Sensor – Tamper-Resistant:
1.
Sensor shall consist of plain face, tamper-proof wall sensor with thermistor mounted on
back and jack for connection to Digital Display zone sensor for troubleshooting.
2.
Resistance: 10 Kohms at 77°F.
3.
Operating Range: 32-158 °F.
4.
Finish: Brushed stainless steel.
2.7
STATUS SENSORS
A.
Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
range of 0- to 5-inch wg.
230900 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable
pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.
C.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core
transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated
motor current.
D.
Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered
transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.
E.
Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and
current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with maximum
2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.
F.
Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match
current and system output requirements.
G.
Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
H.
Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,
stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in
NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
I.T.M. Instruments Inc.
2.8
THERMOSTATS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Erie Controls.
2.
Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.
3.
Heat-Timer Corporation.
4.
Sauter Controls Corporation.
5.
Tekmar control Systems, Inc.
6.
Theben AG-Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.
B.
Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes in
ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.
2.
Bubs in air ducts with flanges and shields.
3.
Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,
extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.
4.
Scale settings and differential setting are clearly visible and adjustable from front of
instruments.
5.
On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by
application.
6.
Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentionmeter coil and wiper assembly
is removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.
C.
Fire-Protection Thermostats: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction; with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at not less than 75 def G above normal
maximum operating temperature, and the following:
1.
Reset: Manual.
230900 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
Reset: Automatic, with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at central control
panel; with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to indicate operation.
D.
Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with
adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.
E.
Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable
set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent
pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.
F.
Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches or bulb length is
equal to or below set point.
1.
Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
2.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.
G.
Electric, High-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or
automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is
equal to or above setpoint.
1.
Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet.
2.
Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.
H.
Heating/Cooling Valve-Top Thermostats: Proportional acting for proportional flow, with moldedrubber diaphragm, remote-bulb liquid-filled element, direct and reverse acting at minimum
shutoff pressure of 25 psig, and cast housing with position indicator and adjusting know.
2.9
HUMIDISTATS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
MAMAC Systems, Inc.
2.
B.
Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent
throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.
2.10
A.
ACTUATORS
Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating
action or two-position action.
1.
Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
2.
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings
designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches,
or feedback potentiometer.
3.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
4.
Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway
torque of 150 in. x lbf.
5.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
6.
Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
230900 - 13
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
2.11
Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at
rated torque.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.
2.
Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
3.
Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a.
Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
b.
Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
c.
Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.
d.
Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.
e.
Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500
fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.
f.
Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000
fpm: Increase running torque by 2.0.
4.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
5.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
6.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on nonspring-return actuators.
7.
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac.
8.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
9.
Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
10.
Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.
11.
Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.
12.
Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.
2.
Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.
3.
Magnatrol Valve Corporation.
4.
Neles-Jamesbury.
5.
Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division.
6.
Pneuline Controls.
7.
Sauter Controls Corporation.
B.
Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on
maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:
1.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,
flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.
2.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.
a.
Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on
top and bottom.
b.
Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding
surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.
3.
Sizing: 2-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:
a.
Two Position: Line size.
b.
Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure
drop, whichever is more.
230900 - 14
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
c.
4.
5.
Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value
specified above.
Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway valves shall have linear characteristics.
Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide
minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for twoway valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total
system (pump) head.
D.
Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or
ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, fieldreplaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.
1.
Body Style: Wafer.
2.
Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.
3.
Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.
E.
Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1.
Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2.
Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff
head.
3.
Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway valves shall have linear characteristics.
F.
Self-Contained Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,
replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.
1.
Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.
2.
Thermostatic Operator: Liquid-filled integral or remote sensor with integral adjustable dial.
2.12
DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Air Balance Inc.
2.
Air Rite Manufacturing
3.
Greenheck
4.
NCA
5.
TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).
6.
United Enertech Corp.
7.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch-minimum thick,
galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch-minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct
mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch- thick galvanized steel with
maximum blade width of 8 inches and length of 48 inches.
1.
Secure blades to 1/2-inch-diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with
bronze nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends
sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of
every blade.
2.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
3.
Edge Seals: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals and springloaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 8 cfm per sq. ft. of damper
area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper is held by torque of 50 in.
x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 511D.
230900 - 15
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.13
OPERATOR WORKSTATION
A.
General structure of workstation interaction shall be standard client/server relationship. Server
shall be used to archive data and store system database. Clients shall access server for all
archived data. Each client shall include flexibility to access graphics from server or local drive.
Server shall support a minimum of 50 clients simultaneously.
B.
BACnet Conformance:
1.
Operator’s workstation shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP) and Ethernet
BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a native
BACnet device. Operator’s terminal shall comply with the requirements to a BACnet
conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the
following BACnet functional groups:
a.
Clock Functional Group
b.
Event Response Functional Group
c.
Time Master Functional Group
d.
Device Communications
2.
Please refer to Section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a
complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the
functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be
thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools
shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.
3.
Standard BACnet object types accessed by the workstation shall include as a minimum:
Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary Input, Binary Output,
Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification Class, Program and Schedule
object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly
documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be
supplied for working with proprietary information.
4.
The Operator Workstation shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for IP
connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork, while
using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet devices on the
LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs) and campus area
networks (CANs). Workstation shall support Foreign Device Registration to allow
temporary workstation connection to IP network.
C.
Displays:
1.
Operator’s workstation shall display all data associated with project as called out on
drawings and/or object type list supplied. Graphic files shall be created using digital, full
color photographs of system installation, AutoCAD or Visio drawing files or field
installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings. Operator’s workstation
shall display all data using three-dimensional graphic representations of all mechanical
equipment. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text, and dynamic object
data together on each display and shall include animation. Information shall be labeled
with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate engineering units. All
information on any display shall be dynamically updated without any action by the user.
Workstation shall allow user to change all field-resident EMCS functions associated with
the project, such as setpoints, weekly schedules, exception schedules, etc. from any
screen no matter if that screen shows all text or a complete graphic display. This shall be
done without any reference to object addresses or other numeric/mnemonic indications.
2.
All displays and programming shall be generated and customized by the local EMCS
supplier and installer. Systems requiring factory programming for graphics or DDC logic
are specifically prohibited.
3.
Binary objects shall be displayed as ACTIVE/INACTIVE/NULL or with customized text.
Text shall be justified left, right, or center as selected by the user. Also, allow binary
230900 - 16
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
objects to be displayed as individual change-of-state graphic objects on the display
screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each binary object displayed in this
manner shall be assigned up to three graphic files for display when the point is ON, OFF
or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the object’s commanded status when the graphic
item is selected with the system mouse. Similarly, allow the workstation operator to
toggle the binary object’s status by selecting with the mouse a graphic of a switch or light,
for example, which then displays a different graphic (such as an “ON” switch or lighted
lamp). Additionally, allow binary objects to be displayed as an animated graphic.
Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a sequence of multiple graphics to
simulate motion. For example: when a pump is in the OFF condition, display a
stationary graphic of the pump. When the operator selects the pump graphic with the
mouse, the represented objects status is toggled and the graphics of the pump’s impeller
rotates in a time-based animation. The operator shall be able to click on an animated
graphical object or switch it from the OFF position to ON, or ON to OFF. Allow operator
to change graphic file assignment and also create new and original graphics online.
System shall be supplied with a library of standard graphics, which may be used,
unaltered or modified by the operator. Systems that do not allow customization or
creation of new graphic objects by the operator (or with third-party software) shall not be
allowed.
Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input objects
may also be displayed as individual graphic items on the display screen as an overlay to
the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned a minimum of five
graphic files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection and display of these
graphics. As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer would rise and fail
in response to either the room temperature or it’s thermometer would rise and fall in
response to either the room temperature or it’s deviation from the controlling setpoint.
Analog output objects, when selected with the mouse, shall be displayed as a prompted
dialog (text only) box. Selection for display type shall be individual for each object.
Analog object values may be changed by selecting either the “increase” or “decrease”
arrow in the analog object spinner box without using the keypad. Pressing the button on
the right side of the analog object spinner box allows direct entry of an analog value and
accesses various menus where the analog value may be used, such as trendlogs.
Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, where the color of
the defined area changes based on the analog object’s value. For example, an area of a
floor-plan graphic served by a single control zone would change color with respect to the
temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. All editing and area assignment
shall be created or modified online using simple icon tools.
A customized menu label (push-button) shall be used for display selection. Menu items
on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus. Dynamic
point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed on the same display to
allow sub-displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected from viewing
unless operator has appropriate security level. A security level may be assigned to each
display and system object. The menu label shall not appear on the graphic if the operator
does not have the appropriate security level.
A mouse shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the desired item for selection of new
display or to allow the operator to make changes to object data.
Password Protection
1.
Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on.
Access shall be limited to operator’s assigned functions when user is logged on. This
includes displays as outlined above. Each operator’s terminal shall provide security for
200 users minimum. Each user shall have an individual user ID, user name and
password. Entries are alphanumeric characters only and are case sensitive (except for
user ID). User ID shall be 0-8 characters, user name shall be 0-29 characters, and
password shall be 4-8 characters long. Each system user shall be allowed individual
230900 - 17
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
assignment of only those control functions and menu items to which that user requires
access. All passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be adjustable online
at the operator’s terminal. Each user shall also have a set security level, which defines
access to displays and individual objects the user may control. System shall include 10
separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users. System shall include an
Auto Logout Feature that shall automatically logout user when there has been no
keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time period shall be adjustable by
system administrator. Auto logout may be enabled and disabled by system administrator.
Operator terminal shall display message on screen that user is logged out after auto
logout occurs.
E.
Operator Activity Log
1.
Operator Activity Log shall be included with system that tracks all operator changes and
activities. System shall track what is changed in the system, who performed this change,
date, and time of system activity and value of the change before and after operator
activity. Operator shall be able to display all activity, sort the changes by user and also
by operation.
2.
Log shall be gathered and archived to hard drive on operator workstation as needed.
Operator shall be able to export data for display and sorting in a spreadsheet.
3.
Any displayed data, that is changeable by the operator, may be selected using the right
mouse button and the operator activity log shall then be selectable on the screen.
Selection of the operator activity log using this method shall show all operator changes of
just that displayed data.
F.
Scheduling:
1.
Operator’s workstation shall show all information in easy-to-read daily format including
calendar of this month and next. All schedules shall show actual ON/OFF times for day
based on scheduling priority. Priority for scheduling shall be events, holidays and daily
with events being the highest.
2.
Holiday and special event schedules shall display data in calendar format. Operator shall
be able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these calendars.
3.
Operator shall be able to change all information for a given weekly or exception schedule
if logged on with the appropriate security access.
4.
System shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up to schedules. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-down
selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic and
then selecting Schedule.
5.
Scheduling shall include optimum start based on outside air temperature, current
heating/cooling setpoints, indoor temperature and history of previously starts. Each and
every individual zone shall have optimum start time independently calculated based on all
parameters listed. User shall input schedules to set time that occupied setpoint is to be
attained. Optimum start feature shall calculate the startup time needed to match zone
temperature to setpoint. User shall be able to set a limit for the maximum startup time
allowed.
G.
Alarm Indication and Handling
1.
Operator’s workstation shall provide audible, visual and printed means of alarm
indication. The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box regardless of
the application(s) currently running. Printout of alarms shall be sent to the assigned
terminal and port.
2.
System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk
of the system operator’s terminal. Each entry shall include a description of the eventinitiating object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm message of at least
256 characters in length. Entry shall include time and date of alarm occurrence, time and
230900 - 18
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
date of object state return to normal, time and date of alarm acknowledgment and
identification of operator acknowledging alarm.
Alarm messages shall be in user-definable test (English or other specified language) and
shall be entered either at the operator’s terminal or via remote communication.
System shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user
through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-down
selection for start-up or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic
and then selecting alarm setup.
H.
Trendlog Information:
1.
System server shall periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the building
controllers and archive the information Archived files shall be appended with new sample
data, allowing samples to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall
not be allowed, unless limited file size is specified. Samples may be viewed at the
operator’s workstation. Operator shall be able to scroll through all trended data. All
trendlog information shall be displayed in standard engineering units.
2.
Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data.
Software shall be capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display up to ten object
types at the same time in different colors. Graphs shall show object values relative to
time.
3.
Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information. This includes the
information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All input,
output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations shall be
password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all
graphics on which object is displayed.
4.
System shall include a trend Wizard for setup of logs. Wizard shall walk user through all
necessary steps. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for startup, or may be
started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic, and then selecting Trendlogs from
the displayed men.
I.
Energy Log Information
1.
System server shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the
field equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be appended with new
data, allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data shall not
be allowed unless limited file size is specified. Display all energy log information in
standard engineering units.
2.
All data shall be stored in data base file format for direct use by third-party programs.
Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.
3.
Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This includes
the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be logged. All
meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall support using flow and
temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.
4.
System shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and peak
values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly formats. In
each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to view.
J.
Demand Limiting:
1.
System shall include demand limiting program that includes two types of load shedding.
One type of load shedding shall shed/restore equipment in binary fashion based on
energy usage when compared to shed to restore settings. The other type of shedding
shall adjust operator selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based on energy
usage when compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be implemented
independently on each and every zone or piece of equipment connectioned to system.
230900 - 19
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
Binary shedding shall include minimum of 5 priority levels of equipment shedding. All
loads in a given priority level shall be shed before any loads in a higher priority level are
shed. Load shedding within a given priority level shall include two methods. In one the
loads just shed/restored in a linear fashion.
Analog shed program shall generate a ramp that is independently used by each
individual zone or individual control algorithm to raise the appropriate cooling setting and
lower appropriate heating setting to reduce energy usage.
Status of each and every load shed program shall be capable of being displayed on
every operator terminal connected to system. Status of each load assigned to an
individual shed program shall be displayed along with English description of each load.
K.
Tenant Activity:
1.
System shall include program that monitors after-hours overrides by tenants, logs the
data and generates a bill based on usage and rate charged for each tenant space.
Tenant activity program shall be able to assign multiple zones, from a list of every zone
connected to system, to a particular tenant. Every zone is monitored for after-hour
override usage and that data logged in server. Operator may then generate a bill based
on the usage for each tenant and the rate charged for any overtime use.
2.
Configuration shall include entry of the following information for use in logging and billing.
a.
Tenants contact name and address.
b.
One or multiple tenant zones that make up a total tenant space including a
separate billing rate for each separate zone.
c.
Minimum and maximum values and event duration and even limit.
d.
Property management information.
e.
Overall billing rate.
f.
Seasonal adjustments or surcharge to billing rate.
g.
Billing notification type such including, but not limited to printer, file and e-mail.
h.
Billing form template.
3.
Logging shall include recording the following information for each and every tenant event.
a.
Zone description.
b.
Time the event beings.
c.
Total override time.
d.
Limits shall be applied to override time.
4.
A tenant bill shall be generated for a specific period using all the entered configuration
data and the logged data. User with appropriate security level shall be able to view and
override billing information. User shall be able to select a billing period to look to view
and be able to delete events from billing and be able to edit a selected tenant activity
event’s override time.
L.
Configuration/Setup:
1.
Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall
include, but not be limited to, system time, day of the week, date of daylight savings set
forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port and speed, etc. Items
shall be modified using understandable terminology with simple mouse/cursor key
movements.
M.
Field Engineering Tools:
1.
Operator’s workstation software shall include field-engineering tools for programming all
controllers supplied. All controllers shall be programmed using graphical tools that allow
the user to connect function blocks on screen that provide sequencing of all control logic.
Function blocks shall be represented by graphical displays that are easily identified and
distinct from other types of blocks. Graphical programming that uses simple rectangles
and squares is not acceptable.
230900 - 20
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
N.
User shall be able to pick graphical function block from menu and place on screen.
Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be downloaded to
controller without any reentry of data.
Programming tools shall include a real time operation mode. Function blocks shall
display real time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and outputs when in
real time operation. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices and
countdown of timer devices in graphical format.
Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications that include
logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be able to select unit
type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit to be controlled. Supply
minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation software.
Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for automatic detection of devices
connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning of the entire network. This
function shall display device instance, network identification, model number and
description of connected devices. It shall record and display software file loaded into
each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the computers hard drive. If
needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller by selection using the
mouse.
System shall include backup/restore function that will back up entire system to selected
medium and then restore system from that media.
Software:
1.
At the conclusion of project, contractor shall leave with owner a CD ROM that includes
the complete software operation system and project graphics, setpoints, system
parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to completely restore the system in
the case of a computer malfunction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings
and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor.
1.
Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
B.
Install automatic dampers according to Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
C.
Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor
temperatures.
D.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 230553
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
E.
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232116
"Hydronic Piping Specialties."
F.
Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232300
"Refrigerant Piping."
G.
Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and
Section 233116 "Nonmetal Ducts."
230900 - 21
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.2
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
B.
Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
C.
Install signal, communication and control cable according to Section 271500 "Communications
Horizontal Cabling."
1.
Conceal cable and raceway, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit
and piping are exposed.
2.
Install exposed cable in raceway.
3.
Install concealed cable in raceway.
4.
Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
5.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
7.
Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of
piping and equipment.
8.
Wiring in finished areas to be in wiremold. All wiring shall be securely fastened using
nylon wire ties.
9.
All wiring shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner.
10.
Where conduit is installed, provide flexible connection to all vibrating equipment. Flexible
conduit shall be a maximum length of three (3) feet only.
11.
All ATC rough-in boxes shall be identified with the letters “ATC” written across the inside
of the box. In addition, each ATC cover plate shall be painted white with the letters “ATC”
stenciled in black. Surface conduit may be installed as allowed by engineer with color
selected by engineer.
D.
Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic
duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.
E.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
F.
Electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the temperature control
system as herein specified shall be provided by the Temperature Control Contractor unless
specifically shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications to be by the electrical
contractor.
G.
All wiring shall be installed according to the National Electrical Code and local codes.
H.
Wiring and required relays from the building fire alarm panel for fan shutdown shall be furnished
and installed by the Temperature Control Contractor.
3.3
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
230900 - 22
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
2.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3.
Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation
with compatible signal generator.
4.
Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
5.
Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
6.
Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
7.
Test software and hardware interlocks.
C.
DDC Verification:
1.
Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.
2.
Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
3.
Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
4.
Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.
5.
Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and selfcontained pressure regulators.
6.
Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
7.
Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
8.
Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper
blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.
9.
Check DDC system as follows:
a.
Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if
applicable.
b.
Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
c.
Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
d.
Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
D.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Section 017900
"Demonstration and Training."
230900 - 23
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 230993 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B.
See Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and devices
and for submittal requirements.
1.2
HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCE - EXISTING BOILER PLANT
A.
Index control valve CV-3 open and CV-4 closed.
B.
Boilers and pumps to run under existing Johnson Metasys controls and SOO.
HEATING CONTROL SEQUENCE – NEW HE BOILERS
1.3
A.
Index control valve CV-3 closed and CV-4 open.
B.
Heating-Water Supply Temperature Control:
1.
BACS shall monitor heating terminal devices and enable heating system components,
based on heating system demanding indication.
2.
BACS shall modulate hot water boiler in sequence in order to maintain hot water supply
temperature setpoint.
3.
Install complete boiler shutoff switch as required by Utah boiler code.
4.
Display:
a.
Heating-water supply and return temperature.
b.
Heating-water supply temperature set point.
c.
Boiler(s) on-off status.
d.
Boiler(s) on-off indication.
e.
BACnet points.
C.
Heating-Water Supply Temperature/Reset:
1.
Reset hot water heating water supply temperature in linear relationship with demand of
heating terminal devices and components:
a.
190 deg F heating water when system is at maximum demand.
b.
140 deg F heating water when system is at minimum demand.
2.
Display:
a.
Outdoor-air temperature.
b.
Heating-water supply temperature.
c.
Heating-water supply temperature set point.
d.
System demand indication.
D.
Primary Circulating Pump(s):
1.
Enable pump(s) in sequence with hot water boiler(s).
2.
Display:
a.
Outdoor-air temperature.
b.
Operating status of primary circulating pump(s).
E.
Secondary Circulating Pump(s):
230993 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
1.4
Enable secondary hot water pump(s) when primary heating system components are
enabled.
a.
Variable speed pump(s) shall maintain constant pressure differential across main
or branch hydronic system based on 0-10 VDC signal from BACS. Locate 2/3
distance in system from pump(s).
Display:
a.
Pressure differential indication.
b.
Pressure differential setpoint.
c.
Operating status of secondary hot pumps.
TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE
A.
1.5
VAV, Terminal Air Units with Hydronic Coils:
1.
Occupancy:
a.
BACS shall enable based on occupancy schedule.
2.
Room Temperature:
a.
Electronic temperature sensor shall modulate damper (full open to minimum
position) and hot water valve in sequence to maintain space setpoint.
b.
Electronic duct sensor shall modulate hot water valve to maintain discharge air
temperature at 70° (adj.). Reset DAT as required to maintain room setpoint
(VAVR-6 only).
c.
Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor.
d.
Output Device: Electronic damper actuators and control-valve operators.
e.
Action: Modulate damper and valve to maintain temperature.
1)
Sequence damper from full open to minimum position, then valve from
closed to fully open.
2)
Dual minimum required for VAVR-6 only.
3.
Display:
a.
Room/area served.
b.
Room occupied/unoccupied.
c.
Room temperature indication.
d.
Room temperature set point.
e.
Room temperature set point, occupied.
f.
Room temperature set point, unoccupied.
g.
Air-damper position as percent open.
h.
Control-valve position as percent open.
i.
Discharge air temperature.
HUMIDIFIER
A.
Occupancy
1.
BACS shall enable subject to occupancy schedule and status of RT1 or RT2.
2.
Space Humidity:
a.
Humidistat to sense lab humidity and maintain humidity at 50% RH (adj).
b.
Modulate self contained steam humidifier to maintain space humidity setpoint.
c.
Monitor duct humidity and shutoff humidifier on high humidity alarm.
3.
Display:
a.
Humidity setpoint.
b.
Humidity indication.
c.
Duct humidity/alarm
d.
Humidifier status.
e.
Humidifier setting (0-100%).
230993 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.6
VENTILATION SEQUENCES
A.
1.7
Lab Exhaust Fan:
1.
Occupancy:
a.
BACS enables fan subject to occupancy schedule.
b.
Exhaust fan speed modulates subject to duct static pressure sensor.
2.
Display:
a.
Exhaust fan status.
b.
VFD fault.
c.
VFD feedback.
d.
VFD speed.
AIR HANDLER SYSTEMS
A.
Rooftop Air Handling Unit, Variable Volume (HW, CHW) – RT1
1.
General:
a.
The occupancy mode (occupied or unoccupied) shall be determined through a
user-definable time schedule.
b.
Whenever the supply fan is de-energized, as sensed by the status switch, the
outside and exhaust air dampers shall be closed and the return air damper shall be
open, the heating and cooling valves shall be closed or positioned as described
below.
c.
RT1 supply duct isolation damper opens and RT2 supply duct isolation damper
closes.
2.
Occupied Mode:
a.
The supply fan shall be energized. There shall be adjustable minimum on and off
times initially set at 5 min. Safety trips shall override the minimum ON and OFF
times.
b.
There shall be a reset; also discharge air temperature setpoint. The setpoints shall
be initially set at 55°F cooling and heating.
c.
The heating coil valve and cooling coil valve shall modulate in sequence to
maintain supply air temperature setpoint. The cooling valve shall be enabled only
when the fan status is on, the zone is calling for cooling, and cooling is active.
3.
Unoccupied Mode:
a.
The supply fan shall be de-energized except when operations called for as
described below. Outside air dampers shall be closed. Heating and cooling
valves shall be closed as described below.
b.
The supply fan shall cycle on with the outside and dampers closed when there is a
VAV system heating demand indication. When the fan is energized, the heating
valve shall modulate to maintain supply air temperature. The cooling valve shall
be closed. The unit shall cycle to the unoccupied OFF mode when there is no
VAV system heating demand indication.
c.
The supply fan shall cycle on when there is a VAV system cooling demand
indication. When the fan is energized, the cooling valve shall be sequenced to
maintain space temperature. The heating valves shall be closed. The fan unit
shall cycle to the unoccupied OFF mode when there is no VAV system cooling
demand indication.
d.
The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm to minimize the unoccupied warm-up,
or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of
scheduled period.
4.
Supply Air Temperature/Reset:
a.
Reset supply air temperature in linear relationship with demand of cooling terminal
devices and components:
1)
54 deg F supply air when system is at maximum demand.
2)
64 deg F supply air when system is at minimum demand.
230993 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
B.
Safety Shutdowns:
a.
Duct smoke detection, and low temperature limit trips shall de-energized the
supply fan and close the outside air dampers. Manual reset of the tripped device
shall be required to restart the system.
b.
The cooling valve shall open 50% whenever the low temperature limit is on.
c.
The heating valve shall open 100% whenever the supply air temperature is less
than 35°F (adj).
Alarm the Following Conditions:
a.
High zone temp: If the zone temperature is 5°F greater than the cooling setpoint.
b.
Low zone temp: If the zone temperature is 5°F less than the heating setpoint.
c.
Supply fan failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.
d.
Supply fan in hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.
e.
Supply fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit.
f.
High mixed air temp: Mixed air temperature greater than 90°F.
g.
Low mixed air temperature: Mixed air temperature less than 45°F.
h.
High discharge air temp: If the discharge air temperature is greater than setpoint
by 5°F (adj), after the unit has been operating for a minimum of 15 min.
i.
Low discharge air temp: If the discharge air temperature is less than setpoint by 5°
(adj), after the unit has been operating for a minimum of 15 min.
j.
Low humidity.
k.
Filter alarm: If the filter differential pressure switch exceeds its setpoint.
l.
Smoke detection.
m.
Low temperature limit.
Display:
a.
DDC system graphic.
b.
DDC system on-off indication.
c.
DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode.
d.
Outdoor-air-temperature indication.
e.
Outdoor-air-CFM setpoint.
f.
Outdoor-air-CFM indication.
g.
Supply-fan on-off indication.
h.
Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.
i.
Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.
j.
Supply-fan airflow rate.
k.
Supply-fan speed.
l.
Supply duct isolation damper position.
m.
Building static-pressure indication.
n.
Building static-pressure set point.
o.
Prefilter air-pressure-drop indication.
p.
Prefilter low-air-pressure set point.
q.
Prefilter high-air-pressure set point.
r.
Final filter air-pressure-drop indication.
s.
Final filter low-air-pressure set point.
t.
Final filter high-air-pressure set point.
u.
Fan-discharge air-temperature set point.
v.
w.
Heating-coil air-temperature indication.
x.
Heating-coil air-temperature set point.
y.
Heating-coil control-valve position.
z.
Cooling-coil air-temperature indication.
aa.
Cooling-coil control-valve position.
bb.
cc.
Rooftop Air Handling Unit, Variable Volume (GAS, DX) – RT2
230993 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General:
a.
The occupancy mode (occupied or unoccupied) shall be determined through a
user-definable time schedule.
b.
Whenever the supply fan is de-energized, as sensed by the status switch, the
outside and exhaust air dampers shall be closed and the return air damper shall be
open, the heating valve and cooling equipment shall be closed or positioned as
described below.
c.
RT2 supply duct isolation damper opens and RT1 supply duct isolation damper
closes.
Occupied Mode:
a.
The supply fan shall be energized. There shall be adjustable minimum on and off
times initially set at 5 min. Safety trips shall override the minimum ON and OFF
times.
b.
There shall be a reset-able discharge air temperature setpoint. The setpoint shall
be initially set at 55°F.
c.
The gas valve and cooling equipment shall modulate in sequence to maintain
supply air temperature setpoint. The cooling equipment shall be enabled only
when the fan status is on, the zone is calling for cooling, and cooling is active.
Unoccupied Mode:
a.
The supply fan shall be de-energized except when operations called for as
described below. Outside air dampers shall be closed. Gas heating valve and
cooling equipment shall be closed as described below.
b.
The supply fan shall cycle on when there is a VAV system cooling demand
indication. When the fan is energized, the cooling equipment shall be sequenced
to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint. The fan unit shall cycle to the
unoccupied OFF mode when there is no VAV system cooling demand indication.
c.
The unit shall use an optimal start algorithm to minimize the unoccupied warm-up,
or cool-down period while still achieving comfort conditions by the start of
scheduled period.
Supply Air Temperature/Reset:
a.
Reset supply air temperature in linear relationship with demand of cooling terminal
devices and components:
1)
54 deg F supply air when system is at maximum demand.
2)
64 deg F supply air when system is at minimum demand.
Safety Shutdowns:
a.
Duct smoke detection, and low temperature limit trips shall de-energized the
supply fan and close the outside air dampers. Manual reset of the tripped device
shall be required to restart the system.
b.
The gas valve shall open 100% whenever the supply air temperature is less than
35°F (adj).
Alarm the Following Conditions:
a.
High zone temp: If the zone temperature is 5°F greater than the cooling setpoint.
b.
Low zone temp: If the zone temperature is 5°F less than the heating setpoint.
c.
Supply fan failure: Commanded on, but the status is off.
d.
Supply fan in hand: Commanded off, but the status is on.
e.
Supply fan runtime exceeded: Status runtime exceeds a user definable limit.
f.
High mixed air temp: Mixed air temperature greater than 90°F.
g.
Low mixed air temperature: Mixed air temperature less than 45°F.
h.
High discharge air temp: If the discharge air temperature is greater than setpoint
by 5°F (adj), after the unit has been operating for a minimum of 15 min.
i.
Low discharge air temp: If the discharge air temperature is less than setpoint by 5°
(adj), after the unit has been operating for a minimum of 15 min.
j.
Low humidity.
k.
Filter alarm: If the filter differential pressure switch exceeds its setpoint.
l.
Smoke detection.
230993 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
7.
1.8
m.
Low temperature limit.
Display:
a.
BACnet points.
b.
DDC system graphic.
c.
DDC system on-off indication.
d.
DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode.
e.
Outdoor-air-temperature indication.
f.
Outdoor-air-CFM setpoint.
g.
Outdoor-air-CFM indication.
h.
Supply-fan on-off indication.
i.
Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.
j.
Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.
k.
Supply duct isolation damper position.
l.
Supply-fan airflow rate.
m.
Supply-fan speed.
n.
Building static-pressure indication.
o.
Building static-pressure set point.
p.
Prefilter air-pressure-drop indication.
q.
Prefilter low-air-pressure set point.
r.
Prefilter high-air-pressure set point.
s.
Final filter air-pressure-drop indication.
t.
Final filter low-air-pressure set point.
u.
Final filter high-air-pressure set point.
v.
w.
x.
Gas heat air-temperature indication.
y.
Gas heat air-temperature set point.
z.
Gas heat operation indication.
aa.
Heating equipment status.
bb.
Cooling-coil air-temperature indication.
cc.
Cooling equipment status.
dd.
ee.
WEB INTERFACE
A.
BACS supplied shall provide internet-based access to the system. User shall be able to access
al displays of real-time data that are part of the BACS via a standard Web browser. Web
browser shall tie into the network via owner-supplied Ethernet network connection. Web-page
host shall be a separate device that resides on the BACS BACnet network, but is not the BACS
server for the control system. BACS server must be a separate computer from the Web-page
host device to ensure data and system integrity. The web-page software shall not require a per
user licensing fee or annual fees. The web-page host must be able to support on average 50
simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited number
of users.
B.
BACS supplied shall provide owner internet-based access to the system. User shall be able to
access al displays of real-time data that are part of the BACS via a standard Web browser.
Web browser shall tie into the network via owner-supplied Ethernet network connection. Webpage host shall be a separate device that resides on the BACS BACnet network, but is not the
BACS server for the control system. BACS server must be a separate computer from the Webpage host device to ensure data and system integrity. The web-page software shall not require
a per user licensing fee or annual fees. The web-page host must be able to support on average
50 simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate an unlimited
number of users.
230993 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
230993 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2.
Piping specialties.
3.
Piping and tubing joining materials.
4.
Valves.
5.
Pressure regulators.
A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1.
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2.
Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 0.5 psig but not more than 5 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig
or less.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
A.
B.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
B.
C.
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
2.2
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
2.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
3.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
4.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,
adhesive, and PE.
a.
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Appliance Flexible Connectors:
1.
Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24.
2.
Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69.
3.
Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4.
Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5.
Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig.
6.
End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8.
Maximum Length: 48 inches
9.
Flow rates for input BTUH of appliance.
B.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend connection.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
C.
Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.
2.4
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A.
See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.
B.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1.
2.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
3.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
4.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
231123 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
C.
2.5
Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently
marked on valve body.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
following:
a.
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c.
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e.
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
2.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
3.
Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
4.
Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
5.
Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
6.
Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing.
7.
Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
8.
9.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
10.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
1.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
2.
Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3.
Elevation compensator.
4.
End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.
5.
Integral or separate “Y” strainer.
B.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
following:
a.
Actaris.
b.
American Meter Company.
c.
Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d.
Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
e.
Invensys.
f.
Maxitrol Company.
g.
Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
6.
Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
7.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
8.
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
231123 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
2.6
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not
exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1.
following:
a.
Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b.
Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c.
Harper W yman Co.
d.
Maxitrol Company.
e.
SCP, Inc.
2.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
3.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
4.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
5.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
6.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
7.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not
exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
8.
Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
9.
Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
10.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
following:
a.
b.
c.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
d.
Jomar International Ltd.
e.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
f.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
g.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of W atts Water Technologies, Inc.
h.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
c.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply
with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
231123 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit.
C.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
3.
Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
D.
E.
Piping may not enter a building below grade. Per IFGC 404.6.
3.2
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.
B.
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
E.
otherwise.
F.
G.
Locate valves for easy access.
H.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I.
J.
K.
L.
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
M.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at each appliance and at points where condensate may
collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and
emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and
231123 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or
cap.
N.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view as required by AHJ.
P.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
Q.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
R.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment.
S.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
T.
sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.3
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel
tubing or copper connector.
B.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space
adequate for servicing and testing.
C.
Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.
D.
Install seismic valve in 24 inch long pipe section anchored to building wall at each end.
3.4
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints:
1.
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
2.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
3.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
4.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
5.
231123 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
3.5
Welded Joints:
1.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
2.
Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
3.
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
A.
Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices
specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
B.
Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers
and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
sizes:
1.
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2.
NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
B.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical
to inlet of each appliance.
3.7
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
3.8
Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
piping and valve identification.
A.
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to the International Fuel Gas Code and
B.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
231123 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.9
OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
3.10
Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
2.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
3.
Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2 inches and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
B.
Aboveground, distribution piping NPS 2.5 inches and larger shall be the following:
1.
C.
Aboveground piping installed in plenums and concealed locations shall be the following:
1.
3.11
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
B.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
2.
Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.
231123 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:
1.
Hot-water heating piping.
2.
Makeup-water piping.
3.
Condensate-drain piping.
4.
Blowdown-drain piping.
5.
Air-vent piping.
6.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
7.
Drain piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.
2.
RTRP and RTRF with adhesive.
3.
Pressure-seal fittings.
4.
Chemical treatment.
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.
2.
Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
3.
Condensate-Drain Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
4.
Blowdown-Drain Piping: 80 psig at 200 deg F.
5.
Air-Vent Piping: 80 psig at 200 deg F.
6.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which
it is attached.
7.
Drain Piping: 150 Deg F.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and
wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping
Applications" Article.
C.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping
D.
Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping
E.
Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised
ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.
F.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1.
Material Group: 1.1.
2.
End Connections: Butt welding.
3.
Facings: Raised face.
G.
Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:
1.
following:
a.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated
steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders
constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle,
or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
3.
Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM or nitrile gasket of central cavity
pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure
grooved pipe and fittings.
2.3
PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping
1.
CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe;
ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.
B.
PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, with wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications"
Article.
1.
PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe;
ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.
2.4
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
a.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
D.
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining
copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G.
1.
a.
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less.
b.
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less.
c.
Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the
California Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
H.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2.5
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:
1.
following:
a.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
b.
IPEX USA LLC.
c.
KBI (King Bros. Industries).
d.
Viega LLC.
2.
One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one solvent-cement-joint
end of material and wall thickness to match plastic pipe material.
B.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:
1.
following:
a.
Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.
b.
IPEX USA LLC.
c.
KBI (King Bros. Industries).
d.
NIBCO INC.
2.
Brass or copper end, solvent-cement-joint end of material and wall thickness to match
plastic pipe material, rubber gasket, and threaded union.
2.6
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
2.7
following:
a.
A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.
b.
c.
d.
HART Industrial Unions, LLC.
e.
Jomar Valve.
f.
Matco-Norca.
g.
h.
Wilkins.
i.
Description:
a.
b.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
c.
BYPASS CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A.
Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill
opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Threaded fill cap with gasket
seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the
vessel.
1.
Capacity: 2 gal.
2.
Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
Schedule 40, Grade B, Type 96 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges
and flange fittings; and threaded joints.
B.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1.
Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,
mechanical joints.
C.
Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:
1.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
D.
Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
E.
Condensate-Drain Piping (fuel fired): Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solventwelded joints.
F.
Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the
service in which blowdown drain is installed.
G.
Air-Vent Piping:
1.
Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
3.2
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods
as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic
transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written
instructions.
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination
Drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
otherwise.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including and equipped with the following:
1.
Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
2.
Install water meter in makeup-water supply.
3.
Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise
indicated on Drawings.
4.
Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder inlet.
5.
Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.
K.
pressure.
L.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
M.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
N.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
O.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
P.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
Q.
Install valves according to "Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC Piping,"
Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check Valves for
HVAC Piping".
R.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
S.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
T.
Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for
identifying piping.
U.
sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
V.
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC
Piping."
W.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."
3.3
DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION
A.
Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.
B.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.
C.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits.
D.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.
3.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with requirements in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements
for maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for
seismic restraints.
C.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
2.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
3.
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
4.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
5.
Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
6.
On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from
scratching pipe.
D.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet.
E.
Plastic Piping Hanger Spacing: Space hangers according to pipe manufacturer's written
instructions for service conditions. Avoid point loading. Space and install hangers with the
fewest practical rigid anchor points.
F.
Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
3.5
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
B.
assembly.
C.
D.
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
E.
1.
2.
F.
G.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
1.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
2.
3.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join ASTM D 1785 schedule number, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule number PVC pipe and
4.
H.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe
wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
I.
Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and
procedure, and brazed joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.6
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply
with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.7
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A.
Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and
detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a
minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.
B.
Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year
of operation.
3.8
A.
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
2.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
3.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
4.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
5.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
B.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due
to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
2.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains
installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
3.
Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
4.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."
5.
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
6.
Prepare written report of testing.
C.
Perform the following before operating the system:
1.
Open manual valves fully.
2.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 232116 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:
1.
Hot-water heating piping.
2.
Makeup-water piping.
3.
Condensate-drain piping.
4.
Blowdown-drain piping.
5.
Air-vent piping.
6.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for
calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
2.
Air-control devices.
3.
Hydronic specialties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.
Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200 deg F.
2.
Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
3.
Condensate-Drain Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.
4.
Blowdown-Drain Piping: 80 psig at 200 deg F.
5.
Air-Vent Piping: 80 psig at 200 deg F.
6.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which
it is attached.
VALVES
A.
Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12 "Ball Valves for HVAC
Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.14 "Check
Valves for HVAC Piping,"
232116 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 230923.11 "Control Valves".
C.
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1.
following:
a.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b.
Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand.
c.
Flow Design, Inc.
d.
Gerand Engineering Co.
e.
Griswold Controls.
f.
HCI; Hydronics Components Inc.
g.
NuTech Hydronic Specialty Products.
h.
Oventrop Corporation.
i.
Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.
j.
Tunstall Corporation.
k.
Victaulic Company.
2.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
3.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
4.
Plug: Resin.
5.
Seat: PTFE.
6.
End Connections: Threaded or socket.
7.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
8.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
9.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
10.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
D.
Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled.
1.
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Body: Bronze or brass.
3.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
4.
Seat: Brass.
5.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
6.
Diaphragm: EPT.
7.
Low inlet-pressure check valve.
8.
Inlet Strainer: Stainless steel, removable without system shutdown.
9.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
10.
Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,
with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
E.
Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled.
1.
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
c.
d.
e.
232116 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
f.
Body: Bronze or brass.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
Seat: Brass.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
Diaphragm: EPT.
Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
Inlet Strainer: Stainless Steel, removable without system shutdown.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
AIR-CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Diaphragm - Type Expansion Tanks:
1.
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
c.
2.
Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125 psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum
operating temperature. Factory test after taps are fabricated and supports installed and
are labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division
1.
3.
Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to
maintain required expansion capacity.
4.
Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.
B.
Tangential-Type Air Separators:
1.
following:
a.
AMTROL, Inc.
b.
c.
Bell & Gossett; a Zylen brand
2.
Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125 minimum working pressure
and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.
3.
Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed direct released air into
expansion tank.
4.
Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged
connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
5.
Blowdown Connection: Threaded.
6.
Size: Match system flow capacity.
7.
Provide with high capacity automatic air vent.
2.4
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
2.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for
NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3.
Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket.
4.
B.
Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
232116 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket.
End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection
B.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
D.
Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.
E.
Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to
the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.
F.
Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.
3.2
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B.
Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent
upward slope toward tank.
C.
Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 (DN 50)
and larger.
D.
Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that
tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.
232116 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of pump.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each pump.
1.
Show pump layout and connections.
2.
Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and
other anchorages.
3.
Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A.
following:
1.
2.
Crane Pumps & Systems.
3.
Flo Fab inc.
4.
Grundfos Pumps Corporation.
5.
ITT Corporation.
6.
PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, USA.
7.
Peerless Pump Company.
8.
Thrush Co. Inc.
B.
Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, inline pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor
shafts mounted horizontally or vertically.
C.
Pump Construction:
1.
Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet and
threaded companion-flange connections.
2.
Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,
and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match
specified performance.
3.
Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
D.
Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a
stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft
between motor and seal.
Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphiteimpregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and
bronze packing gland.
Pump Bearings: Oil lubricated; bronze-journal or thrust type.
Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing.
1.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
2.
Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
a.
Enclosure: Open, dripproof.
b.
Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.
c.
Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings.
d.
Unusual Service Conditions:
e.
Efficiency: Premium efficient.
f.
Service Factor: 1.15.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PUMP INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with HI 1.4.
B.
Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,
couplings, and accessories.
C.
Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and
weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
D.
Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric
hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.
1.
Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
2.
Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529
"Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
3.2
ALIGNMENT
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.
B.
Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor
shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between
motor feet and base frame.
C.
Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
3.3
After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill
baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in
place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 232213 "Steam and Condensate
Heating Piping" and Section 232216 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."
B.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C.
Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.
D.
Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.
E.
Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.
F.
Install check valve and throttling valve with memory stop on discharge side of pumps.
G.
Install Y-type strainer, suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
H.
Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or
install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.
I.
Install check valve and ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.
J.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
K.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
HYDRONIC PUMPS
232123 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes the following HVAC water-treatment systems:
1.
Manual chemical-feed equipment and controls.
2.
Chemical treatment test equipment.
3.
Chemicals.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories for each type of product.
A.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
following:
1.
Ampion Corp.
2.
Anderson Chemical Company.
3.
Aqua-Chem, Inc.
4.
Barclay Water Management, Inc.
5.
Boland Trane Services.
6.
Cascade Water Services, Inc.
7.
Earthwise Environmental Inc.
8.
GE Betz.
9.
GE Osmonics.
10.
General Electric Company; GE W ater & Process Technologies.
11.
H-O-H Water Technology, Inc.
12.
Metro Group, Inc. (The).
13.
Nalco; an Ecolab company.
14.
Power Engineering Inc.
15.
Sonitec-Vortisand inc.
16.
Watcon, Inc.
17.
Water Services Inc.
18.
West Inc.
232500 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.2
CHEMICALS
A.
Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water
quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WATER ANALYSIS
A.
3.2
Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases level and plumb. Maintain
manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require
servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.
B.
Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building
structure. See Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" for seismic restraints.
C.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
D.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.
E.
Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping
with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."
F.
Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty
valves are specified in Section 230523.11 "Globe Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.12
"Ball Valves for HVAC Piping," Section 230523.13 "Butterfly Valves for HVAC Piping," and
Section 230523.15 "Gate Valves for HVAC Piping."
G.
See Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in
makeup-water connections to potable-water systems.
H.
Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical
equipment.
I.
Systems."
J.
Cables."
3.3
A.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and
electrical connections.
232500 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been
cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing
chemicals for water-treatment system.
Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the
preliminary phase of HVAC system's startup procedures.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test
results are achieved.
Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute
defects.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.
B.
Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment
systems and equipment.
232500 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 232513 - WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes the following water treatment for closed-loop hydronic systems:
1.
Manual chemical-feed equipment.
2.
Chemicals.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories for each type of product.
A.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
2.2
A.
2.3
Closed hydronic systems shall have the following water qualities:
1.
pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.
2.
"P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.
3.
Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.
4.
Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.
5.
Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.
6.
TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.
7.
Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
8.
Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.
9.
Microbiological Limits:
a.
Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL.
b.
Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
c.
Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.
d.
Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
e.
Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.
AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A.
Water Meter:
1.
AWWA C700, oscillating-piston, magnetic-drive, totalization meter.
2.
Body: Bronze.
3.
Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.
4.
Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: 3 psig.
5.
Registration: Gallons or cubic feet.
232513 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.4
End Connections: Threaded.
Controls: Flow-control switch with normally open contacts; rated for maximum 10 A, 250V ac; and that will close at adjustable increments of total flow.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
Chemical Solution Tanks:
CHEMICALS
A.
Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are
compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water
quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Refer to 232500.
A.
Refer to 232500.
232513 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
2.
Round ducts and fittings.
3.
Sheet metal materials.
4.
Sealants and gaskets.
5.
Hangers and supports.
6.
Seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
2.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
1.2
A.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the
effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.
2.
Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
3.
Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
B.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
2.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
3.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.6
FIELD VERIFICATION
A.
No ductwork shall be fabricated without first field verifying that the available space under actual
job conditions will permit installation of the ductwork without structural or other conflicts. Duct
sizes that require on the job modification due to unforeseen obstructions shall be made without
any additional cost to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
Transverse joints in ducts with one side larger than 24”: TDF.
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2
ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
b.
Lindab Inc.
c.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
d.
MKT Metal Manufacturing, Inc.
e.
SEMCO Incorporated.
f.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
g.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h.
Superior Sheet Metal
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
Flexible."
1.
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 24 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
Flexible." Seams on non-residential projects shall be spiral type.
1.
Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
D.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.3
DUCT LINER
A.
2.4
Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
CertainTeed Corp: Insulation Group.
b.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
c.
Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
d.
Owens Corning.
2.
Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent
erosion of glass fibers.
a.
Thickness: 1 inch.
b.
Thermal conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
c.
Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.
d.
Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.
e.
Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,
mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner
when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in
duct.
1)
Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb-tensile, dead-load test
perpendicular to duct wall.
2)
Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without
projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
3)
Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard
classification of duct liner system.
3.
Install liner in all square and rectangular low pressure supply, return, mixed air, exhaust
and transfer air ducts and plenums. Duct dimensions on drawings are clear inside
dimensions.
APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct
liner is prohibited.
B.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal noising.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless
duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
F.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
G.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12
inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 189 inches
longitudinally.
H.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or “Z” profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at
the following locations:
1.
Fan discharges.
2.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
3.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than 2500
fpm or where indicated.
I.
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for
outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer
shell without compressing insulation.
1.
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23
percent.
J.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane
assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means
are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts; screws, rivets or welds.
2.5
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction
methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks,
roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed
ducts.
D.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the
"Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B,
No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.
E.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for
concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.
F.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black
and galvanized.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
G.
2.6
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1.
Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone
activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.
2.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
3.
Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
4.
Water resistant.
5.
Mold and mildew resistant.
6.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
7.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
8.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
9.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
10.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
11.
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
C.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
Application Method: Brush on.
2.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
3.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
4.
Water resistant.
5.
Mold and mildew resistant.
6.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
7.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
8.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
9.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
D.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
2.
Type: S.
3.
Grade: NS.
4.
Class: 25.
5.
Use: O.
6.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
7.
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
E.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
2.7
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch
wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
3.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods
with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
2.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
3.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
2.8
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES
A.
following:
1.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
2.
Hilti, Inc.
3.
4.
Loos & Co., Inc.
5.
6.
TOLCO.
7.
Unistrut; an Atkore International company.
B.
General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications
shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of
components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
C.
Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel
channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment
to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching
components and corrosion-resistant coating.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
D.
Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of
cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable
service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.
E.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted
F.
Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts
with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings
and Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed
to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction,"
Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.2
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
B.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.
Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
3.
Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
4.
Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
5.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
6.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:
Seal Class A.
7.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
8.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
9.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class C.
10.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal
Class B.
11.
Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
12.
Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
3.3
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5,
"Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
4.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
5.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.4
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE
INSTALLATION
A.
Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against
seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
of 80 feet o.c.
2.
B.
Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and
seismic loads.
C.
D.
Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.
E.
the ICC Evaluation Service.
F.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to
structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.
G.
Drilling for and Setting Anchors:
1.
anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify
the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling.
Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and
gas lines.
2.
design strength.
3.
4.
5.
Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for
applications exposed to weather.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch,
outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class
if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
2.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
3.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
2.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
D.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
2.
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
3.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air
wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers,
filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
4.
Coils and related components.
5.
Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
6.
Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
7.
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
2.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
3.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
4.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated
or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
5.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
6.
Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
7.
Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus
is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions
after removal of surface deposits and debris.
3.7
START UP
A.
3.8
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for
HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated:
B.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, Terminal Units and rooftop
units (0-2000 CFM):
a.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
c.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 10
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
d.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.
c.
d.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Return Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units and
rooftop units (0-2000 CFM):
a.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.
c.
d.
2.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units and rooftop units greater than 2000 CFM:
a.
b.
Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.
c.
d.
3.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
2.
PVC-Coated Ducts:
a.
Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
b.
Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
3.
Stainless-Steel Ducts:
a.
Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
b.
Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.
4.
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.
E.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
Mitered Type RE 4 with vanes.
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1)
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
c.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2.
and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 11
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
a.
3.
F.
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered
Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately
fewer segments.
1)
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments
for 90-degree elbow.
2)
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments
3)
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments
4)
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
b.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
c.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
Branch Configuration:
1.
and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
b.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
2.
Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees."
Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
c.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 12
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Manual volume dampers.
2.
Fire dampers.
3.
Flange connectors.
4.
Turning vanes.
5.
Duct-mounted access doors.
6.
Flexible connectors.
7.
Flexible ducts.
8.
Duct accessory hardware.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B.
Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish
for concealed ducts and No. 4 finish for exposed ducts.
C.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
D.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
233300 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
2.3
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
following:
a.
Aire Technologies.
b.
Air Rite Inc.
c.
American Warming and Ventilating; a Mestek Architectural Group company.
d.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
e.
Flex-Tek Group.
f.
Greenheck Fan Corporation
g.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
h.
Nailor Industries Inc.
i.
NCA
j.
Pottorff.
k.
Ruskin Company.
l.
Trox USA Inc.
m.
Vent Products Co., Inc.
2.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
3.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4.
Frames:
a.
Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.
b.
Mitered and welded corners.
c.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
5.
Blades:
a.
Multiple or single blade.
b.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
6.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
7.
Bearings:
a.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
b.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
8.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
B.
Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
following:
a.
b.
Greenheck Fan Corporation
c.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
d.
e.
Pottorff.
f.
Ruskin Company.
g.
Trox USA Inc.
h.
2.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
3.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
4.
Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for
attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
233300 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
Blades:
a.
Multiple or single blade.
b.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
c.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
d.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet.
e.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.
Blade Axles: Stainless steel.
Bearings:
a.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
b.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
C.
Jackshaft:
1.
Size: 0.5-inch diameter.
2.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
3.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
D.
Damper Hardware:
1.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
2.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
3.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
E.
Damper Regulators:
1.
Locking Quadrant Damper Regulators:
a.
Approved Products:
1)
Duro Dyna: KS-385.
2)
Dyn Air: QPS-385.
3)
Elgen Manufacturing: EQR-4.
4)
Ventfabrics: Ventline 555.
5)
Young: No. 1.
2.
Concealed Ceiling Damper Regulators:
a.
Approved Products:
1)
Cain.
2)
Duro Dyne.
3)
Elgen Manufacturing.
4)
Metco Inc.
5)
Ventfabrics: 666 Ventlok.
6)
Young: 301.
3.
Dampers above removable ceiling and in Mechanical Rooms shall have locking quadrant
on bottom or side of duct. Otherwise, furnish with concealed ceiling damper regulator
and cover plate.
2.4
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
following:
1.
Aire Technologies.
2.
3.
Arrow United Industries.
4.
Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc.
233300 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
Pottorff.
Prefco.
Ruskin Company.
Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-thick
galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.39 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.
2.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter
mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply
with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F. rated, fusible links.
2.5
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A.
following:
1.
CL W ARD & Family Inc.
2.
3.
Hardcast, Inc.
4.
Nexus PDQ.
5.
B.
Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
233300 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.6
TURNING VANES
A.
following:
1.
Aero-Dyne Sound Control Co.
2.
3.
4.
Duro Dyne Inc.
5.
6.
METALAIRE, Inc.
7.
SEMCO Incorporated.
8.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction: Single wall.
2.7
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
following:
1.
Aire Technologies.
2.
3.
Cesco Products; a divsion of MESTEK, Inc.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
9.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
10.
11.
Pottorff.
12.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
13.
B.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
Double wall, rectangular.
b.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
c.
Vision panel.
d.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches.
233300 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
3.
2.8
e.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
b.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
c.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
d.
Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression
latches with outside and inside handles.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
A.
following:
1.
3M.
2.
3.
Flame Gard, Inc.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D.
Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum
2000 deg F.
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.9
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
following:
1.
2.
Duro Dyne Inc.
3.
4.
Hardcast, Inc.
5.
JP Lamborn Co.
6.
Thermaflex Inc.
7.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
8.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
233300 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
F.
2.10
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,
synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.
2.
Tensile Strength: 225 lbf/inch in the warp and 300 lbf/inch in the filling.
3.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
following:
1.
2.
Flex-Tek Group.
3.
Hart and Cooley
4.
JP Lamborn Co.
5.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
6.
Quietflex.
7.
B.
Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,
spring-steel wire.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 2.0-inch wg negative.
2.
Maximum Air Velocity: 6000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.
C.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene
vapor-barrier film.
1.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
2.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
3.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
4.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
2.
Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
2.11
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and
gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit
duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
2.12
HE BRANCH TAP
A.
Factory-manufactured rectangular-to-round 45 degrees leading tap fabricated of 24 ga zinccoated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 653, with G-90
coating.
B.
One inch wide mounting flange with die formed corner clips, pre-punches mounting holes, and
adhesive coated gasket.
233300 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
C.
Manual Volume Damper:
1.
Single blade, 22 ga minimum.
2.
3/8 inch minimum square rod with brass damper bearings at each end.
3.
Heavy duty locking quadrant on1-1/2 inch high stand-off mountain bracket attached to
side of round duct.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct
Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories
in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts,
and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat
channel.
1.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
2.
Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
D.
Damper Regulators:
1.
Install concealed ceiling damper regulators.
a.
Paint cover plate to match ceiling tile.
b.
Do not install damper regulators for dampers located directly above removable
ceilings or in Mechanical Rooms.
2.
Provide each take-off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch.
a.
Anchor dampers securely to duct.
b.
Install dampers in main ducts within insulation.
c.
Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of
duct, and be securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet
metal.
d.
Where concealed ceiling damper regulators are installed, provide cover plate.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire dampers according to UL listing.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
On both sides of duct coils.
2.
Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
3.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
4.
At drain pans and seals.
5.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and
equipment.
6.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
233300 - 8
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from
dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
2.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
3.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
4.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
6.
Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
K.
Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 36-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible ducts to change directions. Flexible ductwork shall be installed above accessible
ceiling only.
N.
Connect diffusers to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in
place. Flexible ductwork shall be installed above accessible ceilings only.
O.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
P.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2
A.
1.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
3.
Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper
heat-response device is installed.
4.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
233300 - 9
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of air terminal unit.
B.
Shop Drawings: For air terminal units.
1.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.
2.
Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3.
4.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic
restraints, and vibration isolation.
1.3
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
B.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
C.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Section 6 - Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning."
2.2
SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
following:
1.
Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.
2.
ENVIRO-TEC; by Johnson Controls, Inc.
3.
Johnson Controls.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Krueger.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Price Industries.
Titus.
Trane.
Tuttle & Bailey.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a
protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.040-inch-thick galvanized steel, single wall.
1.
Casing Liner: Comply with requirements in "Casing Liner" Article for duct liner.
2.
Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.
3.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections, size matching inlet size.
4.
Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket.
5.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
D.
Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows
for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from zero
to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static
pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.
E.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1.
Maximum Damper Leakage: AHRI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
2.
Damper Position: Normally open.
F.
bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, and rated for a minimum working
pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual
air vent and drain valve.
G.
Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls system specified in
Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."
2.3
A.
Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to AHRI 880.
1.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows, coil type, and AHRI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 5,
"Hangers and Supports" and with Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and
for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where
used.
3.2
TERMINAL UNIT INSTALLATION
A.
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
C.
Where installing piping adjacent to air terminal unit, allow space for service and maintenance.
D.
Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping" and
Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties," and connect heating coils to supply with shutoff
valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union
or flange.
E.
Comply with requirements in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for connecting ducts to air terminal
units.
F.
Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."
G.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum
factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.
3.3
A.
representative:
1.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until
no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
B.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
233600 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Flat panel filters.
2.
Pleated panel filters.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASHRAE Compliance:
1.
Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality";
Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
2.
Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 for arrestance and ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of
testing and rating air-filter units.
B.
Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLEATED PANEL FILTERS
A.
Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type,
disposable air filters with holding frames.
1.
following:
a.
AAF International.
b.
Airguard.
c.
Camfil Farr.
d.
Flanders-Precisionaire.
e.
Koch Filter Corporation.
f.
Purafil, Inc.
B.
Filter Unit Class: UL 900, Class 2.
C.
Media: Interlaced glass or synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive.
1.
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.
3.
Media shall be coated with an antimicrobial agent.
4.
Separators shall be bonded to the media to maintain pleat configuration.
234100 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Welded wire grid shall be on downstream side to maintain pleat.
Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass.
Support members on upstream and downstream sides to maintain pleat spacing.
Merv Rating: As scheduled when tested according to ASHRAE 52.2.
Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer sealed or bonded to the
media.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding
frames to substrate.
B.
Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
C.
Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace
temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters.
D.
Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations.
3.2
A.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
B.
1.
Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating.
C.
Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
3.3
CLEANING
A.
After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air-handling and airdistribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.
234100 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 235216 - CONDENSING BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes gas-fired, water-jacketed condensing boilers, trim, and accessories for
generating hot water.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
1.
Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and mounting details.
2.
Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3.
A.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For boiler, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
C.
D.
Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers:
a.
Leakage and Materials: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five
years from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Warranty Period for Water-Tube Condensing Boilers: 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
3.
Warranty Period for Water-Jacketed Condensing Boilers:
a.
Leakage and Materials: Eight years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
Heat Exchanger Damaged by Thermal Stress and Corrosion: Nonprorated for five
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code.
C.
ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and
Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."
D.
DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B, Appendix N.
E.
UL Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with UL 795. Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F.
CSA Compliance: Test boilers for compliance with CSA B51.
G.
Mounting Base: For securing boiler to concrete base.
1.
Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to boiler
pressure vessel, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC" when mounting base is anchored to building structure.
2.2
WATER-JACKETED CONDENSING BOILERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
Advanced Thermal Hydronics
2.
Viessmann Manufacturing Co. (US) Inc.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, water-jacketed condensing boiler with
heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket; flue-gas
vent; water supply, return, and condensate drain connections; and controls. Water-heating
service only.
C.
Heat Exchanger: Cast iron primary and secondary combustion chamber.
D.
Burner: Natural gas, forced draft; swing-open front and burner observation port.
E.
Blower: Centrifugal fan, forced draft. Include prepurge and postpurge of the combustion
chamber.
1.
Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency
requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for
HVAC Equipment."
a.
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated; if not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
F.
Gas Train: Combination gas valve with manual shutoff and pressure regulator. Include 100
percent safety shutoff with electronic flame supervision.
G.
Ignition: Electric-spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff with electronic flame
supervision.
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
2.3
Casing:
1.
Jacket: Sheet metal, with snap-in or interlocking closures.
2.
Control Compartment Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1A.
3.
Finish: Powder-coated protective finish.
4.
Insulation: Minimum 4-inch-thick, mineral-fiber insulation surrounding the heat exchanger.
5.
Combustion-Air Connections: Inlet and vent duct collars.
TRIM
A.
Include devices sized to comply with ASME B31.1.
B.
Aquastat Controllers: Operating, firing rate, and high limit.
C.
Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated.
D.
Pressure and Temperature Gage: Minimum 3-1/2-inch-diameter, combination water-pressure
and -temperature gage. Gages shall have operating-pressure and -temperature ranges, so
normal operating range is about 50 percent of full range.
E.
Boiler Air Vent: Automatic.
F.
Drain Valve: Minimum NPS 3/4 hose-end gate valve.
2.4
CONTROLS
A.
Refer to Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC" and
Section 230993.11 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC DDC."
B.
Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:
1.
Control transformer.
2.
Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable.
3.
Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and field-installed panel to control
burner firing rate to reset supply-water temperature inversely with outside-air
temperature. At 0 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 200
deg F; at 60 deg F outside-air temperature, set supply-water temperature at 140 deg F.
a.
Include automatic, alternating-firing sequence for multiple boilers to ensure
maximum system efficiency throughout the load range and to provide equal
runtime for boilers.
C.
Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit
burner operation.
1.
High Cutoff: Manual reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler
design temperature.
2.
Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water.
Cutoff switch shall be manual-reset type.
3.
Blocked Inlet Safety Switch: Manual-reset pressure switch field mounted on boiler
combustion-air inlet.
D.
Building Automation System Interface: Factory install hardware and software to enable building
automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.
1.
Hardwired Points:
a.
Monitoring: On/off status, common trouble alarm.
b.
Control: On/off operation, hot-water-supply temperature set-point adjustment.
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
2.
ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) A communication interface with building automation system shall
enable building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler
from an operator workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed,
locally at boiler control panel shall be available through building automation system.
NAME
HeatDemand
SetpointTimer
Setpoint
OAResetEnable
OARSetpoint
OARHighWaterTemp
OARHighAirTemp
OAARLowWaterTemp
SetMonth
SetDay
SetYear
SetHour
SetMinute
SetSecond
SetWeekday
SetClock
DHWSetpoint
BoilersOn
Modulation
HeaderTemp
SupplyTemp
ReturnTemp
OutsideTemp
Spare1
Spare2
Month
Day
Year
Hour
Minute
Second
Weekday
DHW Temp
Boiler01_16_Runtime
Boiler01_16_Cycles
Boiler01_16_SupplyTemp
Boiler01_16_ReturnTemp
Boiler##_Disabled
Boiler##_LocalOverride
Boiler##_Alarm
Boiler##_Failed
Boiler##_MemberError
Boiler##_Running
Boiler##_PumpOn
Boiler##_Spare4Interlock
CONDENSING BOILERS
DATA TYPE
binary_variable1
analog_variable1
analog_variable2
binary_variable3
analog_variable4
analog_variable5
analog_variable6
analog_variable7
analog_variable8
analog_variable9
analog_variable10
analog_variable11
analog_variable12
analog_variable13
analog_variable14
binary_variable3
analog_variable15
analog_Input1
analog_Input2
analog_Input3
analog_Input4
analog_Input5
analog_Input6
analog_Input7
analog_Input8
analog_Input9
analog_Input10
analog_Input11
analog_Input12
analog_Input13
analog_Input14
analog_Input15
analog_Input16
analog_Input48…63
analog_Input64…79
analog_Input80…95
analog_Input96…111
binary_variable1000
binary_variable1001
binary_variable1002
binary_variable1003
binary_variable1004
binary_variable1005
binary_variable1006
binary_variable1011
235216 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
Boiler##_FlowInterlock
Boiler##_MainValve
Boiler##_BlowerOn
Boiler##_IgnitionAlarm
Boiler##_HighLimit
Boiler##_SoftwareOperator
Boiler##_HeaderSensorNA
Boiler##_SupplySensorNA
Boiler##_ReturnSensorNA
Boiler##_OutsideSensorNA
Boiler##_DamperProve1
Boiler##_Master
Boiler##_Detected
Boiler##_AAHighFire
Boiler##_HeatDemand
Boiler_4to20Remote
Boiler01_16_DHWTemp
Boiler01_Modulation
OperatingSetpoint
Boiler##_DHWSensorEnabled
Boiler##_DamperProve2
Boiler##_BlowerFault
Boiler##_BlockedInlet
Boiler##_BlockedFlue
Boiler##_DHWInput
Boiler##_LowFireInput
Boiler##_DHWFault
Boiler##_DHWSensorNA
Boiler##_OpLimitClamp
2.5
binary_variable1013
binary_variable1015
binary_variable1017
binary_variable1018
binary_variable1020
binary_variable1023
binary_variable1024
binary_variable1025
binary_variable1026
binary_variable1027
binary_variable1029
binary_variable1030
binary_variable1031
binary_variable2000
binary_variable2001
binary_variable1002
analog_input112…127
analog_input128…143
analog_input144
binary_variable3000
binary_variable3001
binary_variable3003
binary_variable3004
binary_variable3005
binary_variable3006
binary_variable3007
binary_variable3008
binary_variable3009
binary_variable3011
ELECTRICAL POWER
A.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in
electrical Sections.
B.
Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers,
transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power
connection to boiler.
1.
House in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.
2.
Wiring shall be numbered and color coded to match wiring diagram.
3.
Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway.
4.
Field power interface shall be to fused disconnect switch.
5.
Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or
circuit breaker.
6.
Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.
2.6
VENTING KITS
A.
Kit: Complete system, ASTM A 959, Type 29-4C stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal, thimble,
indoor plate, vent adapter, condensate trap and dilution tank, and sealant.
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
B.
2.7
Combustion-Air Intake: Complete system, stainless steel, pipe, vent terminal with screen, inlet
air coupling, and sealant.
A.
Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide,
oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion
efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.
B.
Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to 2010 ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
BOILER INSTALLATION
A.
Equipment Mounting:
1.
Install boilers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for
equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-restraint devices specified in
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
3.
Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13
"Vibration Controls for HVAC."
B.
Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.
C.
Assemble and install boiler trim.
D.
Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.
E.
Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at least full
size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.
D.
Connect piping to boilers, except safety relief valve connections, with flexible connectors of
materials suitable for service. Flexible connectors and their installation are specified in Section
232116 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."
E.
Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gastrain connection. Provide a reducer if required.
F.
Connect hot-water piping to supply- and return-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or
flange at each connection.
G.
Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
H.
Boiler Venting:
1.
Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.
2.
Connect full size to boiler connections.
I.
Systems."
J.
Cables."
3.3
A.
representative:
1.
Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.
Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
3.
Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust
air-fuel ratio and combustion.
4.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a.
Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set
points of fuel supply, water level, and water temperature.
b.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
B.
Boiler will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
D.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to
Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
CONDENSING BOILERS
235216 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SECTION 237412 – PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes the following rooftop air conditioners.
1.
Cooling and heating units larger than 20 tons.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each model indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional
engineer.
1.
Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for
designing vibration isolation bases.
2.
Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate
coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
3.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
D.
E.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, “Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration.”
C.
Energy-Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
D.
Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, “Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”
E.
Comply with NFPA 54 for gas-fired furnace section.
F.
ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities Less Than 135,000 BTUH: Rate rooftop airconditioner capacity according to ARI 210/240, “Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat
Pump Equipment.”
1.
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, “Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment.
G.
ARI Compliance for Units with Capacities 135,000 BTUH and More: Rate rooftop airconditioner capacity according to ARI 340/360, “Commercial and Industrial Unitary AirConditioning and Heat Pump Equipment.”
237412 - 1
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
1.
1.4
Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with ARI 270, “Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary
Equipment.”
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than five years
from date of Substantial Completion.
2.
Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than 10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
manufactures specified.
ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
AAON, Inc.
2.
Carrier Corp.
3.
Governair.
4.
Mammoth Inc.
5.
McQuay International.
6.
Trane Company (The); North American Commercial Group.
7.
YORK International Corporation.
B.
General Description:
1.
Packaged rooftop unit shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans,
dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, gas haters, and unit controls.
2.
Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the DX coils, pressure
testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report
shall be supplied with the unit in the service compartment’s literature pocket.
3.
Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution
areas for safety and to assist service personnel.
4.
Unit components shall be labeled, including refrigeration system components and
electrical and controls components.
5.
Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet.
6.
Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.
7.
Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be
affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
8.
Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the
unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s hinged access door.
C.
Construction:
1.
All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact
resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.
2.
Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13. Foam insulation
shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM D1929-11 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F.
237412 - 2
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a
thermal break. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture
accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer
through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.
Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Cabinet
leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the minimum external
static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection shall not exceed
L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches of positive or
negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be measured at the
midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be included between
panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air leakage. Piping and
electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage.
Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have
rain break overhangs above access doors.
Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, heaters, compressors, and electrical and
controls components shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast,
lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors.
Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no visible
corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with
ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.
Units with cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans.
Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings through
the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in height around
the opening.
Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit.
Supply Fans:
1.
Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.
2.
Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators.
3.
Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours
service with external lubrication points.
4.
Unit shall be equipped with variable frequency drive (VFD, inverter). The VFD shall be
provided with a metal enclosure and shall be factory-mounted, -wired and –tested. The
VFD shall control motor speed to maintain setpoint static pressure control at the duct or
space sensor tube location. The fan drive shall be field-adjustable to maintain duct or
space static pressure setpoint from 0.0-in. wg to 5-in.wg (0 to 1246 Pa), adjustable via
scrolling marquee display or Navigator. A pressure transducer shall be factory-mounted
and –wired. (Control tubing from sensor tube location to transducer shall be fieldsupplied and –installed.) Transducer shall provide a 4 to 20 mA signal to the unit control
module; unit control module shall provide a 4 to to 20 mA signal to the VFD indicating
desired VFD output level.
5.
The variable speed drive shall include the following features:
a.
Full digital control.
b.
Insulated Gate Bi-Polar Transistors (IGBT) used to produce the output pulse width
modulated (PWM) waveform, allowing for quiet motor operation.
c.
Inverters capable of operation at a frequency of 8 kHz so no acoustic noise shall
be produced by the motor.
d.
NEMA 1 metal enclosure for reduction of RFI (radio frequency interference).
e.
Digital display keypad module, mounted on the VFD enclosure.
f.
Local/Remote and Manual/Auto function keys on the keypad.
g.
UL listed electronic overload protection.
h.
Critical frequency avoidance.
i.
Self diagnostics.
j.
On-board storage of unit manufacturer’s customer user settings, retrievable from
the keypad.
k.
RS232C communications capability standard.
237412 - 3
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
l.
m.
RS485 communications capability (accessory card source required).
Internal electronic filtration to reduce EMI generation.
E.
Cooling Coils:
1.
Evaporator Coils:
a.
Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper
tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel
end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.
b.
Coils shall have interlaced circuitry and shall be 6 row high capacity.
c.
Coils shall be hydrogen or helium leak tested.
d.
Coils shall be furnished with factory installed expansion valves.
F.
Refrigeration System:
1.
Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.
2.
There shall be a minimum of four (4) compressors.
3.
Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be
accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors
shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam injected panels to prevent the
transmission of noise outside the cabinet.
4.
Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s
recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any transmission of noise from the
compressors into the building area.
5.
Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with expansion valve type refrigerant flow
control.
6.
Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual
reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls. Schrader type service fittings on both the
high pressure and low pressure sides and a factory installed replaceable core liquid line
filter driers.
7.
Unit shall include a variable speed scroll compressor on the lead refrigeration circuit
which shall be capable of modulation from 10-100% of its capacity.
8.
Lag refrigeration circuit shall be provided with factory installed hot gas bypass to protect
against evaporator frosting and to prevent excessive compressor cycling.
G.
Condensers:
1.
Air-Cooled Condenser.
a.
Condenser fans shall be a vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fans.
b.
Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant. Coils shall be multipass
and fabricated from aluminum microchannel tubes.
c.
Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling.
d.
Coils shall be hydrogen or helium leak tested.
H.
Gas Heating:
1.
Stainless steel heat exchanger furnace shall carry a 25 year non-prorated warranty, from
the date of original equipment shipment from the factory.
2.
Gas furnace shall consist of stainless steel heat exchangers with multiple concavities, an
induced draft blower and an electronic pressure switch to lockout the gas valve until the
combustion chamber is purged and combustion airflow is established.
3.
Furnace shall include a gas ignition system consisting of an electronic igniter to a pilot
system, which will be continuous when the heater is operating, but will shut off the pilot
when heating is not required.
4.
Unit shall include a single gas connection and have gas supply piping entrances in the
unit base for through-the-curb gas piping and in the outside cabinet wall for across the
roof gas piping.
5.
Natural gas furnace shall be equipped with modulating gas valves, adjustable speed
combustion blowers, stainless steel tubular heat exchangers, and electronic controller.
Combustion blowers and gas valves shall be capable of modulation. Electronic controller
237412 - 4
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
includes a factory wired, field installed supply air temperature sensor. Sensor shall be
field installed in the supply air ductwork. Supply air temperature setpoint shall be
adjustable on the electronic controller within the controls compartment. Gas heating
assemblies shall be capable of operating at any firing rate between 100% and 20% of
their rated capacity.
I.
Filters:
1.
Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel pre-filters and final filters with MERV ratings
of 8 and 14, respectively, upstream of the cooling coil.
J.
Outside Air:
1.
Unit shall be 100% outside air unit consisting of a motor operated outside air damper
constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and
aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more
than 20 cfm of leakage per sq. ft. at 4 in. w.g. air pressure differential across the damper.
Low leakage dampers shall be Class 2 AMCA certified, in accordance with AMCA
Standard 511. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return sensible
temperature activated fully modulating actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening
bird screen and outside air hood.
K.
Controls:
1.
Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller:
a.
Single Zone VAV Controller.
1)
Unit shall utilize a variable capacity compressor system and a variable
speed fan system to modulate the cooling and airflow as required in meeting
the space temperature needs and to save unit operating energy. Unit fan
speed shall modulate based on space temperature, not supply air pressure.
2)
Units shall have modulating gas and shall be capable of modulating fan
speed in both the heating and cooling mode.
3)
Unit shall be provided with supply air temperature control. Mixing boxes and
bypass ducts shall not be required for operation as a single zone VAV
system.
b.
Controller shall be provided with Ethernet communications port and license to
allow end user interfacing via the BACnet IP protocol. AAON JENEsys Control
Networking.
OBJECT NAME
SupplyAirTemperature
OutsideAirTemperature
OutsideAirHumidity
ReturnAirTemperature
RefigSuctionPress1
RefigSuctionPress2
HeatPumpCoilTempSensor1
SupplyFanStatus
RemoteStartStop
SmokeOrEmergShutdown
CloggedFilterSwitch
DuctStaticPress
BuildingStaticPress
SpaceTemp
SpaceSptKnob
SpaceRelativeHumidity
VALUE NAM E
analogValue_0
analogValue_1
analogValue_2
analogValue_3
analogValue_4
analogValue_5
analogValue_6
binaryValue_0
binaryValue_1
binaryValue_2
binaryValue_3
analogValue_7
analogValue_8
analogValue_9
analogValue_10
analogValue_11
237412 - 5
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
DischargeLineTemp1
SupplyFanStartStop
CoolingStage1
CoolingStage2
ReversingValve
HeatingStage1
HeatingStage2
HeatingStage3
HGRHEnable
ExhaustFanStartStop
ReturnFanStartStop
HeatWheelEnable
OaDamper
ReturnDamper
BypassDamper
SCRElect
ModGasSetpoint
HotWaterValve
DigitalScrollCompressor1
ChilledWaterValve
MHGRValve
SupplyFanVFD
ExhaustFanVFD
ReturnFanVFD
DischargeLineTemp2
HeatWheelStatus
DischargeLineTemp3
CO2
DischargeLineTemp4
HeatWheelLvgMixedAirTemp
DischargePressure2
WCCondLeavingWaterTemp1
DischargePressure2
WCCondLeavingWaterTemp2
DischargePressure3
WaterCoolCondFlowSwitch
DischargePressure4
WaterCoolCondFlowSwitch2
HeatPumpCoilTempSensor2
CoolingStage3
CoolingStage4
AirHeatPumpCondenserDisable
HeatingStage4
HeatingStage5
Cond1WtrValve
CondFanVFD1
Cond2WtrValve
CondFanVFD2
AFMS
CO2DBox
EF_RF_Status
Exhaust-Filter
HeatPumpCoilTempSensor1DBox
analogValue_12
binaryValue_4
binaryValue_5
binaryValue_6
binaryValue_7
binaryValue_8
binaryValue_10
binaryValue_12
binaryValue_14
binaryValue_15
binaryValue_16
binaryValue_17
analogValue_13
analogValue_14
analogValue_15
analogValue_16
analogValue_17
analogValue_18
analogValue_19
analogValue_20
analogValue_21
analogValue_22
analogValue_23
analogValue_24
analogValue_25
binaryValue_18
analogValue_26
analogValue_27
analogValue_28
analogValue_29
analogValue_30
analogValue_31
analogValue_32
analogValue_33
analogValue_34
binaryValue_19
analogValue_35
binaryValue_20
analogValue_36
binaryValue_21
binaryValue_22
binaryValue_23
binaryValue_24
binaryValue_26
analogValue_37
analogValue_38
analogValue_39
analogValue_40
analogValue_41
analogValue_42
analogValue_43
binaryValue_28
binaryValue_29
analogValue_44
237412 - 6
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
HeatPumpCoilTempSensor2DBox
HeatwheelStatusDBox
HeatingStage6
HeatingStage7
HeatingStage8
AirHeatPumpCondenserDisableDBox
OutsideEnthalpy
OutsideCFM
SpaceDewpoint
SpaceEnthalpy
HeatingSupplySetpoint
HeatingSupplyHighLimit
CoolingSupplySetpoint
CoolingSupplyLowLimit
SuctionTempSetpoint
SuctionLowLimit
DSCompMinPos
ReheatSupplySetpoint
SupplyFanMinimumSpeed
DuctStaticPressureSptet
MHGRHPurgeEnableSelect
BuildingStatisPressureSpt
ExhaustFanMinimumSpeed
HeatWheelDefrostEnableSpt
HeatWheelDefrostEnableSptDiff
OATHeatWheelDifferenceSetpoint
HeatWheelDefrostEnable
ReturnFanMinimumSpeed
SensibleEconSetpoint
SensibleEconSetpointDiff
EnthalpyEconSetpoint
EnthalpyEconSetpointDiff
CO2Setpoint
OutsideAirDamperMinimumPosition
ConstOASetpoint
OutsideDamperLowLimitSetpoint
MechCoolingOADamperLockoutSpt
MechCoolingOADamperDisableSpt
OccupiedCoolSetpoint
UnoccupiedCoolSetpoint
OccupiedHeatSetpoint
UnoccupiedHeatSetpoint
CoolingEnableDifferential
HeatingEnableDifferential
CoolingLockoutSetpoint
DehumidDewpointEnableSetpoint
DehumidDewpointEnableSptDiff
SystemEnable
UnoccupiedModeEnable
SpaceTempSptKnobEnable
PushButtonOverrideEnable
CoolingSupplyDifferential
analogValue_45
binaryValue_34
binaryValue_35
binaryValue_37
binaryValue_39
binaryValue_40
analogValue_46
analogValue_47
analogValue_48
analogValue_49
analogValue_50
analogValue_51
analogValue_52
analogValue_53
analogValue_54
analogValue_55
analogValue_56
analogValue_57
analogValue_58
analogValue_59
analogValue_60
analogValue_61
binaryValue_44
analogValue_62
analogValue_63
analogValue_64
analogValue_65
analogValue_66
binaryValue_45
analogValue_67
analogValue_68
analogValue_69
analogValue_70
analogValue_71
analogValue_72
analogValue_73
analogValue_74
analogValue_75
analogValue_76
analogValue_77
analogValue_78
analogValue_79
analogValue_80
analogValue_81
analogValue_82
analogValue_83
analogValue_84
analogValue_85
analogValue_86
binaryValue_46
binaryValue_47
binaryValue_48
binaryValue_49
analogValue_87
237412 - 7
Bid Documents
February 2, 2016
SuctionTempDifferential
MHGRHMinimumPosition
HeatingSupplyDifferential
ComparativeEconsetpoint
ComparativeEconSetpointDiff
HeatPumpLockoutSetpoint
CondenserFanMinimumSpeed
CondenserFanEnableSetpoint
WaterCondTemperatureSetpoint
OccupiedCoolSetpointOutput
OccupiedHeatSetpointOutput
DehumidHumidityEnableSetpoint
DehumidHumidityEnableSptDiff
DehumidTypeSelect
WaterCondValveMinimumPosition
CoolingFailureAlarmSetpoint
HeatingFailureAlarmSetpoint
HeatPumpCoilTempDefrostSetpoint
CoolingLockoutSetpointDiff
SupplyFanLowLimit
SupplyFanLowLimitDiff
SupplyFanHighLimit
SupplyFanHighLimitDiff
MixedAirTempLowLimitEnable
MixedAirTempLowLimitDisable
CondenserFanDisableSetpoint
CoolHighSupplyAirTempReset
CoolLowSupplyAirTempReset
CoolLowSpaceTempReset
CoolHighSpaceTempReset
HeatHighSupplyAirTempReset
HeatLowSupplyAirTempReset
CoolingControlSelect
HeatingControlSelect
DischargePressureCoolingSetpoint
DischargePressureDehumidSetpoint
CoolingIntegralConstant
CoolingThrottlingRange
HeatingIntegralConstant
HeatingThrottlingRane
EconIntegralConstant
EconThrottlingRange
CO2IntegralConstant
RetExhFanOADamperEnableSpt
CoolReset
HeatReset
BacnetOccupancy
CurrentMode
HeatLowSpaceTempReset
HeatHighSpaceTempReset
MorningWarmUpSptDiff
MorningCoolDownSptDiff
MorningWarmUpSetpoint
MorningCoolDownSetpoint
analogValue_88
analogValue_89
analogValue_90
analogValue_91
analogValue_92
analogValue_93
analogValue_94
analogValue_95
analogValue_96
analogValue_98
analogValue_99
analogValue_100
analogValue_101
binaryValue_50
analogValue_102
analogValue_103
analogValue_104
analogValue_105
analogValue_97
analogValue_106
analogValue_107
analogValue_108
analogValue_109
analogValue_110
analogValue_111
analogValue_112
anal

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR JVWTP LABORATORY HVAC

Transcription

Similar documents

Hymax Couplings 1.5

`Polar Bear`- Urecon Corporate Overview

Fernco Flexible Coupling Installation - Fernco

Pharmaceutical Facility Process Piping Installation

PRE-INSULATED PEXa PIPING

Name recipe - Pastry direct

Bondstrand™ Marine Piping Systems

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago

2008 - SEAOSD

Polyisocyanurate Pipe Insulation